"if Ws)t Mmbergttp OF prtt&f) Columbia CALENDAR THIRTEENTH SESSION 1927- 1928 VANCOUVER. BRITISH COLUMBIA 1927 Wbt WLuibtxtity OF JlrttteJ) Columbia CALENDAR Thirteenth Session 1927-1928 VANCOUVER, BRITISH COLUMBIA 1927 CONTENTS Page Academic Year 5 Visitor 7 Chancellor 7 President 7 The Board of Governors 7 The Senate 7 Officers and Staff 8 Historical Sketch 15 The Constitution of the University 17 The Work of the University 18 Retiring Allowances 19 Endowments and Donations 20 Suggested Local Scholarships 21 The Library 22 New Buildings 24 General Information 36 Admission to the University 38 Registration and Attendance 40 Fees 42 Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 44 Faculty op Arts and Science Time Table of Lectures 60 Time Table of Supplemental Examinations 64 Regulations in Reference to Courses First and Second Years 66 Third and Fourth Years—Pass 68 Third and Fourth Years—Honours 69 For the M.A. Degree 75 Examinations and Advancement 81 Courses of Instruction— Department of Bacteriology 83 " Botany 84 " Chemistry 89 " Classics 93 " Economics, Sociology and Political Science .. 97 " Education 101 " English 105 " " Geology and Geography 112 " History 117 " " Mathematics 123 " " Modern Languages 128 " Philosophy 132 " Physics 135 " Zoology 137 Faculty op Applied Science Foreword 141 Regulations in Reference to Courses 143 General Outline of Courses 145 Courses in— Chemical Engineering 147 Chemistry 148 Civil Engineering 149 Electrical Engineering 152 Forest Engineering 153 The University op British Columbia . Geological Engineering 155 Mechanical Engineering 157 Metallurgical Engineering 158, 160 Mining Engineering 158, 161 Nursing and Health 162 Double Course in Arts and Applied Science 170 Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.Sc 170 Examinations and Advancement 172 Courses of Instruction— Department of Botany 174 " Chemistry 177 " Civil Engineering 180 " " Economics 191 " Forestry 191 " " Geology and Geography 196 " Mathematics 201 " " Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 202 " " Mining and Metallurgy 214 " Physics 218 " Nursing and Health 220 " Zoology 224 Faculty op Agriculture Time Table of Lectures 226 Regulations in Reference to Courses— For the B.S.A. Degree 229 The Occupational Course 229 Short Courses 230 Extension Courses 230 Graduate Work 231, 236 Courses in— Agronomy Major 233 Animal Husbandry Major 234 Dairyinig Major 234 Horticulture Major 235 Poultry Husbandry Major 235 Zoology (Entomology) Major 236 Examinations and Advancement 237 Courses of Instruction— Department of Agronomy 239 " Animal Husbandry 242 " Dairying 245 " Horticulture 248 " Poultry Husbandry 250 " " Agricultural Economics 253 List of Students in Attendance, Session 1926-27 255 Degrees Conferred, May, 1926 288 Medals, Scholarships and Prizes Awarded, May, 1926 293 Summer Session 297 Student Organization 298 Affiliated Colleges— Victoria College 302 Westminster Hall 303 Anglican Theological College 303 Ryerson College 304 Academic Year ACADEMIC YEAR 1927-1928 1927 1 I Matriculation Supplemental Examinations Monday, [ begin August 29th. J „■ , t Supplemental Examinations in Arts begin. September 14th. J rF * Tuesday, 1 Supplemental Examinations in Applied September 20th. J Science begin. Friday 1 September 23rd. } LaSt day f °r Registr*tion- Tuesday, 1 September 27th. } lectures begm. Monday, 1 . „. _ October 10th I Last day for Payment of First Term fees- Saturday, I Lagt for ch in Student8» Courses. October 15th. I Wednesday, 1 ^^ f ^ genate October 19th. J Friday, I Lagt dfty of Lectures for Term# December 9th. ; Monday, I. Exainiliations begin. December 12th. J Wednesday, \ Meeting of the Senate. December 21st. | Thursday, \ December 22nd, J" Examinations end. The University op British Columbia 1928 Monday, January 9th. Monday, January 23rd. Wednesday, February 15th. Thursday, April 12th. Monday, April 16th. Second Term begins. I Last day for payment of Second Term fees, t Meeting of the Senate. Last day of Lectures. Thursday, April 26th. Wednesday, May 9th. Thursday, May 10th. Thursday, May 10th. Friday, June 22nd. Sessional Examinations begin. Field Work in Applied Science begins immediately at the close of the Examinations \ Last day for payment of Graduation fees. } Meeting of the Senate. Congregation. Meeting of Convocation. Junior Matriculation Examinations begin. (Date of Senior Matriculation Examinations to be arranged.) THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA VISITOR The Hon. R. Randolph Bruce, Lieutenant-Governor of British Columbia. CHANCELLOR R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.CS. PRESIDENT L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D. BOARD OF GOVERNORS R. E. McKechnie, Esq., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.CS. (ex officio). L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D. (ex officio), Robebt P. McLennan, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1927. B. C. Nicholas, Esq., Victoria. Term expires 1927. Joseph N. Ellis, Esq., B.C.L., K.C, Vancouver. Term expires 1937. Evltn F. K. Farbis, M.A., LL.D., Vancouver. Term expires 1939. Denis. Muhphy, Hon. Mb. Justice, Vancouver. Term expires 1939.. Henbt C Shaw, Esq., B.A., Vancouver. Term expires 1929. Robie L. Reid, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931. Campbell Sweeny, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931. Chbistopheb Spencer, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931. SENATE (a) The Minister of Education, The Honourable John Duncan MacLean, M.D., CM., LL.D. The Chancellor. The President (Chairman). (6) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esq., B.S.A., M.A. Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Bbock, Esq., M.A, LL.D., F.G.S, F.R.S.C. Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, H. T. J. Coleman, Esq., B.A, PhJD. Representatives of the Faculty of Agriculture; H. M. Kino, Esq., B.S.A., M.S.; A. F. Barss, Esq., A.B., B.S. in Agr., M.S. Representatives of the Faculty of Applied Science: H. R. Christie, Esq., B.SC.F.; R. H. Clark, Esq., M.A., Ph.D. Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science: Daniel Buchanan, Esq., M.A, Ph.D., F.R.S.C; M. Y. Williams, Esq., B.Sc, Ph.D, F.G.S.A. The University op British Columbia (c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:— E. J. Rothwell, Esq., M.B, New Westminster. His Honour Peter S. Lampman, Victoria. James Henderson, Esq, M.A, Vancouver. (d) The Superintendent of Education, S. J. Willis, Esq, B.A, LL.D. The Principal of Vancouver Normal School, D. M. Robinson, Esq, B.A. The Principal of Victoria Normal School, D. L. MacLaubin, Esq, B.A (e) Representative of High School Principals and Assistants, G. A. Ferousson, Esq, B.A. (/) Representatives of Affiliated Colleges:— Victoria College, Victoria, E. B. Paul, Esq, M.A, LL.D. Westminster Hall, Vancouver (Theological), Rev. W. H. Smith, M.A, Ph.D, D.D. The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia, Vancouver, Rev. W. H. Vance, M.A, D.D. Rverson College, Vancouver (Theological), Rev. J. G. Brown, M.A, D.D. (g) Elected by Convocation:— G. G. Sedgewick, Esq, B.A, Ph.D, Vancouver. C Killam, Esq, M.A, D.C.L, Vancouver. Rev. A. H. Sovebeign, M.A, B.D, F.R.G.S, Vancouver. His Honoub J. D. Swanson, B.A, Kamloops. The Most Rev. A. U. de Pencieb, M.A, D.D, Vancouver. W B. Burnett, Esq, B.A, M.D, CM, F;A.CS, Vancouver. G. W. Scott, Esq, B.A, Vancouver. A. E. Lord, Esq, B.A, Vancouver. Sherwood Lett, Esq., B.A, Vancouver. J. M. Turnbull, Esq., B.A.Sc, Vancouver. J. S. Gordon, Esq, B.A, Vancouver. G. E. Robinson, Esq, B.A, Vancouver. A. E. Richards, Esq, B.S.A, New Westminster. W. P. Argue, Esq, B.A, Vancouver. Miss A. B. Jamieson, B.A, Vancouver. OFFICERS AND STAFF L. S. Klinck, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S.A, D.Sc. (Iowa State College), LL.D. (Western Ontario), President. H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science. Reginald W. Brock, M.A, LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S, F.R.S.C, Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science. F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A (Wisconsin), Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture. Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Dean of Women. Stanley W. Mathews, M.A. (Queen's), Registrar. F. Dallas, Bursar. John Ridington, Librarian. Officers and Staff Department of Agronomy P. A. Boving, Cand. Ph. (Malmb, Sweden), Cand. Agr. (Alnarp. Agriculture, Sweden), Professor and Head of the Department. G. G. Moe, B.S.A, M.Sc. (McGill), Associate Professor (on leave of absence 1927-28). D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor. Geo. B. Boving, B.S.A. (McGill), Assistant. Department of Animal Husbandry H. M. King, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College), Professor and Head of the Department. R. L. Davis, B.S. (Montana), M.S. (Iowa State College), Assistant Professor. H. R. Hare, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor. J. G. Jervis, V.S. (Ont. Vet Col.), B.V.Sc (Toronto), Lecturer in Veterinary Science. Department of Bacteriology Hibbebt Winslow Hill, M.B, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C. Professor and Head of the Department. Miss Freda L. Wilson, M.A. (Brit Col.), Instructor. Miss Helen M. Mathews, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Department of Botany Andrew H. Hutchinson, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head of the Department John Davidson, F.L.S., F.B.S.E, Assistant Professor. Frank Dickson,- B.A. (Queen's), Assistant Professor. Mtss Mildred H. Campbell, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Miss Jean Davidson, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Braham G. Griffith, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant C W. Aroue, B.S.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant Department of Chemistry E. H. Archibald, B.Sc (Dal.), A.M, Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.S.E.&C, Professor and Head of the Department Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipsig), Professor of Organic Chemistry. W. F. Seyer, B.A, M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), Associate Professor. M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology), Assistant Professor. J. Allen Harris, M.A. (Brit Col.), Ph.D. (Illinois), Assistant Professor (on leave of absence 1927-28). John Allardyce, M.A. (Brit CoL), Instructor. M. Neal Carter, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Lecturer. R. W. Ball, B.A- (Brit Col.), Assistant. D. F. Stedman, B.A.Sc. (Brit Col.), Ph.D. (London), Assistant A. F. Gallaugher, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant R. H. Ball, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant 10 The University of British Columbia Department of Civil Engineering William E. Duckering A.B, B.S. in C.E, C.E. (Washington), Professor and Head of the Department. E. G. Matheson, B.A.Sc. (McGill), M.E.I.C, M.Am.S.CE, Associate Professor. F. A. Wilkin, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor. J. R. Grant, B.Sc. (Queen's), M.E.I.C, M.A.S.CE, Special Lecturer. A. Lighthall, B.Sc. (McGill), Instructor. A. G. Stuart, B.Sc. (McGill), Instructor. Carl F. Barton, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Department of Classics Lemuel Robertson, M.A. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department. O. J. Todd, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of Greek. H. T. Logan, B.A. (McGill and Oxon), M.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor. Homer A. Thompson, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Department of Dairying Wilfrid Sadler, B.S.A, M.Sc. (McGill), N.D.D, British Dairy Institute, University College, Reading, England, Professor and Head of the Department. N. S. Golding, N.D.A, N.D.D, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.Sc. (Iowa), Associate Professor. J. D. Middlemas, B.Sc. (Agr.), (Edinburgh), Assistant. Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science Theodore H. Boggs, B.A. (Acadia and Yale), M.A, Ph.D. (Yale), Professor and Head of the Department. Henry F. Angus, B.A. (McGill), B.C.L, M.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor. S. E. Beckett, M.A. (Queen's), Assistant Professor. Norman A. Robertson, B.A. (Brit. Col.), B.A. (Oxon.), Lecturer. George Allen, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Miss Doris Lee, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Department of Education George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D.Paed. (Queen's), Professor and Head of the Department. Mrs. Jennie Benson Wyman, B.A, M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M., Ph.D. (Stanford), Assistant Professor of Psychology and Education. H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Special Lecturer. Department of English G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and Head of the Department. W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate Professor. Officers and Staff 11 Frederick G. C Wood, B.A- (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Associate Professor. Thorleif Larsen, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon), Associate Professor. Francis Cox Walker, B.A. (U.N.B.), A.M, PhD. (Harvard), Assistant Professor. Mm M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Assistant Professor. Frank H. Wilcox, A.B, Ph.D. (Calif.), Assistant Professor. Mas Sallee Murphy, B.A. (Brit. CoL), M.A. (Toronto), Assistant. Miss Dorothy Wboughton, B.A. (Oxon.), Assistant Department of Forestry H. R. Christie, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Professor and Head of the Department F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), Assistant Professor. Department of Geology and Geography R. W. Brock, M.A, LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S, F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department. S. J. Schofield, M.A, B.Sc (Queen's), Ph.D. (Mass. Institute of Technology), F.G.S.A, F.R.S.C, Professor of Physical and Structural Geology. M. Y. Williams, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A, Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy. T. C Phemister, B.Sc. (Glasgow), Sc.M. (Chicago), PhD. (Glasgow), Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography. E. M. Burwash, B.A. (Toronto), M.A, B.D. (Victoria), PhJD. (Toronto and Chicago), Lecturer. W. A. Jones, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. ^ Department of History Mack Eastman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Professor and Head of the Department. (On leave of absence). W. N. Sage, B.A. (Toronto and Oxon), M.A. (Oxon), Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor and Acting Head of the Department. F. H. Soward, B.A. (Toronto), B.Litt. (Oxon), Assistant Professor. Hugh L. Keenleyside, B.A,. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Clark), Lecturer. Stanley Moodie, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant. Department of Horticulture F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor and Head of the Department. A. F. Barss, A.B. (Rochester), B.S. in Agr. (Cornell), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College), Professor. F. E. Buck, B.S.A. (McGill), Assistant Professor. John C Wilcox, B.S.A. (Brit CoL), Assistant 12 The University of British Columbia Department of Mathematics Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), PhD. (Chicago), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department. F. S. Nowlan, B.A. (Acadia), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Chicago). George E. Robinson, B.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor. E. E. Jordan, M.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor. L. Richardson, B.Sc. (London), Assistant Professor. B. S. Hartley, M.A. (Cambridge), R.N. (retired), Assistant Professor. Walter H. Gage, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. Miss May L. Barclay, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant. Miss Islay Johnston, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant A. P. Mellish, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Herbert Vickers, M.E. (Liverpool), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Birmingham), Professor and Head of the Department. F. W. Vernon, B.Sc. (London), Associate Professor of Mechanical En gineering. I f H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. Engineering (London), AJU.I. MechE, Assistant Professor of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering. Leonard B. Stacet, B.A.Sc. (Brit Col.)t Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering. G. Sinclair Smith, M.A.Sc. (McGill), Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering. John F. Bell, Eng. Capt. O.B.E, R.N, M.E.I.C, Instructor in Mechanical Engineering. Department of Mining and Metallurgy J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department H. N. Thomson, B.Sc. (McGill), Professor of Metallurgy. George A. Gillies, M.Sc (McGill), Associate Professor of Mining. W. B. Bishop, Assistant in Metallurgy. Department of Modern Languages H. Ashton, M.A. (Cantab), D. Lett. (Univ. Paris), D. Litt. (Birmingham), F.R.S.C, Officier de l'Instruction Publique (France), Professor and Head of the Department (on leave of absence 1927-28). A. F. B. Clark, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate Professor of French. Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Calif), Assistant Professor of Modern Languages. Henri Chodat, M.A. (McGill and Harvard), Assistant Professor of French. Officers and Staff 13 Miss Janet T. Greig, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit CoL), Instructor in French. E. E. Delavault, B. es L, L. en D. (Paris), Assistant in Oral French. Madame G. Barry, Assistant in Oral French. Miss Madge Portsmouth, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant in French. Miss S. J. Battle, M.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant in German. Mdjs Wessie Tipping, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant in French. Department of Nursing and Health Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B, M.D, D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department. Mabel F. Gray, R.N, Cert.P.H.N. (Simmons College), Assistant Professor of Nursing. Department of Philosophy H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), PhD. (Columbia), Professor and Head of the Department. James Henderson, M.A. (Glasgow), Associate Professor. Mrs. Jennie Benson Wyman, B.A, M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M, Ph.D. (Stanford), Assistant Professor of Psychology and Education. Department of Physics T. C. Hebb, M.A, B.Sc (Dal.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head of the Department. A. E. Hennings, M.A. (Lake Forest College, ILL), PhJX (Chicago), Associate Professor. J. G. Davidson, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (CaL), Associate Professor. Gordon Merritt Shrcm, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Assistant Professor. D. F. Stedman, B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Ph.D. (London), Assistant Department of Poultry Husbandry E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A. (Sask.), Professor and Head of the Department. V. S. Asmundson, B.S.A. (Sask.}, M.S.A. (Cornell), Assistant Professor. W. J. Riley, B.S.A. (Brit CoL), Assistant. Department of Zoology C McLean Fbasee, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Iowa), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department. G. J. Spencer, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Illinois), Assistant Professor (on leave of absence 1927-28). Miss Gertrude M. Smith, B.A. (Brit Col.), Instructor. Miss Mildred H. Campbell, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant. Harold White, M.D, CM. (McGill), Medical Examiner to Students. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA HISTORICAL SKETCH The creation of a University in British Columbia was first advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was not until 1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an Act establishing a body politic and corporate named '' The University of British Columbia." In 1891 this Aet was amended to require that a meeting of the Senate be held within one month after the election of the Senators by Convocation. The Senators were elected, but a quorum did not assemble on the date fixed by the Chancellor, Dr. I. W. Powell, of Victoria. Thus the first attempt to establish a University in British Columbia failed. However, some of the work normally done in a University was begun in 1894, when an Act was passed which permitted the affiliation of high schools in the Province with recognized Canadian Universities. In 1899 Vancouver High School was affiliated with McGill University in order to provide First Year work in Arts, and took the name of Vancouver College. First Year work in Arts was offered by Victoria High School when it became Victoria College by affiliation with McGill University in 1902. In the same year Vancouver College undertook the Second Year in Arts. In 1906 an Aet was passed incorporating the Royal Institution for the Advancement of Learning of British Columbia, which, in the same year, established at Vancouver the McGill University College of British Columbia. The scope of the work undertaken by this college was gradually increased until at the time it was taken over by the University of British Columbia it was giving three years in Arts and Science, and two years in Applied Science. When the University of British Columbia opened in the autumn of 1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and Victoria College, which since 1907 had been a part of it, ceased to exist. 16 The University of British Columbia Definite steps to establish the University were taken by Dr. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he introduced a "University Endowment Act." This Act was followed in 1908 by an Aet establishing and incorporating the University of British Columbia and repealing the old Act of 1890-1. This Act, with its subsequent amendments, determines the present constitution of the University. As authorized by an Act passed by the Provincial Legislature in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed a Site Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed University. The Commission held its first meeting on May 25th, 1910, in Victoria, and after a thorough examination of the Province recommended the vicinity of Vancouver. In the autumn the Executive Council decided to place the University at Point Grey—the site which the Commission had named as its first choice. In 1911 the Legislature passed an Act authorizing the Lieutenant-Governor in Council to grant this site to the University. The grant was increased in 1915, so that it now consists of 548 acres at the extremity of Point Grey. The waters of the Gulf of Georgia form more than half the boundary of the University Campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres of Government land immediately adjoining the site, and lying between it and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside by the Government in order that University revenue may be provided by its sale or lease. In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, called for competitive plans which should include plans in detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and a block plan showing all the proposed buildings on the Campus. Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, of Vancouver, B. C, were the successful competitors, and were appointed University architects. The first Convocation, held on August 1st, 1912, chose Mr. F. L. Carter-Cotton as first chancellor of the University. In March, 1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed as President of the University F. F. Wesbrook, M.A, M.D, C.M, LL.D. On April 4th, 1918, Dr. R. E. McKechnie was elected Historical Sketch 17 Chancellor; on April 12th, 1921, he was re-elected for a second term, and on April 3rd, 1924, for a third term. On the death of President Wesbrook, October 20th, 1918, L. S. Klinck, Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed acting President, and on June 1st, 1919, President. From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the University carried on its work in temporary quarters on part of the site of the General Hospital in Fairview. Construction work was commenced on the Science Building at the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but was interrupted because of war conditions. Work on this building was resumed in 1923, and in the Autumn of the same year the contract was let for the Library. These two buildings which are of stone and are fire-proof, conform closely to the original plans as prepared by the architects in 1914. The initial units of these structures, as well as nine other buildings which are of a less permanent character and are described at a later page in this Calendar, were completed in 1925, and at the beginning of Session 1925-26 the University commenced work in its new quarters. The Inauguration of the new buildings was held on October 15th and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary degrees were granted by the University for the first time. THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY The Constitution of the University is governed by the British Columbia University Act B.C.R.S. 1924 c. 265, which provides That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation, Board of Governors, Senate, and the Faculties; that the first Convocation shall consist of all graduates of any university in His Majesty's dominions resident in the Province two years prior to the date fixed for the first meeting of Convocation, together with twenty-five members selected by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council. After the first Convocation it shall consist of the Chancellor, Senate, members of the first Convocation, and all gradutes of the University; that the 18 The University of British Columbia Chancellor shall be elected by Convocation; that the Board of Governors shall consist of the Chancellor, President, and nine persons appointed by the Lieutenant Governor in Council; that the Senate shall consist of: (a) The Minister of Education, the Chancellor, and the President of the University, who shall be Chairman thereof; (b) the deans and two professors of each of the Faculties elected by members of the Faculty; (c) three members to be appointed by the Lieutenant- Governor in Council; (d) the Superintendent of Education, the principals of the normal schools; (e) one member elected by the high-school principals and assistants who are actually engaged in teaching' (/) one member elected by the Provincial Teachers' Institute organized under subsection (e) of section 8 of the "Public Schools Act"; (g) one member to be elected by the governing body of every affiliated college or school in this Province; (h) fifteen members to be elected by Convocation from the members thereof; It is further provided that the University shall be non- sectarian. The University Act gives the University full powers to grant such degrees in the several Faculties and different branches of Knowledge as the Senate may from time to time determine. It reserves for the University the sole right in this Province to confer degrees, except in Theology, and it expressly enacts that "No other university having corporate powers capable of being exercised within the Province shall be known by the same name, nor shall any such university have power to grant degrees." THE WORK OF THE UNIVERSITY The University of British Columbia is an integral part of the public educational system of the Province, and its function is to complete the work begun in the public and high schools. It is the policy of the University to promote education in general, Retiring Allowances 19 and in particular to serve its constituency through three channels—teaching, research, and extension work. As regards teaching, the University furnishes instruction in the various branches of a liberal education and in those technical departments which are most directly related to the life and industries of the Province. The scope of the teaching activity of the University is fully described in Sec. 9 of the Act. In order to make the teaching of the University more vital and for the advancement of knowledge, research is encouraged in every department. The people of the Province are informed of the results of special work by the staff of the University through a system of extension lectures. The University sends lecturers to various parts of the Province during the examination weeks in December and April. In the case of places which can be visited without prejudice to the duties of the lecturer at the University, lectures are arranged to take place during the University term. A list of subjects and lecturers can be obtained on application to the Secretary of the Extension Lecture Committee, through whom all arrangements are made. RETIRING ALLOWANCES In March, 1924, the Board of Governors of the University of British Columbia adopted the contributory plan of retiring allowances for members of the teaching staff. Contracts are placed with the Teachers' Insurance and Annuity Association of America, a corporation made possible by the Carnegie Corporation "to provide insurance and annuities for teachers and other persons employed by colleges, by universities, or by institutions engaged primarily in educational or research work." In May, 1924, the University of British Columbia was elected as a member of the list of institutions associated with the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching and received a grant of $50,000.00, payable in ten annual installments, for the purpose of providing supplementary annuities for the older professors of the institution. 20 The University op British Columbia ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS However well supported by public funds, a University must depend to a great extent upon private benefactors. In anticipation of endowments the Act provides that: "Any person or corporation may, with the approval of the Senate, found one or more professorships, lectureships, fellowships, scholarships, exhibitions, prizes, or other awards in the University, by providing a sufficient endowment in land or other property, and conveying the same to the University for. such purposes, and every such endowment of lands or other property shall be vested in the University for the purpose or purposes for which it is given." Only a limited number are in a position to make endowments, but many—including alumni and friends of higher education—may add greatly to the usefulness of the University by making contributions that lie within their power. It is gratifying to note that the number of those who assist in this way has been constantly growing. The removal of the University to its permanent home in Point Grey has greatly stimulated interest in its welfare and progress, and within the last two years many valuable donations have been received, especially in the form of equipment for the various Laboratories. Among donations received recently special mention should be made of the very fine Ethnological collection representing the arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia donated to the University by Mr. Frank Burnett, Sr, and also of the estate of the late Mr. David Thom, of Hammond, B. C, bequeathed by him to the Faculty of Agriculture. Mr. Thom left his entire estate, consisting of a farm of thirty-five acres and cash and bonds amounting to fifty-five hundred dollars—a total net value of approximately eleven thousand dollars, to be used for the assistance and encouragement of students in the Faculty of Agriculture. A list of the other most important gifts received during last year is given below under the various departments. Endowments and Donations . 21 Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering The Prestolite Co.—Four Prestolite batteries. The Ford Co. of Canada—The loan, for an indefinitely long period, of a motor car engine and chassis. Department of Animal Husbandry T. D. Trapp, Esq, New Westminster—A partial set of Herd Books of the Canadian Ayrshire Breeders' Association. Dr. J. G. Jervis, Milner, B. C.—Livestock wood-cuts and veterinary specimens. Department of Agriculture, Ottawa—Case of mounted wool and cloth samples. Mr. J. F. Vanderhoop, Pemberton Meadows—a complete set of Canadian Ayrshire Herd Register. Department of Botany (For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens) Miss Blanche McAvoy, Chicago—Representative collection of the flora of the Bella Coola district, B.C. Mr. Thos. M. C. Taylor—Collection of specimens from Summerland district, B. C. Mr. E. Walmsley, New Westminster—Seeds of trees and shrubs from Japan. Mr. F. N. Fenton, Kerrisdale—Seeds of Australian native flowers. Calcutta Botanical Gardens—Seeds of Himalayan plants. Dr. J. Griffiths, Vancouver, B. C.—Seeds of Glaucium flavum for medicinal plant investigations. Mr. A. R. Snowball, Vancouver, B. C.—Plants of Yucca for gardens. Professor R. B. Thomson, University of Toronto—Specimens of Cordyceps ("Vegetable caterpillar") from New Zealand. w The above are in addition to numerous small collections sent in to be identified, the specimens being retained for the herbarium. Department of Forestry Dominion Forestry Branch—Samples of tree seed; also various publications. United States Forest Service—Forestry publications. B. C. Forest Branch—Forestry publications. Gordon and James Abernethy—Samples of Hawaiian woods. J. Fyfe Smith & Co. Ltd.—Exhibits of hardwoods, North American and foreign. McLennan, McFeeley & Co. Ltd.—Exhibit of wire rope used in logging. M. Mazur—Samples of Russian woods. Department of Nursing and Health Nursing Class of 1985—Valedictory gift of twenty dollars, to be expended for reference books for the Nursing section of the Library. Department of Philosophy Mrs. James E. Creighton, Victoria—"Studies in Speculative Philosophy," by the late Professor James Edwin Creighton, Ph.D., LL.D., of Cornell University. SUGGESTED LOCAL SCHOLARSHIPS As the number of Matriculation Scholarships offered at present is quite inadequate to the needs of the Province, a scheme which has great possibilities both for the growth of the University and the prosperity of the Province is earnestly recommended to consideration. 22 The University op British Columbia In the large universities, both of Great Britain and the United States, local or district scholarships have proved a strong bond between the community and the University, have brought the University close to the life of the young, and opened up the prospect of a University education to many who would not otherwise have contemplated it. Such local or district scholarships might be established as Matriculation Scholarships, by City or Municipal Councils or other public bodies, or by private benefactors. They would be awarded by a local authority, but the University would reserve the right of confirmation. In awarding such scholarships, standing in the Matriculation Examination need not be the only consideration. It is desirable that regard should be had also to financial circumstances, character, and intellectual promise. Scholarships may be offered for students taking a particular course, and in this way the study of such sciences and technical branches of knowledge as have special importance for the industries of the district may be encouraged. In short, local scholarships may be arranged to meet local needs and to prepare the native sons of the Province to play their part in the development of its resources. THE LIBRARY The University Library consists of 61,000 volumes and about 10,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works in all the courses offered by the University, and a growing collection of works on other subjects. The Library receives regularly about 500 magazines and periodical publications. The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional system. Books can be borrowed by students for a period of seven days, or for a shorter time should the work be in general demand. Books to which the teaching staff have specially re- The Library 23 ferred their students are placed in a "Reserved" class. These are shelved apart from the main collection, and are loaned only for use in the building, and for a limited period of two hours. They may, however, be taken from the Library for over-night loan, or for any period in which the Library is closed. In these cases they are returnable before 9 a.m. Unbound periodicals are not issued on loan. Books that are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general circulation, are loaned only under special conditions. While the Library is primarily for the use of the staff and students of the University, its resources are available to those of the general public engaged in research or special study, and who make personal application to the Librarian for the privilege of its use. During the session the Library is open on week days from 8:45 a.m. to 9:45 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the hour of closing is 5 p.m. In vacation it is open from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the hours are from 9 a.m. to noon. The University is deeply indebted to all who have made gifts to the Library during the past year. These have been both valuable and numerous. Their number prevents detailed acknowledgment, but recognition should be made of a number of sets of transactions, and complete or partial sets of scientific periodicals, given by societies and friends of the University. NEW BUILDINGS LOCATION The new home of the University is situated on the promontory which forms the western extremity of the Point Grey Peninsula. On three sides it is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia. The site comprises an area of 548 acres, of which approximatley one-half is campus. In all directions appear snow-capped mountains, strikingly rugged and impressive. BUILDINGS The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and semipermanent. The former were designed by the University architects, Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter by architects of the Department of Public Works of the Provincial Government. The permanent buildings have been erected in the location originally assigned for them; the others in the quadrangle designated aa "unassigned" in the original plan. By utilizing the "unassigned" area for the semi-permanent buildings, all the locations intended for future expansion have been left available. The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was designed after a close study had been made not only of present requirements, but of the ultimate development of the institution. This consideration accounts for the fact that only a part of the present equipment is permanent. After a careful survey of the whole system, a forced hot water system was found to present advantages that made its adoption advisable. Direct radiation with a system of warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is used to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A separate system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences, and a specially constructed system for fume closets. The various services throughout these buildings, such as hot and cold water, distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory purposes, compressed air, etc., with the necessary apparatus, are all of a modern type. An attempt has been made to reduce New Buildings 25 vibration and noise to a minimum by installing all moving apparatus on floating slabs, with a further insulation of cork. The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings which have been erected and indicates the nature of their construction. It also shows their relation to the other groups of buildings which are to be erected in the future. PERMANENT BUILDINGS Of the twelve buildings which have been erected, three are of fire-proof construction, the Science Building, the Library, and the Power House. Science Building The Science Building has been designed in the Tudor style, this being a phase of English Gothic which lends itself fairly readily to those adaptations which are necessary in order to meet modern collegiate requirements. Externally, British Columbia granite has been used throughout. Wherever possible plain wall surfaces, consisting of the split faces of granite arranged in random sizes with white joints, have been used. The general grey tone is relieved by the use of a small quantity of field stone of darker shades. All window openings are filled with leaded glass in steel sashes. Internally, the building is finished in brick work and tiles in pleasing tones of brown which harmonize with the oak panelled doors, the total effect in keeping with that of the period it is designed to represent. This building, which was designed for the sole use of Chemistry ultimately, now accommodates the Departments of Chemistry, Physics, Bacteriology and Nursing and Health. One and one-half floors are devoted to Chemistry; an equivalent assignment of space has been alloted to Physics, and half of one floor has been set aside for Bacteriology, and Nursing and Health. All lecture rooms and laboratories are well lighted, and a system of forced ventilation has been installed throughout the entire building. Distilled water, gas, steam, compressed air, and electrical supply circuits have been provided wherever re- 26 The University of British Columbia quired. These services are carried in trenches in the floor, an arrangement which facilitates any necessary repairs. Ample provision has also been made for offices, balance rooms, preparation rooms, apparatus rooms, supply rooms, photographic rooms, technicians' rooms, and reading-room for students. Chemistry.—This Department is equipped with one large and one small lecture room, a large laboratory for general chemistry accommodating three hundred and forty students, laboratories for elementary and advanced qualitative and quantitative analysis, an elementary organic laboratory, an advanced organic laboratory and an organic combustion laboratory. A laboratory is available for agricultural chemistry, another for industrial chemistry, and a commodious laboratory for physical chemistry with an adjoining dark room for work in photo-chemistry is found on the third floor. There are also several small laboratories well equipped for research work. Physics.—The Department of Physics has two large lecture rooms, four large and several smaller laboratories, a constant temperature room and a battery room. Three of the large laboratories are equipped for the study of Elementary Physics, Mechanics, and Heat and Electricity. The fourth is specially designed for the conducting of experiments requiring the use of highly sensitive apparatus. Smaller laboratories are designed for light and X-ray experiments. Bacteriology.—Provision has been made in this Department for four laboratories. Two of these are for general student use, one is for serological work and one is for advanced research. In addition to laboratory and lecture room accommodation, an office, a preparation room and a sterilization room have been provided. Nursing and Health.—The three rooms assigned to this Department constitute a teaching unit such as is provided in modern training schools for the instruction of nurses. All the equipment necessary for the demonstration of elementary New BurLDiNGs 27 nursing procedure is available, and can be used for practice teaching purposes. Library Building The central unit of the Library Building is a massive structure of British Columbia granite which harmonizes with the Science Building in its Gothic architectural lines. Owing to the exigencies of the plan, however, the massing is more broken, and thus better effects of light and shade are obtained. Some tracery and stained glass in the upper portion of the building is employed to obtain in a restricted manner the richness of detail characteristic of this style of architecture. Internally, the same effect has been striven for, wherever such an end was possible with due regard to economy. The Main Entrance Hall has a groined ceiling with arches and wall surface finished in Caen Stone plaster. This treatment is carried up to the Main Concourse floor through the staircase Hall; the lower portion of the Concourse walls is plastered with Caen Stone, the quoins to windows and doors, and corbels to roof trusses being finished in the same material. The roofs of the Concourse and of the two reading rooms adjacent are finished in native Woods stained a dark brown, with patterae and shields picked out in bright heraldic colours. Windows throughout the building are of leaded glass. In the Concourse and the inner hall this is of a pale amber shade, with the coats of arms of the Canadian Universities worked into the centre light. On the window above the Loan Desk on the East Side of the Concourse the armorial bearings of Oxford and Cambridge, as the oldest universities of the Empire, are used as flanking emblems to those of the University of British Columbia. The floors of the Main Entrance Hall staircases and of the Concourse are finished with large marbled rubber tiles which harmonize with the general colour scheme, and ensure quietness in the principal parts of the building. Plain oak of simple detail, stained to represent old fumed oak, is used throughout for doors and other wood finish. The principal reading room has a floor space of 100 ft. by 50 ft. and is 60 ft. in height. Two other reading rooms, each 60 ft. by 28 The University of British Columbia 30 feet, open off the main reading room. These rooms provide accommodation for 250 students. The sixth and seventh tiers of the stack, not being required at present to house the University book collection, are used as a periodical room, and will accommodate about fifty readers. The Stack, which occupies the entire rear of the building, consists of seven tiers, four of which are fully equipped with steel stacks of the latest design. Here fifty-two semi-private study "carrels" facilitate research for advanced students. The offices of the Librarian and the Library Staff provide ample accommodation for receiving, cataloguing and accessioning. The Faculty common room, the "Browsing" room, and the Frank Burnett museum are also located in this building. The Burnett collection represents the arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia. This collection, which has been presented by Mr. Burnett to the University, is the result of numerous voyages made by him to the Central and South Pacific Islands. It constitutes one of the finest collections of this class of material yet accumulated by any private collector. Power House The Power House has been placed in the centre of the space which will ultimately be the Engineering Quadrangle, and will therefore eventually be masked by the future permanent buildings towards the Mall. For this reason it does not pretend to follow very closely the style of the other permanent buildings except in mass, being finished in rough case of broken texture, relieved with red quarry tiles as diapers, copings and offsets, with windows grouped as far as possible to give pleasing proportions of voids and solids. The ultimate development of this plant will be 2500 horse power at normal rating. The present installation consists of three units, each of 250 horse power normal rating, capable of developing 100 per cent, in excess of this. Each unit, so equipped as to operate independently of the others, may act as a service as well as an experimental station. In other words, on any one boiler an experimental test may be conducted while the rest New Buildings 29 of the plant is cut in on the service lines. Instruments are provided to record every operation so that close checking and comparisons of the performance of the different types of boilers may be made to a degree. The B. & W. Unit is equipped with B. & W. Natural Draft Stoker, the Sterling Boiler with forced draft Coxe Travelling Grate. The Kidwell with forced draft Coxe Travelling Grate is also equipped with air pre-heater, by-passed, so that tests may be conducted with or without pre-heated air. Induced draft is used with individual forced draft fans; separate boiler feed lines and pump with Linehart Scale provide boiler feed for tests. A travelling weigh scale records the amount of coal used, while a steam jet ash conveyor elevates the ashes to an overhead bunker. The efficiency and flexibility of the plant lends itself to economical operation, while the knowledge gained in the use of different appliances will be of interest and value to power plant users. SEMI-PERMANENT BUILDINGS In this group there are nine buildings in all,—Administration, Auditorium and Grill room, Arts, Applied Science, Agriculture; three Engineering Buildings—Mechanical, Electrical; Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics; and the Forest Products Laboratory Building. These buildings, which are set on concrete foundations, are of frame construction with stucco finish, and are designed for a life of forty years. Their exterior design harmonizes with the permanent buildings so far as materials of construction will permit. With the exception of a part of the Engineering Laboratories, these buildings have been finished internally with plaster and fir trim. Administration Building On the ground floor of this building are situated the offices of the President, the Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, the Registrar, and the Bursar. On the second floor are two large rooms, one for meetings of the Board of Governors and 30 The University of British Columbia the Senate, and the other for meetings of Faculties and Committees. Auditorium Building The Auditorium Building is designed in a pleasing treatment of Renaissance architecture and is furnished with the most modern equipment. It has a seating capacity of 1029, a large and admirably equipped stage for the encouragement of dramatic presentations, an orchestra pit and adequate off-stage dressing rooms. Provision has been made for the operating of moving pictures and the stage is equipped with a cyclorama and all necessary electrical illumination devices. The Grill room is situated in the basement and is designed to accommodate 400 students at one time. There is also a small dining room for the Faculty. The kitchen is furnished with the latest cooking and baking equipment. The bookstore, post office, medical offices, women's rest room, students' council offices, and numerous committee rooms for subsidiary organizations are also located in this building. Arts Building In the Arts Building, which forms the centre of the semipermanent group, are located the lecture rooms and offices for the following Departments in the Faculty of Arts and Science: Classics, Economics, Sociology and Political Science, Education, English, History, Mathematics, Modern Languages and Philosophy. The lecture rooms, 16 in number, are well designed and exceptionally well lighted. The largest room accommodates 250 students; the seating capacity of the others ranges from 32 to 64. Four common rooms for the undergraduates in Arts and Science are located in this building, as is also the office of the Dean of Women. Applied Science Building This building houses the Departments of Geology, Botany, Zoology, Forestry and the drafting rooms and offices for Civil New Buildings 31 Engineering. All the laboratories have been equipped with the essential services. One large lecture room, providing accommodations for 250 students, and 11 smaller lecture rooms with a seating capacity ranging from 25 to 112, are located in this building. These will be used by the different Departments jointly as class requirements may determine. Extensive provision has been made for drafting rooms and for the necessary offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms, and photographic rooms. A geological museum, a reading room and a common room for students have also been provided. Geology.—In addition to the necessary lecture rooms, the Department of Geology has three large and well equipped laboratories, the Mineralogical, the Petrological and the Geological. There are also two small research laboratories, one for graduate students and one for the staff. The Department workroom is well equipped for the preparation of specimens. The museum contains valuable collections of illustrative material which supplements the extensive working collections in the laboratories. The reading room is equipped with books, separates, maps, photographs and slides for reference. Botany.—The Botanical laboratories include a large junior laboratory, a senior laboratory, two student research laboratories and three private research rooms. These laboratories are used for practical work in Botany and General Biology. A Herbarium of over 15,000 sheets and a botanical garden containing over 1000 specimens of native plants furnish an abundance of material for class room and laboratory purposes. Zoology.—This Department, which includes courses in Entomology, has two large laboratories, a small research laboratory and two private laboratories, all well equipped. There is also a room for class material, which will serve for a time as a repository for museum collections and for specimens to be used for illustration. Forestry.—While the Department of Forestry has its own laboratory for work in wood technology, its own class room 32 The University of British Columbia and offices, it uses the laboratories of other Departments quite extensively, notably those in Biology, Civil Engineering and Forest Products. The Department possesses, in the forest belt which has been preserved on the campus as a natural park, a very valuable outdoor laboratory for forestry students. Civil Engineering.—Well equipped and well lighted draughting and designing rooms are available for all classes in drawing, mapping, machine design and computation work. The equipment necessary for all types of Civil Engineering work is available. The hydraulic laboratory, which is situated in the Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building, is well equippe<J for demonstrations and tests covering the main field of hydraulic principles and machinery; while in the Forest Products Laboratory, which is at the disposal of students in Civil Engineering, excellent facilities are available for extensive tests of timber, cement and steel. Agriculture Building This building accommodates the Departments of Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and Poultry Husbandry. The office and record rooms for the Farm Survey studies are also located in this building. The lecture rooms, of which there are four, are exceptionally well lighted. The largest accommodates 112 students, while the seating capacity of the others ranges from 36 to 54. In addition to lecture and laboratory accommodation, provision has been made for the necessary offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms and also for a photographic dark room, a herd book room, and a students' common room. Agronomy.—This Department is provided with a combined laboratory and lecture room which is equipped with water, gas and electricity. While this room will be used for studies in crop production, for the judging of specimens of plants and for the determination of soil samples, the main emphasis will be laid on the work conducted in the Department's outdoor laboratory— the Agronomy fields. New Buildings 33 Animal Husbandry.—The different classes and types of livestock constitute the main laboratory material of this department. In this material and in the farm survey records, the Department possesses a wealth of data for teaching and illustration in farm management, livestock management, feed and nutrition, and studies in pedigree and breeding. Dairying.—The new laboratories of the Department of Dairying provide facilities for conducting researches on the bacterial flora of milk, butter and cheese, and the relation of the flora to the production and sale of high quality products. Excellent provision is made for the instruction of students in the work indicated. Cheese-making and butter-making will be conducted in the temporary dairy building; but the new laboratories permit of closer contact of the various activities of the Department. Horticulture.—In the laboratory provided for this Department, comprehensive studies supplement the practical experience of the students in the propagation, planting, pruning and care of horticultural crops. Materials for these purposes are provided from the orchard, the ornamental trees, shrubs and flowers, and from plants grown in the glass propagating house. Poultry Husbandry.—In the poultry laboratory in the Agriculture Building, facilities and equipment are provided to assist in the study of poultry nutrition, disease, and other problems related to the industry. On the poultry plant, which is the main laboratory of the Poultry Department, ten pure breeds of commercial importance are tested and bred for egg and meat production. Experiments in management and marketing are conducted with these birds and their products. Mechanical and Electrical Buildings The Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering is housed in two buildings, the larger one for Mechanical Engineering, the smaller for Electrical Engineering. The Mechanical Building comprises a large laboratory, three lecture rooms, a draughting room, a calorimeter room, a storage room, and a machine shop. In the Electrical Building, there are two 34 The University of British Columbia electrical laboratories, a junior and a senior, a battery room, a photometer room and a meter standardizing room, together with the necessary office accommodation. Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building The Mining and Metallurgical laboratories cover a total area of 5000 square feet. The Ore Dressing laboratory, which includes a workshop, storage room and flotation room, is well equipped with a variety of small scale machines, including crusher, rolls, screens, jigs, ball mill and tables. The laboratory is fully wired for power and light, and has large water mains and drains, and a two-ton travelling crane. The Metallurgical laboratory includes a fire assay room, with oil, gasoline and gas furnaces; a wet assay room, with large fan-draught hood, and work benches fitted for electric and gas heating; two balance rooms; a photographic dark room; and ample storage space. The Hydraulics laboratory is well equipped for tests and demonstrations of high and low pressure hydraulic machines and pumps. A 60-horse-power D.C. motor is utilized to drive either a 10-inch single stage centrifugal pump having a capacity of 2400 gallons per minute against a 70-foot head, or to drive a 4-inch two stage pump having a capacity of 525 gallons per minute against a 325-foot head. The water from the large pump can be used to drive a 10-ineh vertical reaction turbine, while the flow from the high pressure pump can be used to drive an 18-inch Pelton Wheel, thus providing students with actual working demonstrations of all the ordinary types of machines. Installations include apparatus for weir, nozzle, and orifice measurements, flow in pipes, tests and demonstrations of Venturi, current and service meters. One section of the laboratory is set apart for making the standard tests of cement and sand. Forest Products Laboratory Buildings The three buildings included in this group were erected by the University for the use of the Vancouver Forst Products New Buildings 35 Laboratory of the Dominion Forest Service. They consist of a main building for offices and laboratories, an air-seasoning building, and an experimental dry-kiln building. Under a joint agreement between the University and the Department of the Interior, the University^ besides providing the buildings, furnishes; heat, light, and power, without cost to the Dominion Government. The Dominion Forest Service has undertaken to supply the personnel and to furnish all equipment. Facilities already established include a large timber testing laboratory, a special building for lumber seasoning, an experimental dry-kiln building equipped with oil-fired steam plant and automatic temperature and humidity controller, a combined photographic and pathological laboratory, a carpenter shop, and suitable offices. Accommodation is also provided for an entomologist of the Federal Department of Agriculture. The testing laboratory is equipped with machines ranging from a 200,000-pound Olsen Universal to the most delicate balances. 36 The University of British Columbia GENERAL INFORMATION The Session The University Year or Session is divided into two terms. The first begins on Tuesday, September 27th, 1927, and the second on Monday, January 9th, 1928. Registration and enrolment must be completed by Friday, September 23rd, 1927. Courses of Study For the Session of 1927-28 the University offers instruction in the four years of each of the three Faculties, Arts and Science, Applied Science (including Nursing), and Agriculture, leading to the degrees of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Applied Science and Bachelor of Science in Agriculture. It is also possible to proceed to a Master's degree in each Faculty. Advanced courses of instruction and facilities for research are offered to students who are graduates of any University or College of recognized standing. Admission to these advanced courses, or to the privileges of research, does not in itself imply admission to candidacy for a higher degree. Academic Dress The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the ordinary stuff material, of ankle length, and with long sleeves and the yoke edged with khaki cord. The graduate's gown is the same, without cord. The Bachelor's hood is of the Cambridge pattern, black bordered with the distinctive colour of the particular Faculty; the Master's hood is the same, lined with the distinctive colour. The colours are, for Arts and Science, the University blue; for Applied Science, red; for Agriculture, maize. Physical Examination In order to promote the physical welfare of the student body, every student, on entering the University, will be required to undergo a physical examination, to be conducted General Information 37 by, or under the direction of, the University Medical Examiner. Physical defects and weaknesses, amenable to treatment, may thus be discovered, and the student is advised to apply to his physician for such remedial measures as his case may require. About 10 to 15 per cent, of the students are re-examined in their second year. Dean of Women During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted by parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions, vocational guidance, and other questions that directly affect the social and intellectual life of the women students. Board and Residence A list of approved boarding-houses which receive men or women students, but not both, may be obtained from the Registrar after September 1st. Men and women students are not permitted to lodge in the same house, unless they are members of the same family, or receive special perimission from the Senate. The cost of good board and lodging is from $35 per month upwards; of a room alone, $8 to $12 per month. A grill is operated under the supervision of the University, and lunch, afternoon tea and light supper may be obtained there at very reasonable prices. Refreshments at social functions are also supplied. 38 The University of British Columbia ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY All inquiries relating to admission to the University should be addressed to the Registrar. 1. Except under special circumstances no student under the age of sixteen is admitted to the First Year Courses in the Faculty of Arts and Science, and no student under the age of seventeen to the Second Year Courses in the Faculty of Arts and Science nor to the First Year Courses in the Faculties of Agriculture and Applied Science, including Nursing. 2. Candidates for admission to the courses' in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of Agriculture and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are required to pass the Junior Matriculation Examination of the Province of British Columbia or to submit certificates showing that they have passed an equivalent examination elsewhere. Special regulations are prescribed for admission to courses in Applied Science, and are given under the heading of "Admission" in the Applied Science Section of the Calendar. 3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation Examination are admitted to the courses of the Second Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who have partial Senior Matriculation standing will be granted credit in First Year Arts in each subject in which they have made 50 per cent or over, or in each paper in which they have made 50 per cent or over in so far as these papers correspond with those of First Year Arts. 4. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate has passed the Matriculation Examination of another University will be accepted in lieu of the Junior or Senior Matriculation Examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination has covered the same subjects and required the same standard. If, however, the examination covers some but not all of the necessary subjects the candidate will be required to pass the Matriculation Examination in the subjects not covered. 5. Prospective candidates who wish to enter by certificates other than Matriculation certificates issued in British Columbia Admission to the University 39 should under no circumstances come to the University without having first obtained from the Registrar a statement of the value of the certificates they hold, as many of these may lack one or more essential subjects, or the work done in a subject may not be adequate, or, again, the percentage gained may not be sufficiently high. Moreover, it must be remembered that a certificate may admit to one Faculty and not to another. When an applicant's diploma or certificate does not show the marks obtained in the several subjects of the examination he must arrange to have a statement of his marks sent to the Registrar by the Education Department or University issuing such diploma or certificate. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. 6. A student of another University applying for exemption from any subject or subjects which he has already studied is required to submit with his application a Calendar of the University in which he has previously studied, together with a complete statement of the course he has followed and a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects. The Faculty concerned will determine the standing of such a student in this University. The fee for the examination of certificates is $2.00. 7. No candidate under 18 years of age will be admitted to the University without complete Junior Matriculation; and no candidate over 18 years of age who has deficient Matriculation standing will be admitted without the special permission of the Faculty concerned. 8. The Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations of the Province of British Columbia are conducted by the High School and University Matriculation Board of the Province. This Board consists of members appointed by the Department of Education and by the University. The requirements for Matriculation may be obtained in the publication, "Requirements for Matriculation," issued by the University, or in the "Courses of Study," issued by the Department of Education. 40 The University of British Columbia REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE Those who intend to register as students of the University for the session 1927-28 are required to make application to the Registrar before Friday, September 23rd, on forms to be obtained at the Registrar's office. 1. There are four classes of students:— (a) Graduate students—Students who are pursuing courses of study in a Faculty in which they hold a degree, whether they are proceeding to a Master's degree or not. (b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree in any Faculty who have passed all the examinations precedent to the year in which they are registered. (c) Conditioned undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree but who have incomplete entrance qualifications or who are required to pass supplemental examinations in a year previous to that in which they are registered. (d) Partial students—Students not belonging to one of the three preceding classes. (See 7, below.) 2. All students other than graduate students are required to attend in person at the office of the Registrar on or before Friday, September 23rd, to furnish the information necessary for the University records; to register for the particular classes which they wish to attend, and to sign the following declaration: "I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes, rules, regulations, and ordinances of The University of British Columbia, and of the Faculty or Faculties in which I am registered, and to any amendments thereto which may be made while I am a student of the University, and I promise to observe the same." In the information furnished for the University records, students are requested to state what churches they propose to make their place of worship. This information is available for any of the city churches desiring it. 3. After the above date a fee of $2.00 will be charged for late registration. 4. Students registering for the first time must present the Registration and Attendance 41 certificates which constitute their qualification for admission to the course of study for which they wish to register. The Registrar is empowered to register all duly qualified students. Doubtful cases will be dealt with by the Faculty concerned. 5. Each student on registering will receive a class card for each class for which he has registered. Only students provided with such cards will be admitted to a class. Provisional cards will be given to any students whose status is subject to consideration. 6. Students desiring to make a change in the course for which they have registered must apply to the Registrar on the proper form for a "change of course." Except in special circumstance, no change will be allowed after the fifteenth day of the session. If the application is approved by the Faculty concerned, the Registrar will give the necessary notifications. 7. Partial students are not normally required to pass an examination for admission, but before registering they must produce a certificate showing that they have satisfied the Dean and the Heads of the Departments concerned that they are qualified to pursue with advantage the course of study which they propose to undertake. 8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths of the lectures in each course that they take. Lectures will commence on the hour, and admission to a lecture or laboratory and credit for attendance may be refused by the Instructor for lateness, misconduct, inattention or neglect of duty. Absence consequent on illness or domestic affliction may be excused only by the Dean of the Faculty concerned, and medical certificates or other evidence must be presented immediately on return to University work. A medical certificate m,*ust show the nature and the period of the disability. Medical report forms may be obtained from the Dean's office. In cases of deficient attendance students may (with the sanction of the Dean and the Head of the Department concerned) be excluded from the final examination in a course; but unless the unexcused absences exceed one-fourth of the total number of lectures in a course, such students may sit for supplemental examination. 42 The University of British Columbia FEES All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The University of British Columbia." 1. The sessional fees are as follows: For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates In Arts and Science— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $50.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 50.00 $100.00 In Teacher Training Course— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $30.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 30.00 w $ 60.00 In Applied Science— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $75.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 75.00 $150.00 In Nursing and Public Health— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $50.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 50.00 $100.00 NOTE.—For Third and Fourth Year students in Nursing the Sessional fee is $1.00, payable, with the Alma Mater fee of $7.00, on or before October loth. Students admitted to Nursing B or C and poceeding to the Certificate on a basis of part-time attendance over two or more years, will pay the regular fee for the whole course, but the amount payable each year will be pro-rated to correspond with the proportion of work taken in that year. In Agriculture— First Term, payable on or before Oct. 10th $50.00 Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 23rd.. 50.00 $100.00 Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 10th $ 7.00 Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 10th 5.00 For Partial Students Fees per "Unit"—Payable on or before Oct. 10th 10.00 Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 10th 7.00 Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 10th 5.00 Fees 43 For Graduates Registration and Class Fees — Payable on or before Oct. 15th $ 25.00 After these dates an additional fee of $2.00 will be exacted of all students in default. The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students for the support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized by the Board of Governors at the request of the students themselves. The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions will be made to cover breakages, wastage, and use of special materials in laboratories, etc. If the balance to the credit of a student falls below $1.50, a further deposit of $5.00 may be required. 2. Immediately after October 10th and January 23rd, the Bursar will notify students who have not paid their fees that steps will be taken to ensure their exclusion from classes while the fees remain unpaid. 3. Students registering after October 10th shall pay their fees at the time of registration, failing which they become subject to the provisions of Regulation 2. 4. Special fees are:— Regular supplemental examination, per I paper $ 5.08 Special examination, per paper 7.50 Graduation 20,00 Supplemental examination fees must be paid two weeks before the examination, special examination fees when application for examination is made, and graduation fees two weeks before Congregation. 44 The University of British Columbia MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, PRIZES, BURSARIES AND LOANS FOR 1927-28 MEDALS The Governor-General's Gold Medal A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor- General of Canada, will be awarded to the student standing at the head of the graduating class in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Honour and pass students may compete for this medal. The Historical Society Gold Medal A gold medal, donated by E. W. Keenleyside, Esq., and known as the Historical Society Gold Medal, will be open to the members of the graduating class. The award will be made by the Department of History, on the basis of the student's standing in the courses in History which he has taken during his undergraduate course, and the general interest he has shown in the subject. SCHOLARSHIPS FOR POST-GRADUATE STUDIES University Scholarships A scholarship of $200 may be awarded to a graduate student who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship This scholarship of $100, given by the Faculty Women's Club of the University, will be open to graduates of this University who intend in the following year to pursue post-graduate study in this or any other approved university. Application should be jmjade to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Captain LeRoy Memorial Scholarship This scholarship of $250, donated by the Universities Service Club, will be awarded for the academic year 1927-28 to a returned soldier student in attendance at The University of British Columbia. Applications may be made by returned soldier Medals, Scholarships anb Phizes 45 students who intend doing Second, Third, or Fourth Year work at The University of British Columbia, or post-graduate work at any approved institution. Each application must contain a statement of the academic record, the war record, and the special claims of the applicant, with two supporting references, and must be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The award will be made by Senate, upon recommendation of Faculty acting in consultation with the Executive of the Universities Service Club. The Canadian Federation of University Women Scholarship The scholarship of the Canadian Federation of University Women, of the value of $1,200, available for study or research, is open to any woman holding a degree from a Canadian university. In general, preference will be given to those candidates who have completed at least one year of graduate study and have some definite research in preparation. Any candidate must be recommended by her own university; if successful in her application, she may pursue her studies at any university satisfactory to the Committee of Selection. Applications must be received by the convener of the Scholarship Committee 0f the Federation not later than February 1st. The Nichol Scholarship By the generosity of the Hon. Walter Nichol—Lieutenant- Governor of the Province, 1921 to 1926,—five three-year scholarships, each of the annual value of $1,200, have been made available for study in the University of France, or at one of the other institutions of higher education in France. With each scholarship will be given a gold medal, the permanent possession of the successful candidate. These scholarships will be open to graduates of the University of British Columbia who intend to take up teaching as a profession. The third scholarship will be awarded in 1927. The intention of the donor being the development in Canada, and particularly in this Province, of a wider knowledge of the people of France, their ideals, literature, art and science, 46 The University of British Columbia and the promotion thereby of a better mutual understanding between French and British in this country, each successful candidate must undertake to return to British Columbia to practise his profession for such time as seems reasonable in the opinion of the Senate of the University. Each scholarship may be held for three years, provided the holder can show from year to year satisfactory progress in the course of study undertaken. Application must be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Brock Scholarship A scholarship of $100, donated by Dean R. W. Brock, may be awarded to a graduate student in Applied Science who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies. Applications should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. The W. C. Macdonald Scholarship A scholarship of $500, for one year's post-graduate study at Macdonald College, P.Q., has been put at the disposal of the University by W. C. Macdonald (Registered). The scholarship is primarily intended for graduates in Agriculture of The University of British Columbia, but, failing such, will be open to any resident of the Province who is a graduate of an agricultural college. Application should be made to the Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture. The 1851 Exhibition Scholarship Under the revised conditions for the award of the 1851 Exhibition Scholarship in Science, The University of British Columbia is included in the list of universities from which nominations for scholarships allotted to Canada may be made. These scholarships of £250 per annum, are tenable, ordinarily, for two years. They are granted only to British subjects under 26 years of age, who have been bona fide students of pure or applied science of not less than three years' standing. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 47 SCHOLARSHIPS FOR UNDERGRADUATES 1. IN ALL FACULTIES The Rhodes Scholarship An annual scholarship at one of the colleges of Oxford it assigned by the trustees of the late Mr. C.ecil J. Rhodes to the Province of British Columbia. Each scholarship is tenable for three years, and is of the value of £400 a year. In accordance with the wish of Mr. Rhodes, the election of candidates will depend upon: (1) Force of character, devotion to duty, courage, sympathy, capacity for leadership; (2) Ability and scholastic attainments; (3) Physical vigor, as shown by participation in games or in other ways. A candidate must be a British subject, with at least five years' domicile in Canada, and unmarried. He must have passed his nineteenth but not his twenty-fifth birthday on October 1st of the year for which he is elected. He must be at least in his Sophomore Year in some recognized degree-granting university or college of Canada, and (if elected) complete the work of that year before coming into residence at Oxford. He may compete either in the province in which he has acquired any considerable part of his educational qualification, or in the province in which he has his ordinary private domicile, home, or residence. Candidates for the 1928 scholarship must have their applications, with all the required material, in the hands of the Secretary of the Selection Committee not later than October 20th, 1927. The committee is at present constituted as follows: Chief Jusice Hunter (Chairman), Mr. Justice Gregory (Deputy- Chairman), Messrs. H. T. Logan (Secretary), E. A. Munro, D. N. Hossie, T. Larsen. The following have been awarded the Rhodes scholarships from the Province: A.W.Donaldson 1904 J. B. Clearihue ...: 1911 •I. I. Rubinowitz 1905 *A. N. King 1912 H. R, Bray 1906 G. L. Haggen 1913 T. Larsen 1907 *B. E. Atkins 1914 H. T. Logan 1908 E. V. Gordon 1915 A. Yates 1909 *E. W. Berry 1916 S. C. Dyke 1910 S. Lett 1919 48 The University of British Columbia J. H. Mennie 1919 N. A. Robertson 1923 L. A. Mills 1920 G. S. Livingston 1924 W. H. Coates 1920 E*. J. Knapton 1925 R. L. Vollum.. 1921 H. V. Warren 1926 L. W. McLennan 1922 A. E. Grauer 1927 * Deceased. The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian Association Memorial Fund Scholarships The suim: of $12,000, given to the University by the administrators of the Khaki University of Canada, provides a fund which has so far been used to assist returned soldiers in actual need of money to complete their courses. Out of the income from this fund, ten scholarships of $75 each are now to be offered each year for a period of five years, beginning with the spring of 1927. They are to be awarded, on the results of examinations in the First, Second, and Third Years in all faculties, to such returned soldiers or dependents of soldiers as have the requisite academic standing; failing such, to the student body at large. All returned soldiers and all children of soldiers of the Great War who have any expectation of attaining scholarship standing in these years should apply to the Registrar on a special form not later than the last day of the final examinations. The Captain Leroy Memorial Scholarship (See Page 44) University Scholarship Two scholarships of $75 each may be awarded to returned soldiers taking the work of the First Year, the award to be based on the work of the year. 2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE University Scholarships Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $75 each will be awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year, the award to be based on the work of the Third Year. Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $75 each will be awarded to students proceeding to the Third Year, the award to be based on the work of the Second Year. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 49 The Shaw Memorial Scholarship* This scholarship of $137.50, founded by friends of the late James Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and afterwards of McGill University College, Vancouver, will be paid throughout his undergraduate course to any child of the late Principal Shaw who is in regular attendance at the University as a fully matriculated student; when there is no such candidate, it will be awarded upon the results of the examination of the Second Year in Arts and Science to the undergraduate student standing highest in any two of the following three subjects, English, Latin, Greek, and proceeding to the work of the Third Year. The McGill Graduates' Scholarship* A scholarship of $137.50, founded by the McGill Graduates' Society of British Columbia, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and French of the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year. The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship This scholarship of $110, founded by the members of the Terminal City Club as a memorial to those members of the Club who lost their lives in the Great War, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and Economics of the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the wo*rk of the Third Year. The Scott Memorial Scholarship This scholarship of $110—the proceeds of an endowment of $2,000—founded by the Imperial Order of the Daughters of the Empire of the City of Vancouver, in memory of Captain Robert Falcon Scott, the Antarctic explorer, who sacrificed his life in the cause of Science, will be awarded for general proficiency in biological subjects to the student who has completed ♦Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British Columbia. 50 The University of British Columbia his Second Year in Arts and Science, and who is proceeding in the Third Year to Honour work either in Biology or in a course including Biology. Royal Institution Scholarships Three scholarships of $75 each will be awarded for general proficiency in the work of the First Year of Arts and Science. The P. E. O. Sisterhood Scholarship A scholarship of $75, given by Vancouver Chapters of the P. E. 0. Sisterhood, will be awarded to the woman student standing highest in English in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science. The Native Sons of Canada Scholarship This scholarship, of the annual value of $500, given by the Native Sons of Canada, Assembly No. 2, through the generosity of one of its members, and intended to encourage knowledge of Canada and devotion to her interests, will be awarded wholly or in part to the undergraduate student of the Second, Third, or Fourth Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science who submits the best thesis on an assigned subject of Canadian History. Unless the leading thesis is of exceptional merit, the scholarship will be awarded in amounts of $350 and $150 to the first and second competitors respectively. Subjects for the competition have been selected as follows:— 1927-28. (1) The United States and Canada, 1849-1927; or (2) Canada and the Imperial Conferences, 1887-1926. 1928-29. (1) Geographic Factors in Canadian History; or (2) The Growth of Canadian Political Parties Since 1929-30. (1) Economic Factors in Canadian History; or (2) The Growth of National Feeling, 1867-1927. Federation. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 51 The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship A scholarship of $110 is offered by the Club to be awarded to the student obtaining first place in the subject, Canadian History. 3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship A scholarship of $100 is offered by the Club to be awarded to the student who attains the highest standing in the first four years' training, academic and practical, of the Nursing and Health course. The Dunsmuir Scholarship* A scholarship of $165, founded by the Hon. James Dunsmuir, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in the Mining Engineering Course of the Third Year in Applied Science and proceeding to the work of the Fourth Year. ^^ University Scholarship A scholarship of $75 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Third Year in Applied Science, the award to be based on the work of the Second Year. Royal Institution Scholarship A scholarship of $75 will be awarded for general proficiency in the work of the First Year in Applied Science. 4. IN AGRICULTURE The British Columbia Fruit Growers' Association Scholarship This scholarship of $100, donated by the British Columbia Fruit Growers' Association, will be awarded to a student taking the horticultural options of the Third Year. To qualify for this scholarship candidates must attain scholarship standing, not 'Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that body, with the consent of the donors, to the University of British Columbia. 52 The University op British Columbia only in horticultural subjects, but also in the work of the year, and must be proceeding to the Horticultural Course of the Fourth Year — the year in which the scholarship shall be enjoyed. University Scholarship A scholarship in Agriculture of $75 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be based on the work of the First Year. MATRICULATION SCHOLARSHIPS University Scholarship One scholarship of $75 will be awarded upon the results of the Senior Matriculation Examination. Royal Institution Scholarships Seven General Proficiency scholarships will be awarded on the result of the Junior Matriculation examinations: (a) $150 to the candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b) $100 to the candidate of next highest standing in each of the following districts: (1) Victoria District, (2) Vancouver Island (exclusive of Victoria District) and Northern Mainland, (3) Vancouver District, (4) Fraser Delta (exclusive of Vancouver District but including Agassiz), (5) Yale, (6) Kootenays. These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance at the University of British Columbia. Under certain conditions they may be reserved for limited periods. A winner who is completing Senior Matriculation in a high school of the same district mjay have the scholarship reserved for one year, subject to obtaining satisfactory standing in the Senior Matriculation examination. Also a winner who completes the first two years of the Arts course in an affiliated institution may have- the scholarship reserved for two years. Sums accruing from unpaid scholarships may be used in the form of bursaries or loans. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 53 PRIZES 1. IN ALL FACULTIES The University Prize A book prize of the value of $25, open to all students of the University, will be awarded for an essay on a special literary subject, to be announced at the beginning of the Session by the Department of English. The Players' Club Prize A prize of $50, donated by the Players' Club, is offered for an original play suitable for the Club's Christmas performance. The award will be made on the recommendation of the Faculty members of the Advisory Board of the Players' Club. 2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE The Gerald Myles Harvey Prize A book prize of the value of $50, given by Mr. and Mrs. J. Newton Harvey in memory of their son, Gerald Myles Harvey, who died on active service, will be awarded to the student in Arts, and Science who submits the best essay on a subject in Economics or Political Science which concerns British Columbia or Canada as a whole. A list of suggested subjects for 1927-28 may be obtained from the Department of Economics, but competitors may write on any subject approved by the Department and by the donors of the prize, and essays written in the course of University work, if so approved, may be submitted for the prize. Intending competitors must notify the Department of Economics before the 31st of December, 1927, of their intention to compete. The Historical Society Prize Through the generosity of R. L. Reid, Esq., K.C, the Historical Society of the University has been able to offer, annually, a prize of $25, open to all students in Arts and Science, for the best essay on an assigned subject. 54 The University op British Columbia The Vancouver Women's Conservative Association Prize This prize of $25, given by the Vancouver Women's Conservative Association, is open to students taking the Mathematics of the First Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. In awarding it preference will be given to the son or daughter of a deceased soldier, provided satisfactory standing is secured in the subject. The Letters Club Prize A prize of $25, presented by R. L. Reid, Esq., K.C, honorary member of the Letters Club, is offered annually for the best essay by an undergraduate student in Arts on an assigned subject in Canadian literature. The award will be made on the recommendation of the Department of English. The subjects for the Seccion 1927-28 are as follows: (1) "Sam Slick." (2) W. H. Drummond. (3) The Canadian Northwest in Literature. 3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE The Convocation Prize A prize of $50, donated by Convocation of The University of British Columbia, will be awarded annually to the student obtaining first place in the Fourth Year of Applied Science. The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize A book prize of the value of $25, donated by the Vancouver Branch of the Engineering Institute of Canada in memory of the late Walter Moberly, will be awarded for the best engineering thesis submitted by any Fourth Year student in the Faculty of Applied Science. The Professional Engineers' Prizes Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered by the Association of Professional Engineers of British Columbia Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 55 for competition by those students in the Third Year of the Faculty of Applied Science who are registered as pupils with the Association. The prizes are awarded for the best summer essays in five branches of engineering. The Provincial Board of Health Prizes The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of British Columbia offers the sum of $100 in prizes for competition in the Course in Public Health Nursing. BURSARIES The Canadian Club of Vancouver Bursary Through the generosity of the Canadian Club of Vancouver, a sum: of $300 will be available in 1927-28 to assist worthy male matriculants who would not otherwise be able to enter upon the University course. Candidates must be British subjects. They should make application for the award as soon as possible after the announcement of matriculation results, and not later than September 1st. Graduate Bursary in Mining and Metallurgy Through the British Columbia Division of the Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, the Granby Consolidated Mining and Smelting Company, and the Crow's Nest Coal Company, each offer to give employment annually to two selected graduates of The University of British Columbia, to enable them, while earning a livelihood, to obtain practical experience and personal knowledge of the various phases of metal mining or smelting, and coal mining, respectively, under favorable conditions and in the minimum of time. The American Women's Club Bursary (Through the generosity of the American Women's Club of Vancouver a sum of $110 will be available for 1927-28 to assist a student who has satisfactorily completed the First Year in Arts and Science, and who could not otherwise continue the course in the Second Year. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than September 1st. 56 The University op British Columbia LOANS Loans to deserving undergraduates may be made by the President from the following funds: Royal Institution Unpaid Royal Institution scholarships of the current year, if any. Maximum individual loan, $100. Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy British Columbia Division This is a cumulative fund of $50 per year, given by the Institute to the University as a trust, to be used for loans to students taking the mining course. Applicants for loans must be recommended by the departments of Geology, Mining and Metallurgy. Arts '28 Through the generosity of the Class of Arts '28, the sum of $100 has been donated to the loan funds of the University, and will be available to final year students in Art and Science in the academic year 1927-28. GENERAL REGULATIONS 1. Scholarships, medals, and prizes will be awarded at the close of the session, and, in case of Matriculation Examinations, after the June examination. 2. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is based on an examination, no award will be made to a candidate who obtains less than 75 per cent, of the possible marks. 3. Candidates are not permitted to hold more than one scholarship each, although they may win more and will be given credit in the published lists if they do. Scholarships thus won but not held will pass to candidates next in order of merit, provided they have made the required marks. 4. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University are paid in three instalments—on the 15th of November, the 15th Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 57 of January and the 15th of March. Normally this is during the session following their award, and undergraduate winners must continue their courses to the satisfaction of the Faculty concerned. But Faculty may permit a scholarship to be reserved a year, provided the student shows satisfactory reasons for postponing attendance. 5. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may resign the monetary value, while the appearance of their names in the University list enables them to retain the honour. Any funds thus made available will be used for additional scholarships or student loans. 6. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries and loans are open to winter session students only, unless otherwise stated, and marks obtained in summer session courses are not taken into account in awarding them. THE _V} FACULTY vLof ARTS AND SCIENCE TIME TABLE FACULTY OF ARTS KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Agriculture; MORNINGS 10 11 MONDAT Biology 2 Biology 3 Botany 6e Economics 3 English 1 a Sees. 7, 8, 9, II English 13 French 2 Sees, a, b, c . 10, French 4 c Geology 3 and 4.. Greek 1 _.-. Mathematics 10.. Philosophy I a Physics 1 a Botany 5 a Botany 6 d Chemistry 8 Economics 1 a. English 9 English 10 French 3 b French 4 b Geology 1 History 8 Mathematics 1 .... Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Philosophy 1 C Philosophy 8 Physics 1 b Physics 8 Agricultural Economics Biology 1 Chemistry 7 Economics I b English 14 French 1 Sees, a, b, c, d.. French 3 c French 4d „.. Geology 8 German, Beg. A.. Government 8 History 2. History 7 Latin 1 a Mathematics 2 Physics 4 Zoology 1 Room AplOl AplOl AplOl A 108 A 103, 106,205, 206,207 A 100 A 101, 104,105 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 201 AplOO S200 AplOl AplOl S417 A 108 S300 A 201 A 104 A 105 AplOO A 101 A 100, 108,205, 206,207 A 106 A 102 S200 S210 Ag 104 AplOO S417 S400 A 203 A 105, 108,204 207 A 208 A 104 Apl02 A 201 A 205 A 100 A 101 A 103 A 106 S210 AplOl Tuesday Botany 2 Botany 4 Economics 2 English lb Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6 French 2 Sees, d, e, t Geology 5 and 12., Latin 2 Latin 6 Mathematics 3 Physics 2 a Zoology 2 Zoology 8 Botany 8 J Botany 6 c " Chemistry 9 Economics 1 c Economics 4 English 17 French 4 a Geology 2 German 1 Government 1 Greek 2 History 6 Mathematics 1 Sees. 6, 7 ,8, 9, 10, 11: Philosophy 2 Physics 2 b .... Botany 1 Botany 6 b Chemistry 1 c .... Chemistry 4 Economics 1 d .... French 1 Sees, e, f, g, h.. French 3 a French 4 d Geology 6 Government 2 History 3 History 9 Latin 1 b Philosophy 5 Zoology 4 Zoology 7 AplOl A 108 A 100, 106,205, 206,207, 208 A 101, 104,105 Apl02 A 103 A102 A 201 S200 AplOl AplOl Room AplOl AplOl S417 A 103 A 100 A 203 A 104 Apl02 A 201 A 108 A 102 A 101 A 105, 106,205 206,207 208 A 204 S200 Ap 101 A 201 S300 S417 AplOO A 104, 105,108, 203 A 100 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 106 A 101 A 103 A 205 AplOl AplOl Wedwesdat Biology 2 Biology 8 Botany 6e Economics 3 English 1 a Sees. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 English 13 French 2 Sees, a, b, c French 4 c Geology 3 and 4 Greek 1 Mathematics 10 . Philosophy 1 a Physics 1 a Botany 5 b Botany 6d Chemistry 3 Economics 1 a English 9 English 10 French 3 b French 4 b _... Geology 1 Geology 7 History 8 Mathematics 1 Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5. Philosophy 1 C Philosophy 8 Physics 1 b Physics 8 _. Agricultural Economics Biology 1 Chemistry 7 Economics 1 b English 14 French 1 Sees, a, b, c, d., French 8 c French 4d Geology 8 German, Beg. A.. Government 3 History 2 History 7 Latin 1 a Mathematics 2 Physics 4 Zoology 1 , Room AplOl AplOl AplOl A108 A 103, 106,205. 206,207 A 100 A 101, 104,105 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 201 AplOO S200 AplOl S417 A 108 S300 A 201 A 104 A 105 AplOO Apl03 A 101 A 100, 108,205, 206,207 A 106 A 102 S208 S210 Ag 104 AplOO S417 S400 A 208 A 105, 108,204, 207 A 208 A 104 Apl02 A 201 A 205 A100 A 101 A 108 A 100 S210 AplOl -1927-28 AND SCIENCE Ap, Applied Science; S, Science. MORNINGS Thubsday Botany 2 Economics 2 English 1 b Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 French 2 Sees, d, e, f Geology 5 and 12... Latin 2 Latin 6 Mathematics 3 Physics 2 a . Zoology 2 Zoology 8 _ Botany 3 _.. Botany 6 c Chemistry 9 Economics 1 c Economics 4 ...... English 17 French 4 a Geology 2 _ German 1 Government 1 Greek 2 History 6 Mathematics 1 Sees. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, II Philosophy 2 Physics 2 b .. Botany 1 Chemistry 1 c Chemistry 4 Economics 1 d French 1 Sees, e, f, g, h.. French 8 a French 4 d. Geology 6 Government 2 History 8 History 9 Latin lb Philosophy 5 .. Zoology 4 Zoology 7 Roox A108 A100, 106,205 206,207, 208 A 101, 104,105 Apl02 A 108 A 102 A 201 S200 AplOl AplOl AplOl AplOl S417 A 103 A 100 A 203 A 104 Apl02 A 201 A 108 A 102 A 101 A 105, 106,205, 206,207, 208 A 204 S200 AplOl S300 S417 AplOO A 104, 105,108, 203 A 100 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 106 A 101 A 103 A 205 AplOl AplOl Fbioat Botany 6f Botany 7 a Economics 3 English 1 b Sections 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 English 13 French 2 Sees, a, b, c French 4 c Geology 8 and 4... Greek 1 Mathematics 10 ..... Philosophy 1 a Physics 1 a Botany 5 a .. Chemistry 2 Economics 1 a ... English 9 English 10 French 8 b French 4 b Geology 7 History 8 Mathematics 1 .. Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Philosophy 1 C Philosophy 8 Physics 1 b Agricultural Economics Economics 1 b .... English 14 French 1 Sees, a, b, c, d.. French 3 c French 4d Geology 8 German, Beg. A.. Government 8 History 2 History 7 Latin 1 a Mathematics 2 Zoology 6 Zoology 5 Hook AplOl A 108 A 103, 106,205, 206,207 A 100 A 101, 104,105 A 202 Apl02 A 102 A 201 AplOO S200 AplOl S300 A 103 S400 A 201 A 104 A 105 AplOO A 101 A 100, 108,205 206,207 A 106 A 102 S200 Ag 104 S400 A 203 A 105, 108,204, 207 A 208 A 104 Apl02 A 201 A 205 A 100 A 101 A 103 A 106 AplOl AplOl Saturday Botany 5 b Lab.— Chemistry 9 Lab.... Economics 2 English 1 a Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 _ French 2 Sees, d, e, f . Geology 10 Latin 2 Latin 6 Mathematics 3 Physics 2 a Botany 5 b Lab.... Chemistry 9 Lab.. Economics 1 c Economies 4 English 17 French 4 a Geology 10 German 1 _ Government 1 Greek 2 History 6 Mathematics 1 .... Sees. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 Philosophy 2 Physics 2 b .... Botany 6 b Lab.... Chemistry 1 c Chemistry 9 Lab- Economics 1 d . French 1 Sees, e, f, g, h... French 8 a French 4 d Geology 10 Government 2 History 3 History 9 Latin lb _. Room A 108 A 100, 106,205, 206,207, 208 A 101, 104,105 A 103 A 102 A 201 S200 A 103 A 100 A 203 A 104 A 201 A108 A102 A 101 A105, 106,205, 206,207, 208 A 204 S200 S800 AplOO A 104, 105,108, 208 A 100 A 202 A 102 A106 A101 A 108 10 11 AFTERNOONS TIME TABLE Monday Room Tuesday Room Wednesday Room Botany 5 Lab Chemistry 1 a Economics 8 English 2 b S800 A 208 A 100, Ap 100, 202 A 104, 105,108, 203 A 204 A101 A 102 A 207 S200 Bacteriology 1 Botany 6 e Lab. English 8 A 201 A 101 A 105, 106,205, 206,207, 208 Biology 1 Lab. 3.. Botany 6 c Lab Chemistry 1 a Economics 8 English 2 a English 7 Mathematics I Sees. 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 S300 A 208 French 1 A 100 French 1 Sees, i, j, k, 1 A 104, Zoology 3 Lab. . 105,108, 1 Sees, i, j, k, 1. French 4 c 203 A 204 Geology 7 Lab History 4 History 4 _ Latin 4 A 101 A102 Philosophy 4 A 207 S2O0 Zoology 5 Lab Zoology 6 Lab Botany 3 Lab Botany 5 Lab Chemistry 1 b „ Chemistry 7 Lab.... English 16 French 1 S300 A 104 A 105, 203,204 AplOO A 100 A 101 S200 A 103 Bacteriology 1 Biology 1 Lab. 1.... Botanv 2 A 103, 106,205, 206,207 A 100 A 203 Biology 3 Lab. 3.... Botany 1 Lab. .... Botany 6 c Lab, Chemistry 1 b English 16 _ French 1 Botany 4 Chemistry 1 Lab. 2 English 1 b S300 A 104 Sees, m, n, o _ A 105, 2 Sees. 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 Geography 1 _ History 1 _ 203,204 History 1 History 5 English 2 c AplOO Physics 4 Lab Geology 1 Lab. Greek 10 A 100 A 101 Physics 3 Lab. Philosophy lb S200 A 103 3 Bacteriology 1 fc Botany 5 Lab m Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Chemistry 2 Lab. a Chemistry 7 Lab English 12 Geology 5 A 201 Apl02 A 102 Biology 1 Lab. 1.... Botany 2 Lab Botany 4 Lab. Chemistry 1 Lab. 2 Chemistry 2 Lab. b English 15 A 101 A 102 Botany 1 Lab Latin 7 Physics 3 Lab Physics 4 Lab Zoology 5 Lab 4 Bacteriology Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Chemistry 2 Lab. a Chemistry 7 Lab.... Physics 4 Lab. Zoology 6 Lab Biology I Lab. 2.... Botany 2 Lab Botany 4 Lab Chemistry 1 Lab. 2 Chemistry 2 Lab. b Zoology 3 Lab = S400 Biology 1 Lab. 2.... Botany 2 Lab Chemistry 2 Lab. b 5 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Chemistry 2 Lab. a —Continued AFTERNOONS Thubsday Rook Friday Room Botany 6 c Lab English 8 English 7 Geology 1 Lab A 201 A 101 A100, 106,205, 206,207 Chemistry 1 a . Economics 8 English 2 a French 1 S300 A 208 A 100 A 104, 105,108, 203 A 204 A 101 A 102 A 207 S200 Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Zoology 1 Lab Sees, i, j, k, 1 French 4 c History 4 1 Latin 4 _.... Sociology Botany 6 c Lab. ., Chemistry 8 Lab. b English 1 a Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 A 100, 106,205, 206,207, 208 A 203 Biology 1 Lab. 5.. Chemistry 1 b Chemistry 8 Lab. a English 16 French 1 ... S3ob A 104 A 105, 203,204 AplOO A 100 A 101 S200 A 103 Geology 1 Lab. Greek 10 Sees, m, n, o History 1 History 5 2 Philosophy 1 b Biology 1 Lab. 4.... Botany 7 Lab Chemistry 1 Lab. 8 Chemistry 2 Lab. b A 101 A 102 Bacteriology 1 Biology 1 Lab. 5.... Chemistry 1 Lab. 4 Chemistry 2 Lab. a Chemistry 3 Lab. a English 12 A 201 3 Chemistry 3 Lab. b English 15 Latin 7 Zoology 7 Lab. Geology 1 Lab Biology 1 Lab. 4.... Botany 6 c Lab. Chemistry 1 Lab. 8 Chemistry 2 Lab. b Chemistry 8 Lab. b Zoology 1 Lab . Biology 1 Lab. 6.. Botany 6d Lab. Chemistry 1 Lab. 4 Chemistry 2 Lab. a Chemistry 8 Lab. a Zoology 7 Lab. 4 Chemistry 1 Lab. 8 Chemistry 2 Lab. b Biology 1 Lab. 6.._ Chemistry 1 Lab. 4 Chemistry 2 Lab. a 5 Faculty of Arts and Science Supplemental Examinations SEPTEMBER, 1927 2 Date Wednesday, September 14th Thursday, September 15th Friday, September 16th Saturday, September 17th Monday, September 19th Tuesday, September 20th Wednesday, September 21st Hoar 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. 9 A.M. 2 P.M. First Year History 1, 2, 3 English Literature Latin Chemistry 1 French .. Geometry Greek .. Physics 1 Trigonometry Algebra English Composition German Biology 1 Economics 1 Geography .. Second Year History 1, 2, 3 English Literature Latin Chemistry 1, 2 French . Geometry Greek .. Physics 1, 2, 3 Philosophy 1 .. Botany 1 . Zoology 1 Algebra . . English Composition Biology 1 German Economics 1, 2 Geography Third Year o 9 8 8 a. > 3 I 02 a FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts (B.A.) and Master of Arts (M.A.). COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A. The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a Pass degree. A Pass degree will be granted on completion of courses amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with Calendar regulations. Credits obtained at the Summer Session may be combined with "Winter Session credits to complete a University year. While the degree of B.A. may be obtained by attendance at Summer Sessions, candidates are advised to attend at least one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth Year. A double course is offered in Arts and Science and Applied Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc. (See "Double Course.") No distinction is made between Pass and Honour students in the First and Second Years, except as regards prerequisites for later work, but in the Third and Fourth Years there are special requirements for Honour students. Credit will not be given for more than 18 units in any one Winter Session, and no student under 21 years of age, registered in the Winter Session, will be allowed credit for more than 21 units in any one year from September to August by Winter and Summer Session combined. Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period of not less than two or more than three hours) per week throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent laboratory periods) throughout a single term. Note.—Students in any of the affiliated Theological Colleges who file with the Registrar a written statement expressing their intention of graduating in Theology will be allowed to offer, in each year of their Arts course, in place of optional subjects set down in the Calendar for the Year and course in which 66 Faculty op Arts and Science they are registered, Religious Knowledge options, to the extent of three units taken from the following list: Hebrew, Biblical Literature, New Testament Greek, Church History, Christian Ethics and Apologetics. FIRST AND SECOND YEARS 1. The requirements of the first two years consist of 30 units, 15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses must be chosen in conformity with the requirements that follow. Details of courses are given under the various departments. Each student must take: Units (a) English 1 in the First Year and English 2 in the Second Year 6 (6) The first two courses in a language offered for Matriculation, one course in each year.; 6 (c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year 3 (d) Economics 1, or History 1 or 2 or 3, or Philosophy 1 3 (e) Biology 1, or Chemistry 1, or Geology 1, or Physics 1 3 (/) Three courses—not already chosen— selected from the following:— Biology 1, Botany 1, Chemistry 1, Chemistry 2, Economics 1, Economics 2, French 1, French 2, Geography 1, Geology 1, Geology 2, •Beginners' German, German 1, German 2, ^Beginners' Greek, Greek 1, Greek 2, History 1, History 2, History 3, Latin 1, Latin 2, Mathematics 2, Mathematics 3, Mathematics 4, Philosophy 1, Physics 1, Physics 2, Physics 3, Zoology 1 9 •See Regulations "2" and "3". Pass Courses 67 Note.—Botany 1, Zoology 1, Geology 1 and 2 and History 3 are not open to First Year students. Economics 1, and Philosophy 1 are open to First Year students only if the permission of the Heads of these departments is obtained. History 2 is open to First Year students only if they are preparing for entrance to the Normal School. 2. No student in his First Year may elect more than one beginners' course in language, and no beginners' course in language will count towards a degree unless followed by a second year's work in that language. I 3. Except in the case of beginners' eourses, no course in language may be taken by a student who has not offered that language at Matriculation. A beginners' course in language may not be taken for credit by a student who has obtained credit for that language at Matriculation. 4. A student taking three languages in the first two years may defer the course selected under e (above) to the Third or Fourth Year. Note:—The following special conditions affecting admission to Applied Science are given for the information of students intending to enter that Faculty: (a) Nursing and Health courses require Junior Matriculation or equivalent (as for Arts). (b) All other courses require: (i) Junior Matriculation or equivalent, (ii) Also a First Year Arts Course or equivalent, which shall include the following subjects: Chemistry 1; Mathematics 1, (Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry); Physics 1, or 2; English 1; Latin 1, or French 1, or German B. 68 Faculty op Arts and Science The passing grade is 50 per cent, for Chemistry, Physics and each of the Mathematics subjects; but in the others a pass grade of 40 per cent, will be accepted, provided an average of 50 per cent, has been obtained in the total. Biology 1 may be taken as an optional extra subject, and, if passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent., need not be taken in Applied Science. Economics 1 taken in Arts is accepted in lieu of Economics in Applied Science. A reading kuowledge of French and German is desirable for students in Engineering. No student may enter with any outstanding supplemental in Junior Matriculation or in any of the Chemistry, Mathematics or Physics subjects listed above; or with supplemental in other subjects to the extent of more than three units. Students who have failed to complete the above requirements may apply for permission to take the September Supplemental Examinations in Arts. To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to submit to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31st of each year, a scheme of the courses they propose to take during their last two years. THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consists of 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third Year, not less than 15 units. PASS CURRICULUM 1. A minimum of 15 units must be taken in two Major subjects, not less than 6 units in either, and a minimum of 6 units in some other subject or subjects. Work in the First or Second Year is required in each of the Major subjects, except in the case of Bacteriology. Both Major subjects must be chosen from one of the following groups: (a) Chemistry, Bacteriology, Botany, Geology, Physics, Zoology. (b) Chemistry, Physics, Mathematics. (c) Economics, Philosophy, Mathematics. Honour Courses 69 (d) English, Greek, Latin, French, German, History, Economics, Philosophy. 2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth Years are given under the various departments. •First and Second Year courses may be taken in the Third or Fourth Year, but only with the consent of the Department concerned and of the Department in which the candidate is doing his major work, and no such course (with the exception of Third and Fourth Year subjects which are open to Second Year students) will be counted for more than 2 units in the Third or Fourth Year. But the Department in which such a course is taken may supplement it by a reading course or special course counting one unit. No credit will be given for a language course normally taken in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third Year and continued in the Fourth Year. Some courses, however, are intended for Honour students only. 3. During the Fourth Year one course of private reading, to count not more than 3 units, may be taken with the consent of the department concerned. HONOURS 1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves Honour courses must obtain the consent of the departments concerned and of the Dean before entering on these courses; and this consent will normally be granted only to those students who have a clear academic record at the end of their Second Year with at least Second Class standing in the subject or subjects of specialization. (Cards of application for admission to Honour courses may be obtained at the Registrar's office.) 2. Certain departments offer Honour courses either alone or in combination with other departments. For Honours in a single department, at least 18 of the requisite 30 units must be taken in the department concerned, and at least 6 outside it. For Honours in combined courses, at least 12 units are required in each of two subjects. Particulars of these courses are given below. *Thls regulation applies to students in Pass courses only, and an exception is made in the case of Greek 1 and German 1. 70 Faculty op Arts and Science 3. All candidates for Honours may, at the option of the department or departments concerned, be required to present a graduating essay embodying the results of some investigation that they have made independently. Credit for the graduating essay will be not less than 3 or more than 6 units. 4. Candidates for Honours are required, at the end of their Fourth Year, to take a general examination, oral or written, or both, as the department or departments concerned shall decide. This examination is designed to test the student's knowledge of his chosen subject or subjects as a whole and is in addition to the ordinary class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years. 5. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second Class. Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have not attained a sufficiently high ranking may be awarded a pass degree. If a combined Honour course is taken, First Class Honours will be given only if both the departments concerned agree; and an Honour degree will be withheld if either department refuses a sufficiently high ranking. 6. The following Honour courses are regularly offered, and other Honour courses may be arranged with the department or departments concerned. HONOUR COURSES IN SINGLE DEPARTMENTS Biology (Botany Option) Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Chemistry 1, and Botany 1. Physics 1 and Zoology 1 are required before completion of the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3. Required Courses:—Botany 3, 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c). Optional Courses:—Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany not specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional courses should be selected in consultation with the department. Biology (Zoology Option) Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, Chemistry 1. Physics 1 and Botany 1 are required before completion of Honour Courses 71 the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3. Required Courses:—Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6. Optional Courses:—Zoology 4, 7, 8; courses in Botany; Geology 6. These optional courses should be selected in consultation with the Head of the department. Chemistry Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2. Course:—Candidates are required to complete the following courses: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 10. Classics Course:—Any three of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7, and any three of Latin 3, 4, 5, 6. As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose, candidates must attain not less than Second Class standing in Greek 8 and Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth Year, papers will be set on sight translation; and the candidate is advised to pursue a course of private reading under the supervision of the department. There will also be a general paper on Antiquities, Literature and History. J * Economics Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. Course:—Economics 2 if not already taken, any 15 further units in the department, and a graduating essay which will count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.) Students must pass an oral examination and, if required, address a general audience on a designated subject. Work in this department should be supplemented by a course in Ethics and by the foundational courses in History. English Language and Literature Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. Course:—English 19 (involving an examination on the life, 72 Faculty op Arts and Science times, and complete works of some major English author), 20, 21 (a), 21 (o), 22, 24 (the seminar, which must be attended in both years, though credit will be given only for the work of the final year), and a graduating essay which will count 3 units. Candidates will be required to take a final Honours examination, written or oral, or both, on the History of English Literature. In the award of Honours special importance will be attached to the graduating essay and to the final Honours Examination. If the candidate's work outside the department does not include a course in English History, he must take an examination in that subject. Geology Prerequisites:—Geology 1. If possible Geology 2 should be taken. Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 should be taken in the First Year. Zoology 1, to which Biology 1 is prerequisite, should be taken in the Third Year in preparation for Geology 6. Course:—18 units to be chosen from Geology 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12. History Course:—Any 18 units, of which the graduating essay will count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credit) must be attended in either the Third or the Fourth Year. A reading knowledge of French is required. French Course:—French 3 (a), 3 (6), 3 (c) in the Third Year. French 4 (a), 4 (6), 4 (c) in the Fourth Year. A graduating essay (in French) which will count 3 units. Mathematics Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2. Course:—Any 18 units in Mathematics, and Physics 3 and 4. Mathematics 3 or 4, but not both, may be taken among the requisite 18 units. A final Honours Examination is required. Combined Honour Courses 73 Physics Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2. Course:—Mathematics 10, 16, 17. Physics 3 and 4, and 12 additional units. COMBINED HONOUR COURSES (a) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Bacteriology Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Biology 1; Botany 1, or Zoology 1. Course:—Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5; the required courses for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in Biology. (b) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and-Geology Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Biology 1; Geology 1. Course:—Geology 2, 3 and 6; the required courses for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in Biology. (c) Chemistry and Biology (Botany and Zoology) Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2; Biology 1. Course:—Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9; the required courses for either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course in Biology. (d) Chemistry and Physics Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2. Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and Physics 3, 4, 7 or 9, and 8 or 10. Candidates are advised to take Mathematics 10. (e) Chemistry and Geology Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Geology 1. Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and at least 12 units in Geology. 74 Faculty op Arts and Science (f) Chemistry and Mathematics Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1; Mathematics 1 and 2. Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and at least 12 units in Mathematics, including Mathematics 10. (g) Mathematics and Physics Prerequisites:—Mathematics 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2. Course .-—Mathematics, at least 12 units, including Mathematics 10, 16 and 17. Physics, at least 12 units, including Physics 3 if not already taken, and Physics 4. (h) Any two of: Economics, English, French, History, Latin, Philosophy. Economics Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. Course:—Any 12 units, including Economics 2, if not already taken. English Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German. Course:—English 20 and 24, and any three of the English courses of the first division. The seminar must be attended during both of the final years, but credits which count for the B.A. degree will be given only for the work of the Fourth Year. A final Honours Examination, written or oral, or both, is required on the History of English Literature since 1500. French Course:—If the graduating essay is written on a French subject, 3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c); otherwise either these courses or 3 (a) and 3 (b), 4 (a) and 4 (b). Courses 3 (b) and 4 (6) are intended primarily for Honour students and should be taken whenever possible, even if they are not required to make up the minimum number of units. Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 75 History Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French. Course:—History 4 or 5 and any 9 additional units, of which the graduating essay, if written in History, will count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credits) must be attended in either the Third or Fourth Year. Latin Course:—Latin 8 and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In the final year candidates must pass an examination (a) in sight translation, and (b) in Latin Literature, History and Antiquities. Private reading under the direction of the department is recommended. Philosophy Course:—Any 12 units besides Philosophy 1, six units in each year. t COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A. 1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A. degree from this University, or its equivalent. 2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. 3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required: To spend one year in resident graduate study; or (i) To do two or more years of private work under the supervision of the University, such work to be equivalent to one year of graduate study; or 76 Faculty op Arts and Science (ii) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident graduate study. 4. One major and one minor shall be required. 5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-sized thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.") 6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be made to the Registrar by October 15th. 7. The following requirements apply to all Departments: Prerequisites: Minor:—For a minor, at least six units of work regularly offered in the Third and Fourth years shall be prerequisite. For details or requirements, see regulations of the several Departments. Major:—For a major, at least eight units of work regularly offered in the Third and Fourth years shall be prerequisite. For details of requirements, see regulations of the several Departments. Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined above during their undergraduate course may fulfil the same by devoting more than one academic year's study to the M.A. work. M. A. Courses: Minor:—Five or six units of regular Third or Fourth year work, or equivalents in reading courses. Examinations to be written, or oral, or both at the discretion of the Department concerned. At least second class standing is required in the subjects of the minor. Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 77 Major:—Nine or ten units of regular Third or Fourth year work, or equivalents in reading courses, of which units three to six shall be counted for the thesis. All candidates must submit to a general examination on the major field. This examination may be written, or oral, or both, at the discretion of the Department concerned. At least second class standing is required in the work of the major. Languages:—No candidate will receive the degree of M.A. who has not satisfied the Head of the Department with which he is majoring of his ability to read technical articles either in French or in German. Students doing tutorial work shall not be allowed to come up for final examination in less than two academic years after registration as M.A. students. The following special requirements are prescribed by different departments: Biology (Botany Option) Prerequisites: Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and Zoology. Major:—Biology 1, Botany 1, and eight additional units including Zoology 1. M. A. Course: Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the Department. Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete required units. Biology (Zoology Option) Prerequisites: Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and Zoology. 78 Faculty op Arts and Science Major:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, and eight additional units, including Botany 1. M.A. Course: Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation with the Department. Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete the required number of units. Economics Prerequisites: Minor:—The B.A. degree involving credit for at least fifteen units of work in subjects in the Department, or an equivalent. Major:—The B.A. degree with Honours in Economics; or in Economics in combination with some other subject; or an equivalent. M.A. Course: All candidates for the Master's degree in this Department must attend the Honour Seminar. English Prerequisites: Minor:—At least nine units of credit for English courses elective in the Third and Fourth years of the undergraduate curriculum. Major:—At least fifteen units of credit for courses elective in the Third and Fourth years. M.A. Course: Minor:—Six units of credit in advanced courses in English not already taken. Major:—(a) Twelve units of credit in advanced courses not already taken, one of which courses must be English 21a, or its equivalent, if this has not been previously offered for credit. Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 79 (b) A graduating essay which will count as an advanced course involving three units of credit. (c) Oral examinations on the history of English Literature. (d) A reading knowledge of either French or German. A student who offers both languages will be allowed three units of credit towards the M.A. degree. With French Detailed Study: (a) O.F.—Aucassin and Nicolette. (b) XVIth Century—-Montaigne, EsSais (Hatier). Chefs- d'oeuvre poetiques du XVIe siecle (Hatier). Less Detailed: A (c) XVIIth Century and after-^-The evolution of the French Novel, particularly the novels treated in Le Breton's Roman au XVIIe sidcle—Roman au XVIIIe si&cle, and the chief Romantic Novels. (d) XVIIIth Century—Beaumarchais, Barbier de Seville. Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise—Emile. Diderot, Le Neveu de Rameau. Voltaire, Les Lettres philosophiques. (e) XlXth Century—Auzas, La poesie au 19e siecle. (Oxford). Alfred de Musset, ThSdtre. (Oxford). Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac. (Fasquelle). (f) A general knowledge of French literary history from XVIth Century to end of XlXth. This not to be detailed, but to treat of main movements. (g) A thesis in French on a subject to be approved by the Head of the Department. Note:—It is expected that the candidate will have read and will be able to discuss three plays of Moliere, three of Corneille, three of Racine, and something of Boileau, Bossuet, Chateaubriand, La Fontaine, Lamartine, Victor Hugo, Balzac, Flaubert, Anatole France. 80 Faculty of Arts and Science Some help will be given by lectures, explanations of texts, and advice in reading, but the Department cannot undertake to cover the whole or any considerable part of the syllabus. History Prerequisites: Minor:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History 4 to 9 inclusive. Major:—Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from History 4 to 9 inclusive. M.A. Course: Minor:—Two courses (6 units) to be chosen from History 4 to 9 inclusive; or the equivalent in reading courses. All candidates for a minor in History must attend the Honour Seminar. Major:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History 4 to 9 inclusive. A thesis embodying original work to which 3 units of credit is given. All candidates for a major in History must attend the Honour Seminar. Examinations shall be written and oral. Candidates for a major will be examined orally on their thesis and their major field. An average of 75 per cent, is required to qualify in the work of a major. Mathematics Prerequisites: Minor:—Mathematics 10 and at leaest two other Honour Courses. Major:—Candidates must have completed the Honour Course in Mathematics, or its equivalent. M.A. Course: Minor:—Mathematics 16 and an additional three units to be chosen from the Honour Courses. Major:—Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis. Examinations and Advancement 81 EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT 1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students, are held in December and in April. Applications for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented. 2. The passing mark will be 50 per cent, in each subject, except in the case of the First and Second Years when the work of either year is taken as a whole in one session, in which case an aggregate of 50 per cent, will be required and not less than 40 per cent, in each subject. In Beginners' Greek and Beginners' German, however, the passing mark is 50 per cent. 3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. 4. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which he has failed, but a student obtaining less than 30 per cent, in a subject will not be granted a supplemental examination in that subject, except with the consent of the Faculty. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such examinations have been granted. 5. Supplemental examinations will be held in September and will not be granted at any other time, except by special permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper. To pass a supplemental examination, a candidate must obtain at least 50 per cent. A candidate with a supplemental examination outstanding in any subject which is on the Summer Session curriculum may clear his record by attending the Summer Session course in the subject and passing the required examinations. 6. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied 82 Faculty op Arts and Science by the necessary fees (See schedule of Fees) must be in the hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date set for the examinations. 7. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 3 units of the preceding year, nor with any supplemental examination outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year or of Matriculation unless special permission to do so is granted by Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty is satisfied that the failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations had an adequate cause. 8. A student may not continue in a later year any subject in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the Second Year. 9. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat his year will be exempt from attending lectures and passing examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least 50 per cent. In this ease he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year. 10. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year, may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University. 11. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding. Bacteriology 83 12. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English, and, in this event, students will be required to pass a special examination in English to be set by the Department of English. DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE Department of Bacteriology Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill. Instructor: Freda L. Wilson. Assistant: Helen M. Mathews. 1. General Bacteriology:—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work. The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in nature, the classification of bacterial forms, methods of culture and isolation, and various bactericidal substances and conditions will be studied. The relationship of bacteria to agriculture, household science, and public health will be carefully considered. Text-book:—Thomas, Bacteriology, Latest Edition, McGraw-Hill. Students proceeding to Bacteriology 2 need procure Jordan only (see Bacteriology 2). Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1, and Biology 1. Seven hours a week. First Term. 2 units. 2. Special Bacteriology:—A course consisting of lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work. The more common pathogenic bacteria will be studied, together with the reaction of the animal body against invasion by these bacteria. The course will include studies in immunity and the various diagnostic methods in use in public health laboratories. Text-book:—Jordan, General Bacteriology, Latest Edition, Saunders. Prerequisite:—Bacteriology 1. Seven hours a week. Second Term. 2 units. 84 Faculty op Arts and Science 3. As in Dairying 3 (under Faculty of Agriculture.) 2 units. 4. As in Dairying 7 (under Faculty of Agriculture.) iy2 units. 5. Advanced Bacteriology:—A reading and laboratory course, including immunology. Tutorial instruction of one hour per week; laboratory and demonstration hours to be arranged with the class. Text-books:—Kolmer, Infection and Immunity. Jordan, General Bacteriology, Latest Editions, Saunders. Prerequisites:—Bacteriology 1 and 2. 3 units. 6. Soil Bacteriology:—A laboratory and lecture course, in which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility. Text-book:—Lohnis and Fred, Text-book of Agricultural Bacteriology, Latest Edition, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisite:—Bacteriology 1. Five hours a week. First term. 2 units. Department of Botany Professor: A. H. Hutchinson. Assistant Professor: John Davidson. Assistant Professor: Frank Dickson. Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell. Assistant: Jean Davidson. Assistant: Braham G. Griffith. Assistant: C. W. Argue. Biology 1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine. The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division of labour; life-histories; relation to environment. The course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany and Zoology. Botany , 85 Text-book: — Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea & Febiger, 1920. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. Principles of Genetics:—The fundamentals of Genetics illustrated by the race histories of certain plants and animals; the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications. Text-book:—Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press. Prerequisite:—Biology 1. Two lectures per week. First Term. 1 unit. 3. General Physiology:—A study of animal and plant life processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department should be consulted. Text-book:—Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology, Longmans, Green. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. Reference reading. Second Term. 3 units. Botany 1. General Botany:—A course including a general survey of the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized courses in Botany. This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany, except the Evening Course. Partial credit for this course (2 units) may be obtained through the Evening Course. Text-book:—Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. Prerequisite:—Biology 1. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. Morphology:—A comparative study of plant structures. The relationship of plant groups. Comparative life-histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures, from the lower to the higher forms, involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence of parts. 86 Faculty op Arts and Science Text-book:—Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First Term. 2 units. 3. Plant Physiology. Text-book:—V. I. Palladin, Plant Physiology, English Edition (Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, Blakiston. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Two lectures and four hours laboratory work per week. First Term. 2 units. 4. Histology:—A study of the structure and development of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope, camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus. Text-books:—Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to Plant Anatomy, McGraw-Hill. Chamberlain, Methods in Plant Histology, University of Chicago Press. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Seven hours per week. Second Term. 2 units 5. Systematic Botany. 5 (a) Economic Flora:—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and poisonous plants. Methods of control. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Texts:—Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University of California; Thomson and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First Term. iy2 units. 5 (6) Dendrology:—A study of the forest trees of Canada, the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys. Botany 87 Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Text-books:—Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada, Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest Trees of the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. One lecture and one period of two or three hours' laboratory or field work per week. 5 (e) Descriptive Taxonomy:—An advanced course dealing with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering plants." Methods of field, herbarium and laboratory work. Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature. Prerequisites:—Botany 1 and 5 (a). Texts:—Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley & Sons, N. Y.; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage & Co., Toronto. One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. Second Term. iy2 units. 6 (a) General Plant Pathology:—Identification and life histories of pathogens causing disease of some common economic plants; means of combating them. Text-book:—Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw- Hill. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. One lecture and two hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 1 unit. 6 (b) Forest Pathology:—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant parasites of forests. Text-book:—Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan. One lecture and two hours laboratory per week during one- half of the Second Term. y2 unit- 6 (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary):—A course similar to 6 (a), but including more details concerning the diseases studied. Text-book:—Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw- Hill. 88 Faculty op Arts and Science Prerequisite:—Botany 1. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 2 units. 6 (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced):—A course designed for Honour or Graduate students. Technique; isolation and culture work; inoculations; details concerning the various stages in the progress of plant diseases; a detailed study of control measures. Prerequisite:—Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c). One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 6 (e) Mycology:—A course designed to give the student a general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic point of view. Text-books:—Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. ^ Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Credit will be given for a collection of fungi made during the summer preceding the course. First Term. 2 units. 6 (/) History of Plant Pathology:—A lecture course dealing with the history of the science of Plant Pathology from ancient times to the present. Text-book:—Whetzel, An Outline of the History of Phytopathology, Saunders. Prerequisite:—Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c). One lecture per week. Second Term. y2 unit. 7. Plant Ecology. 7 (a) Forest Ecology and Geography:—The inter-relations of forest trees and their environment; the biological characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions; physiography. Text-book:—M. E. Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press. Prerequisite:—Botany 1. One lecture and one period of field and practical work per week. First Term. 1 unit. Evening and Short Courses in Botany A Course in General Botany, comprising approximately fifty lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant life Chemistry 89 of the Province. No entrance examination and no previous knowledge of the subject is required. The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners, foresters, and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province. As far as possible, illustrative material will be selected from the flora of British Columbia. The classes meet every Tuesday evening during the University session (Sept.-May) from 7.30 to 9.30 p.m. Field or laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a regular part of the course. No examination is required except in the case of University students desiring credit (two units) for this course. Other students desiring to ascertain their standing in the class may apply for a written test. A detailed statement of requirements, and work covered in this course, is issued as a separate circular. Copies may be had on request. Department of Chemistry Professor: E. H. Archibald. Professor of Organic Chemistry: R. H. Clark. Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer. Assistant Professor: M. J. Marshall. Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris. Instructor: John Allardyce. Lecturer: M. Neal Carter. Assistant: R. W. Ball. Assistant: D. F. Stedman. Assistant: A. P. Gallaugher. Assistant: R. H. Ball. 1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a full exposition of the general principles involved in modern Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology. Text-book:—Byers, Inorganic Chemistry, Scribners. Three lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. 90 Faculty op Arts and Science (a) Qualitative Analysis. — One lecture and six hours laboratory per week throughout the First Term. (During the first six weeks of the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part of the laboratory work.) (6) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis. Text-books:—A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan; Cumming & Kay, Quantitative Analysis, Gurney & Jackson. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 1. One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. Second Term, 3 units. Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a). 3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the compounds of carbon will include the methods of preparation and a description of the more important groups of compounds in both the fatty and the aromatic series. Chemistry 3 will only be given to those students taking Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2. Books recommended:—Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 4. Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course on the development of modern Chemistry, including osmotic phenomena, the ionization theory, the law of mass action, and the phase rule. Text-book:—James Walker, Introduction to Physical Chemistry, Macmillan. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. iy2 units. 5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. (a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will include the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially, together with the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in nature. Chemistry 91 One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. First Term. (6) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks, as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute consideration than was possible in the elementary course. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2. One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 3 units. 6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries, which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry, will be considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be given by specialists in their respective fields. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 7. Physical Chemistry.—The lectures, which are a continuation of those given in 4, include the kinetic theory of gases, thermo-chemistry, the application of the principles of thermodynamics to chemistry, osmotic phenomena, applications of the dissociation theory, colloidal solutions, and a study of the physical properties of gases, liquids, and solids and of their chemical constitutions. Text-books: — Findlay, Physico-Chemical Measurements, Longmans. For reference:—Ramsay's Series of Books on Physical Chemistry, Longmans. Getman, Theoretical Chemistry, Wiley. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2, 3 and '4. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 8. Electro-Chemistry. — Solutions are studied from the standpoint of the osmotic and the dissociation theories. The laws of electrolysis, electroplating, electromotive force, primary and secondary cells are considered in some detail. For reference:—Le Blanc, Elements of Electro-Chemistry, Macmillan; Creighton-Fink, Theoretical Electro-Chemistry, 92 Faculty op Arts and Science Vol. I, John Wiley & Sons; Allmand, Applied Electro-Chemistry, Longmans, Green. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 4. Three lectures and three hours laboratory per week. First Term. 2 units. 9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—Important organic reactions will be discussed. The Carbohydrates, Proteins, Enzyme Action, Terpenes and Alkaloids will be studied in more or less detail. In the laboratory some complex compounds will be prepared and quantitative determinations of carbon, hydrogen, nitrogen, sulphur and the halogens made with the view of identifying organic compounds. For reference:—Cohen, Organic Chemistry, Arnold. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 10. History of Chemistry.—Particular attention will be paid to the development of chemical theory. For reference:—Von Meyer-McGowan, History of Chemistry, Macmillan. Prerequisites:—-Chemistry 2, 3, and 4. Two hours a week. Second Term. 1 unit. 11. Stereochemistry.—Stereochemical theories will be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry 9, and chemical and physico-chemical methods employed in determining the constitution of organic compounds will be studied. The lectures may be taken without the laboratory work. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 7 and 9. Lectures: 2 units. Laboratory, three hours per week. 3 units. 12. Colloid Chemistry.—The Chemistry of colloids and the application of colloidal chemistry to industry. For reference:—Bogue, Colloidal Behaviour, Vol. I and II, McGraw-Hill; Freundlich, Colloid Chemistry, Methuen; Reports on Colloid Chemistry by British Association for Advancement of Science. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 3 and 4. Two hours a week. First Term. 1 unit. Classics 93 14. Organic Agricultural. Chemistry.—An introduction to the compounds of carbon, with special applications to problems in agriculture. The laboratory work will be adapted to the needs of the individual student. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 15. Dairy Chemistry.—The chemistry of the carbohydrates, fats, and proteins will be discussed in outline, and the chemical processes involved in enzyme action and fermentation will receive consideration. Text-book:—Chamberlain, Agricultural Chemistry, Macmillan. Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3. One lecture and three hours laboratory per week. 2 units. 17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—Derivation of fundamental equations and application to the gas laws, theory of solutions, chemical equilibrium, electrochemistry and capillarity. Stud;, of the quantum theory and the Nernst heat theorem. Text-book:—Saekur, Thermochemistry and Thermodynamics, Macmillan. Reference:—Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisite:—Chemistry 7. Two lectures per week. Second Term. 1 unit. 18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—A more detailed treatment of the chemistry of the metals than is possible in Chemistry 1, together with the chemistry of the Rare Elements. Prerequisite—Chemistry 2 and 4. Three lectures per week. 3 units. Department of Classics Professor: Lemuel Robertson. Professor of Greek: O. J. Todd. Associate Professor: H. T. Logan. Assistant: H. A. Thompson. Greek Beginners' Greek.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. I- XLVIII; Copp, Clark. Four hours a week. Mr. Thompson. 3 units. 94 Faculty op Arts and Science 1. Lectures.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. XLIX- LXXX. Xenophon, Anabasis I and IV, Goodwin and White, Ginn. History.—Shuckburgh, History of Greece, Chap. I-V, Unwin. Four hours a week. Mr. Logan. 3 units. 2. Lectures.—Plato, Apology, Dyer-Seymour, Ginn; Aeschylus, Prometheus Bound, Wecklein-Allen, Ginn. Composition—Arnold's Greek Prose Composition, Abbott, Longmans. Selected passages will occasionally be set for Unseen Translation. History.—Shuckburgh, History of Greece, Chap. VI-X, Unwin. Four hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units. 3. Lectures.—Thucydides, History, Book VII, Marchant, Macmillan; Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge; Euripides, Heracles, Byrde, Oxford. Literature.—Wright, A Short History of Greek Literature, American Book Company. | * Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 5. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad (Selections), Monro, Iliad, 2 Vols., Oxford; Demosthenes, Third Olynthiac, First and Third Philippics, Butcher, Oxford (Vol. I.). Literature.—Wright, A Short History of Greek Literature, American Book Company. Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd. 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 6. Lectures. — Herodotus, History, Hude, Oxford (the equivalent of one book will be read); Lysias, Orations (Selections), Hude, Oxford; Aristophanes, The Birds, Hall and Geldart, Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.) Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) Classics 95 7. Lectures.—Aristotle, Ars Poetica, Bywater, Oxford; Plato, The Republic (Selections), Burnet, Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.) Three hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be taken in both Third and Fourth Years. One hour a week. Mr. Todd. 1 unit. 10. Greek Literature in English Translation.—A survey of Greek literary history from Homer to Lucian, with reading and interpretation of selected works from the most important authors. Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite. Members of the course will provide themselves with the following books: Aeschylus, translated by Campbell (Oxford); Sophoeles, translated by Campbell (Oxford); Euripides, Medea and Alcestis, translated by Murray (Allen and Unwin); Austo- phanes, translated by Frere, Vol. I (Dutton). Two hours a week. Mr. Todd. 2 units. For those who wish to extend the work to 3 units additional reading will be provided. Latin 1. Lectures.—Cicero, De Senectute, Shuckburgh-Egbert, Macmillan, N. Y.; Ovid, Elegiac Selections, Smith, Bell. Composition.—Bradley, Arnold's Latin Prose Composition, Longmans, to exercise 19. History.—Boak, A History of Rome to 565 A.D., Macmillan, chapters 1 to 13. Three hours a week. 3 units. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd, Mr. Thompson. A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the Roman History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is voluntary and no formal credit is given. 96 Faculty op Arts and Science 2. Lectures.—Virgil, Aeneid, Bk. VI, Page, Macmillan; Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace Odes II, Page, Macmillan. History.—Boak, A History of Rome to 565 A.D., Macmillan, chapters 14 to 20. Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Logan. 3 units. A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the Roman History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is voluntary and no formal credit is given. 3. Lectures.—Terence, Phormio, Sloman, Oxford; Virgil, Aeneid, Page, Macmillan. Literature:—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford. Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 4. Lectures.—Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan; Cicero, Selected Letters, Pritchard & Bernard, Oxford. Literature: Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford. Three hours a week. Mr. Logan, Mr. Robertson. 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 5. Lectures.—Juvenal, Satires, Duff, Cambridge; Seneca, Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking, Latin 3 or 4.) Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 6. Lectures.—Tacitus, Histories I, II, Godley, Macmillan; Garrod, Oxford Book of Latin Verse (Selections), Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Latin 3 or 4.) Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd.' 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 7. Lectures.—Roman History from 133 B.C. to 180 A.D. Text-books: A Short History of the Roman Republic, Heit- land, Cambridge; A History of the Roman Empire, Bury, Murray. Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) Economics 97 8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be taken in both Third and Fourth Years. One hour a week. Mr. Todd. 1 unit. Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science Professor: Theodore H. Boggs. Associate Professor: H. F. Angus. Assistant Professor: S. E. Beckett. Lecturer: N. A. Robertson. Assistant: George Allen. Assistant: Doris Lee. Economics 1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs, monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and trusts, etc. Fairchild, Furniss, Buck, Elementary Economics, Macmillan; The Canada Year Book, 1926. Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses in the department, but may be taken concurrently with Economics 2, or Government 1. This rule may be waived in the case of students of the Department of Nursing who may find it impossible to take both Economics 1 and Sociology 1. Three hours a week. 3 units. 2. History of Economic Life and Economic Thought.—a brief outline of Economic Thought, and of Economic and Social conditions in England previous to 1776. A survey of the more important phases of European Organization from the time of the Middle Ages, with special reference to the Industrial Revolution, the Progress of Agriculture, and resultant social conditions. The development of modern Economic Thought, with a study of the influence of Smith, Malthus, Ricardo, Mill and others, and the place of the Deductive and Historical Methods. Toynbee, The Industrial Revolution, Longmans. Marshall 98 Faculty op Arts and Science and Lyon, Our Economic Organization, Macmillan; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units 3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of the rise of the factory system and capitalistic production, and of the more important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada, and the United States. A critical analysis of various solutions of the labour problem attempted and proposed; profit-sharing, co-operation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management, labour legislation and socialism. Hoxie, Trade Unionism in the United States, Appleton. Cole, Guild Socialism, Stokes. Carpenter, Guild Socialism, Appleton. Simkhovitch, Marxism versus Socialism, Williams & Norgate; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 4. Money and Banking.—The origin and development of money. Banking principles and operations, laws of coinage, credit, price movements, foreign exchange. Banking policy in the leading countries, with particular reference to Canada. Robertson, Money, Nisbet. Foster and Catchings, Money, Houghton Mifflin. Dunbar, Theory and History of Banking, Putnam, 1917. Phillips, Readings in Money and Banking, Macmillan; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units. 5. Government Finance.—An outline course dealing with the principles and methods of taxation, and administration of public funds. Topics examined include: growth of taxation methods; theories of justice in taxation; classification, increase, economic effects, and control of expenditures; property, business, personal, commodity, and inheritance taxes, with reference to Canada, Britain and other countries; the single tax; double taxation; shifting, incidence and economic effects of taxation; flotation, administration, conversion and redemption of government loans. Economics 99 Lutz, Public Finance, Appleton, 1924; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 6. International Trade and Tariff Policy.—A survey of the theory of international trade and the foreign exchanges; and a study of the commercial policy of the leading countries, with considerable attention to the British Dominions. Bastable, The Theory of International Trade, Macmillan, 1903. Taussig, Selected Readings in International Trade and Tariff Problems, Ginn; and assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 7. Corporation Economics.—Historical development of tht different forms of industrial organization, including the partnership, joint-stock company, and the corporation, and the later developments, such as the pool, trust, combination, and holding company. Methods of promotion and financing, over-capitalization, stock market activities, the public policy toward corpora- * tions, etc. Readings to be assigned. Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 8. Provincial and Local Finance. — A brief summary of fundamental principles of taxation. Sources of revenue, and tax systems of federal, and provincial and municipal governments, especially of British Columbia. Problems of War Finance. Chief problems of provincial and municipal finance and administration. Separation of sources of provincial and municipal revenues. Methods of municipal supervision and control. Government debts. Assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 100 Faculty op Arts and Science Agricultural Economics 1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural problem; and some special topics, such as the agricultural surplus, production in relation to population growth, the farm income, and the share of Agriculture in the national income. Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan. References and assigned readings from Gray, Carver, Nourse, and others. Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units. 2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to the individual farttn and to Agriculture as a whole. The general principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements, co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat, fruit and milk in Canada. Brown, Marketing, Harper and Brothers; Mackintosh, Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada, Ryerson Press, Toronto; references and assigned readings from Macklin, Hib- bard, Boyle, Benton, and others. Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units. Government 1. Constitutional Government.—This course deals with the nature, origin, and aims of the State; and with the organization of government in the British Empire, the United States of America, France, and Germany. Readings to be assigned. Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. 2. Introduction to the Study of Law.—(a) A rapid survey of Legal History, (b) Outlines of Jurisprudence. Readings to be assigned. Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. 3. Imperial Problems.—A course on problems of govern- Education 101 ment within the British Empire, to be given in alternate years with Economics 7. Readings to be assigned. Government 1 is a prerequisite of this course, but may be taken concurrently with it. Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) Sociology 1. Principles of Sociology.—An introductory study of early man and his relation to his environment; of races of men and their distribution; of the early forms and development of industrial organization, marriage and the family, arts and sciences, religious systems, government, classes, rights, etc. A review also of certain of the social problems of modern society growing out of destitution, crime, overcrowding, etc. A critical survey of schemes for betterment. Blackmar & Gillin, Outlines of Sociology, Macmillan. Beach, An Introduction to Sociology and Social Problems, Houghton- Mifflin Company. Three hours a week. Mr. Beckett. 3 units. Department of Education Professor: G. M. Weir. Assistant Professor: Jennie Benson Wyman. Special Lecturer: H. T. J. Coleman. Lecturers in High School Methods: the following Heads of Depart- . ments: E. H. Archibald, H. Ashton, D. Buchanan, T. C. Hebb, L. Robertson, W. N. Sage (Acting Head), G. G. Sedgewick, also W. K. Beech and C. H. Scott of the Vancouver School staff. Lecturers in Elementary School Methods: A. Anstey, A. R. Lord, F. W. Dyke, C. H. Scott, R, Straight, Miss E. J. Trembath. Courses in Education Teacher Training Course 1. Explanatory Statement At the request of the Provincial Department of Education, the University undertook, in September, 1923, the direction of the professional training of candidates for the Academic Certificate. 102 Faculty op Arts and Science Courses in elementary methods and in the special subjects of the elementary school curriculum were provided in the Provincial Normal School, and facilities for practice teaching were furnished through the kindness of the Vancouver School Board and the Principal and Staff of the King Edward High School. These courses were open only to University graduates, and the original registration was 55. The Dean of Arts and Science acted as provisional director and lecturer in the History and Principles of Education and in Educational Psychology. In November, 1923, Dr. George M. Weir, Principal of the Provincial Normal School, Saskatoon, Sask., was appointed Professor of Education and Director of Teacher Training, and assumed the duties of his office January 1, 1924. Lecturers on Methods in High School subjects were appointed from the University staff. 2. Registration Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts or Science from a recognized university must be submitted to the University Registrar by all candidates other than graduates of The University of British Columbia. All correspondence in connection with the Teacher Training course should be addressed to the University Registrar, from whom registration cards may be procured. 3. Certificates and Standing At the close of the University session, successful candidates in the Teacher Training Course will be recommended to the Provincial Department of Education for the Academic Certificate, and to the Faculty of Arts and Science for the University Diploma in Education. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. All students registered in the Teacher Training Course at the University are entitled to the privileges accorded to students in the various Faculties, and are also subject to the regulations of the University regarding discipline and attendance at lectures. Education 103 First or Second Class standing in History and Principles of Education and in Educational Psychology of the Teacher Training Course is accepted as equivalent to a Minor for an M.A. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head of the Department in which the student wishes to Major. 4. Preparatory Courses in Arts and Science After 1928 candidates admitted to Courses in High School Methods will be required to have taken the equivalent of a minor (6 units) in the corresponding pass courses of undergraduate work. Students in the Teacher Training Course will find it to their advantage to have taken at least one class in Psychology during their undergraduate course. 5. Courses Offered A. Throughout the University Session. (1) Educational Psychology: Text: Gates, Psychology for Students of Education, Macmillan. References: Pillsbury, Education as a Psychologist Sees It, Macmillan; Thomson, Instinct, Intelligence and Character, Longman; Burnham, The Normal Mind, Appleton. Prerequisite: Philosophy 1, or its equivalent—obligatory from 1929. (2) School Administration and Law: Texts: Sears, Classroom Organization and Control, Houghton Mifflin. Manual of School Law, British Columbia. References: Cubberley, Public School Administration, Houghton, Mifflin; Cubberley, The Principal and His School, Houghton, Mifflin; Perry, The Management of a City School, Macmillan (Revised Edition) ; Davis, Junior High School Education, World Book Company; Johnson, Administration and Supervision of the High School, Ginn & Co.; Report of the School Survey Commission, British Columbia; assigned readings. 104 Faculty op Arts and Science (3) History and Principles of Education: (a) Educational leaders and movements with special reference to the period since 1800. (b) Educational systems:—Canada with special reference to British Columbia; England; France; Germany ; the United States. Texts: Cubberley, A Brief History of Education, Houghton Mifflin. Chapman and Counts, Principles of Education, Houghton Mifflin. References: Birchenough, History of Elementary Education in England and Wales, University Tutorial Press; Sandiford, Comparative Education, J. M. Dent; Balfour, Educational Systems of Great Britain and Ireland, Oxford ; Farrington, Public Primary School System of France, Columbia University; Kandel, The Reform of Secondary Education in France, Columbia University; Alexander, The Prussian Elementary Schools, Macmillan; Kandel, Twenty- five Years of American Education, Macmillan; Cubberley, Readings in the History of Education, Houghton Mifflin. (4) Educational Tests, Measurements and Statistics: Text: Hines, A Guide to Educational Measurements, Houghton Mifflin. References: Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Holt; Monroe, DeVoss and Kelly, Educational Measurements, Houghton Mifflin; Williams, Graphic Methods in Education, Houghton Mifflin; Otis, Statistical Measurement, World Book Co.; Ruch, Improvement of the Written Examination, Scott Foresman & Co. The above courses are obligatory for all students. B. During the Fall Term. (1) Psychology of the Elementary School Subjects: Texts: Freeman, The Psychology of the Common Branches, Houghton Mifflin; Stone, Silent and Oral Reading, Houghton Mifflin. English 105 References: Stormzand, Progressive Methods of Teaching, Houghton Mifflin; Charters, Teaching the Common Branches, Houghton Mifflin. Assigned readings from the Year Books and Educational Journals. (2) Methods in Elementary School Subjects: Assigned Readings. The above courses are obligatory for all students. C. During the Spring Term. (1) Methods in High School Subjects: Text: Judd, Psychology of High School Subjects, Ginn & Co. References: Parker, Methods of Teaching in High Schools, Ginn & Co. \ Assigned readings. Three (3) courses are prescribed (two obligatory and one optional). Nine hours a week. 6. Observation Assignments and Practice Teaching 1. Fall Term: At least forty (40) hours in the elementary schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students. 2. Spring Term: At least sixty (60) hours in the high schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students. Department of English Professor: G. G. Sedgewick. Associate Professor: W. L. MacDonald. Associate Professor: F. G. C. Wood. Associate Professor: Thorleif Larsen. Assistant Professor: F. C. Walker. Assistant Professor: M. L. Bollert. Assistant Professor: Frank H. Wilcox. Assistant: Sallee Murphy. Assistant: Dorothy Wroughton. First Year 1. (o) Literature. — Elementary study of a number of 106 Faculty op Arts and Science literary forms to be chosen from the short story, the play, the novel, the essay, the simpler sorts of poetry. Texts for 1927-28: Hastings, Clough and Mason, Short Stories, Houghton Mifflin. Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert Murray's paraphrase. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar. Sheridan, The School for Scandal, Everyman. Ibsen, The Doll's House, Everyman. An Anthology of Modern Verse, Methuen. Two hours a week. (6) Composition. — Elementary forms and principles of composition. Two hours a week. 3 units. The work in composition consists of (i) themes and class exercises, and (ii) of written examinations. Students will be required to make a passing mark in each of these two parts of the work. Second Year 2. (a) Literature. — Studies in the history of English Literature. Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley. Neilson and Thorndike, A History of English Literature, Macmillan. Century Readings in English, ed. Cunliffe, Century Publishing Co. Two hours a week. (b) Composition.—Narrative and descriptive themes; the writing of reports. One hour a week. 3 units. (c) Literature.—Readings from Nineteenth Century poetry since 1830. For this course, which is intended for prospective Honour students in English and for others especially interested in the study of Literature, no formal credit is given. One hour a week. Third and Fourth Years The curriculum in English for students of the Third and Fourth Years is arranged in three divisions. The first includes a English 107 central body of general courses which will be offered, as far as possible, every year, and to each of which are assigned 3 units of credit. In the second division are listed courses carrying 2 units of credit and usually given in alternate years. And the third consists of courses designed especially for Honour and Graduate students, and open to others only by special permission. Candidates for honours are referred to Page 111. Division I 9. Shakespeare.—This course may be taken for credit in two successive years. In 1927-28, 9 (a) will be given as follows: i. A detailed study of the text of Romeo and Jxdiet, Henry TV, Part I, Hamlet, The Tempest. ii. Lectures on Shakespeare's development, on his use of sources, and on his relation to the stage and the dramatic practice of his time. Students will provide themselves with annotated editions of the four plays named above, and with The Facts about Shakespeare, by Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan. They are advised to get the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, or the Oxford Shakespeare, ed. Craig. Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units. 9 (b). (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 10. The Drama to 1642.—The course begins with a study of the Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's Theory of Tragedy. The main subject of the course, however, is Elizabethan Drama: (1) its beginnings in the Miracle and Morality Plays and in the Interludes; (2) its development in Shakespeare's predecessors—Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd, and Marlowe; (3) its culmination in Shakespeare; (4) and its decline in Johnson, Beaumont and Fletcher, Middleton, Webster, Massinger, Shirley, and Ford. Texts:—Lewis Campbell, Sophocles in English Verse, World's Classics, Oxford. F. T. Tickner, Earlier English Drama, 108 Faculty op Arts and Science Nelson. Chief Elizabethan Dramatists, ed. Neilson. Shakespeare, ed. Craig, Oxford, or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson. Three hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 3 units. 13. The English Novel from Richardson to the Present Time. —The development of English fiction will be traced from Richardson, Fielding, Smollett, and Sterne through Goldsmith, Mrs. Radcliffe, Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte, Dickens, Thackeray, and George Eliot to Trollope, Meredith, Stevenson, and a few representative novelists now living. A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott, Dickens, Thackeray, and George Eliot is a prerequisite for those taking this course. Three hours a week. Mr. Wood. 3 units. 14. Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims to give a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main currents of English thought and literature during the period 1660-1800. From year to year various periods will be stressed and the work of various writers emphasized. Generally speaking, the course is mainly concerned with the work of such men as Dryden, Pope, Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson, Goldsmith, Burke and Burns. Three hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 3 units. 16. Romantic Poetry, 1780 to 1830.—Studies in the beginnings and progress of Romanticism, based chiefly on the work of Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, Shelley, Scott. Texts: The Oxford editions of the first five poets named. For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature, 1780-1830. Three hours a week. Mr. Walker. 3 units. 17. Victorian Poetry.—This course is concerned chiefly with the work of Tennyson, Browning, and Arnold. A few weeks at the close of the term will be devoted to a survey of the development of later poetry down to the work of Hardy. Texts: Browning, Complete Poetical Works, Cambridge English 109 Edition. Arnold, Poems, Oxford Edition. Tennyson, Poems, Globe Edition. Page, British Poets of the Nineteenth Century, Sanborn. For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature, 1830-1880. Three hours a week. Mr. Wilcox. 3 units. 19. Private Reading.—Students of the Senior Year may pursue, with the consent and under the direction of the Department, a course of private reading. In such courses examinations will be set, but no class instruction will be given. 3 units. Division II 5. The Elements of Poetics.—Studies in the criticism and appreciation of poetry; the poetic frame of mind; the emotional element in poetry; poetic content and the nature of poetic truth; poetic form and its varieties; metrics; contemporary developments in poetry; literary criticism, its nature and function; and an outline of aesthetic theory from Aristotle to Croce. Exercises in criticism and metrical composition. Winchester, Principles of Literary Criticism. Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 6. Narrative Writing.—A study of narrative composition: (a) critical reading of a considerable number of modern short stories and of two or three modern novels; (o) frequent critical and narrative themes. Only a limited number of students will be admitted to this course. Two hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 2 units. (Not given in 1927-28.) 7. Technique of the Drama.—A practical study of dramatie form and structure based on the analysis of modern plays, with special reference to the one-act play as an art form. Playmaking, by Wm. Archer, and Representative One-act Plays by British and Irish Authors, Little, Brown, are the texts used in this course. Two hours a week. Mr. Wood. 2 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 110 Faculty op Arts and Science 8. English Poetry, exclusive of the Drama, from the death of Chaucer to 1649—(1) The Renaissance; (2) the Fifteenth Century; (3) the Scottish Chaucerians; (4) John Skelton and the poets of the Transition; (5) the Elizabethan Lyric; (6) the Sonneteers; (7) Spenser and the Spenserians; (8) the Jacobean Poets; (9) the Caroline Poets; (10) the Theory of Poetry throughout the period. Texts:—Ward, The English Poets, Vol. I. Spenser, ed Smith and de Selincourt, Oxford. Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 11. English Drama since 1600.—A survey of English drama from the time of Ben Jonson to the present. Later Elizabethan drama, representative plays of the Restoration, the works of Goldsmith, Sheridan, and of early Nineteenth Century writers will be considered. There will follow a study of some dramatists of recent years, including Wilde, Shaw, Galsworthy, Pinero, Jones, Stephen Phillips, Barrie, and the Irish School. Two hours a week. Mr. Wood. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 12. Narrative Poetry. — Discussion of the types,—epic, ballad, and romance,—with readings, in suitable translations or modern versions where desirable; modern ballads and metrical romances represented by the work of Scott, Tennyson, Morris, Masefield and others. Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 15. American Literature.—A survey of the principal writers of this continent during the Nineteenth Century. Texts: Broadus, A Book of Canadian Prose and Verse, Oxford. Foerster, American Prose and Poetry, Houghton, Mifflin. Two hours a week. Mr. Wilcox. 2 units. (Given in 1927-28.) English 111 18. Social, literary, religious and scientific movements of the Victorian period: Carlyle, Ruskin, Macaulay, Newman, Darwin, Mill, Arnold, Butler, Stevenson. Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29.) Division III 20. Chaucer and Middle English.— (a) Middle English grammar with the reading of representative texts. (6) The Canterbury Tales. Texts: A Middle English reader and the Oxford Chaucer, ed. Skeat. Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 21a. Anglo-Saxon—Moore & Knott, The Elements of Old English, George Wahr. Bright, Anglo-Saxon Reader, Henry Holt. Two hours a week. Mr. Walker. 2 units. 21b. Anglo-Saxon.—Beowulf. Two hours a week after Christmas. Mr. Walker. 1 unit. 22. Studies in Linguistic History. — Origins, growth, and development of the English language. A brief introduction to Germanic philology; the Indo - European language group; Grimm's Law; the Anglo-Saxon period; Norman, French, and Latin influences; study of the gradual evolution of forms, sounds, and meanings. Two hours a week before Christmas. Mr. Walker. 1 unit. 24. Seminar.—In this class advanced students will get practice in some of the simpler methods of criticism and investigation. The subject for 1927-28 will probably be the life and work of Keats. Two hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 2 units. 112 Faculty op Arts and Science Department of Geology and Geography Professor: R. W. Brock. Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield. Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams. Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography: T. C. Phemister. Lecturer: E. M. Burwash. Assistant: W. A. Jones. Geology 1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in the lectures: (a) Physical Geology, including: weathering, the work of the wind, the work of ground water, the work of streams, the work of glaciers, the ocean and its work, the structure of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions, metamor- phism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-deposits. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, First Term. Mr. Schofield. (b) Historical Geology, including: the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic, and Quaternary eras. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr. Williams. The Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology include the study and identification of the commonest minerals and rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the study of structures by the use of models. Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the lectures. The Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology consist of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by their occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will be taken up and illustrated by the study of the palaeogeography of North America. Geology 113 Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology, Wiley. Reference Books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill, Rocks, Rock-weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks, Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils. Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's works. 3 units. 2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of Mineralogy. Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive Mineralogy of 40 of the most common mineral species, with special reference to Canadian occurrences. Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis. Text-book: Dana, Manual of Mineralogy, revised by Ford (new edition), Wiley. (For students taking only Geology 2 (a).) Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. (For students who subsequently take Geology 2 (6).) Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, First Term. Mr. Phemister. iy2 units. 2. (6) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This course supplements 2(a) and consists of a more complete survey of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association and alteration. Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Prerequisite: Geology 2(a). Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr. Phemister. V/2 units. 3. Historical Geology.—Continental evolution and development of life with special reference to North America. 114 Faculty op Arts and Science Text-book: Schubert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three hours per week, First Term. Mr. Williams. iy2 units. 4. Structural and PhySiographical Geology.—The following subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage, structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major units of structure, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography of British Columbia. Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, 2nd Ed., Holt. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three hours per week, Second Term. Mr. Schofield. ly2 units. 5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study of the earth and the development of the geological sciences. Mr. Brock. (6) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Brock. (c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their influences upon life. Mr. Brock. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three lectures and one hour laboratory per week. 3 units. 6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both geological and geographical. Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. Mr. Williams. 3 units. 7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of the following: (a) Optical Mineralogy, (b) Lithology and Petrogeny, (c) Microscopical Petrography. Geology 115 Lectures deal with the principles of crystal optics, and with the origin, occurrence, classification, metamorphism and decay of rocks. Laboratory Work consists of the study, determination and classification of specimens, structures and textures of rocks contained in the departmental collections. Field and microscopical methods of determination are equally stressed. Text-books: Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley. Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of Rockforming Minerals and Rocks, University of Chicago Press. Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2. Two lectures and two laboratory periods of 2 hours per week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units. 8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis, and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on those in Canada. Text-book: Emmons, General Economic Geology, McGraw- Hill. Reference books: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits. Ries, Economic Geology. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course. Four hours per week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister. 4 units. 9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means of the reflecting microscope. The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro- chemical methods of mineral determination. During the second term each student is assigned a suite of ores from some mining district for a critical examination and report. 116 Faculty op Arts and Science Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany this course. Two hours laboratory per week. Mr. Phemister. 1 unit. 10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and instruments employed in field geology. Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken, must be taken concurrently. Three hours per week. Mr. Schofield. \y2 units. 12. Meteorology and Climatology.—A course covering in a general way the whole field, with practice in using instruments, constructing and using weather charts, and weather predicting. Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield. \y2 units. Geography 1. Principles of Geography. — A general course dealing especially with the effects of the physical features of the earth upon life, and the ways in which various forms of life respond to their physical environment. The following topics are studied: earth relations; earth features; climate and climatic factors; oceans; materials of the land and their uses; changes of the earth's surface; coasts, plains, plateaus, mountains, inland waters, and their relations to life; human geography. Text-book: Salisbury, Barrows and Tower, Elements of Geography, Holt. Three lectures per week. Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield. 3 units. History 117 10. Introduction to Geography.—A brief introduction to the study of modern Geography, outlining the history and content of the subject, physical geography and human geography. One lecture a week. Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield. 1 unit. Department of History Professor: Mack Eastman. Associate Professor: W. N. Sage. Assistant Professor: F. H. Soward. Special Lecturer: H. L. Keenleyside. Assistant: Stanley Moodie. Students who intend to specialize in History are advised to associate with it from the first some allied subject, such as Economics. Economics 1, 2, 3, Government 1 and Sociology 1 will be found especially helpful. A reading knowledge of French and German will be found extremely valuable in Third and Fourth Year courses, while in certain classes of more advanced work Latin is indispensable. Hereafter, French at least will be required for Honour work. A list of books for reading and reference may be obtained from the professor in charge of each course. First and Second Years 1. Main Currents in Modern World History.—This course is intended primarily for First Year students and covers the period in World History between the French Revolution and the present day. It will include a discussion of such topics as the Balance of Power in the Eighteenth Century, the French Revolution, the Napoleonic Era, the Industrial Revolution, the Growth of Democracy in the Nineteenth Century, the Eastern Question, Nationality as a Factor in the Nineteenth Century, the Expansion of Europe, the Armed Peace (1870-1914), the Awakening of the Far East (1868-1914), the World War, the Russian Revolution, the League of Nations, Problems of the Pacific. Text-book: Schapiro, Modern and Contemporary European 118 Faculty op Arts and Science History, Houghton, Mifflin Co., revised edition, or Carleton Hayes, Political and Social History of Modern Europe, Vol. II, 1815-1924. Macmillan. Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units. 2. Canadian History. — This course opens with a brief analysis of the reasons for European colonization of America and a sketch of the colonial effort of Spain, France and Great Britain. In the French regime, exploration, the development of government, the conflict of church and state, and the struggle with Great Britain for the West are studied. In the British period, the relations of the French and English and the evolution of Canadian self-government are given special attention. On the colonization of America and the history of New France, students are especially advised to consult: Ramsay Muir, Expansion of Europe; Abbott, Expansion of Europe; the works of Francis Parkman; Munro, Crusaders of New France; Fiske, New France and New England; Eastman, Church and State in Early Canada; Lucas, History of Canada, Vol. I, New France; Wrong, Conquest of New France. On the British Period: Skelton, The Canadian Dominion, Life and Letters of Sir Wilrfid Laurier; Keenleyside, Notes on Canadian History; Egerton, History of Canada, Part II, 1763- 1921; Kennedy, The Constitution of Canada, Documents of the Canadian Constitution, 1759-1915; Bracq, Evolution of French Canada; Morison, British Supremacy and Canadian Self-government; Trotter, Federation of Canada; Wallace, Sir John Macdonald; Dafoe, Laurier. An essay counting 10% of the year's work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject, The Causes of European Expansion; Religion in New France and in New England; The Ethnic Origins of the Canadian people. Three hours a week. Mr. Keenleyside. 3 units. 3. English History. — The history of England from the Norman Conquest to the Revolution of 1688. This course is intended primarily for Second Year students who mean to History 119 specialize in history. It aims at interpreting the constitutional, political, economic, and religious development of England and Wales during the period prescribed. Attention will also be paid to the history of Scotland and Ireland and the origin of Overseas Britain. The sequel to this course is History 8. Text-book: Muir, A Short History of the British Commonwealth, Vol. I. A preliminary essay counting 10 per cent, of the year's work must be handed in as soon as possible after the opening of the autumn term. Subject: The Chief Contributions of the Normans to the Development of the English people, or Feudalism in England, or The Rise of the English Towns. Three hours a week. Mr. Sage.> 3 units. Third and Fourth Years History 4, 5 and 6 are intended especially for Third Year students, History 7 and 8 for Fourth Year. History 4 (or 5) must be taken by all candidates for Honours. All Honour students (whether in History alone or in a Combination Course) must take a History Seminar of one hour a week in either their Third or their Fourth Year. The Seminar is intended as training in intensive work and carries no credits. If the Graduating Essay be written in History, it will carry a value of 3 units. 4. Mediaeval History.—A sketch of Mediaeval History from the Council of Nicaea to the Fall of Constantinople, 325-1453 A.D. The following subjects will be treated: the triumph of Christianity; the breakdown of the Western Roman Empire; the Barbarian Invasions; the earlier monastic movements; Mohammed and Islam; the rise of the Papacy; the Franks and Charlemagne; the struggle between Empire and Papacy; the Normans in Europe; the Crusades; the Mediaeval Towns; the later monastic movements; the rise of the universities; Frederick II; the later Mediaeval Empire; the National Kingdoms in France, Spain, England and Scotland; the Turks and the collapse of the Byzantine Empire. 120 Faculty op Arts and Science Text-book: Thorndike, A History of Mediaeval Europe, Houghton Mifflin. Additional text-books for Honour students: Oman, The Dark Ages. Tout, Empire and Papacy. Lodge, The Close of the Middle Ages. Bryce, The Holy Roman Empire. A preliminary essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in as soon as possible after the opening of the autumn term. Subject: The Causes of the Downfall of the Western Roman Empire, or St. Benedict and Western Monasticism, or The Rise of the Frankish Empire. Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units. 5. Renaissance and Reformation.—Mediaeval civilization in the time of Dante; the forerunners of the Renaissance; the Renaissance in Italy (illustrated with slides); the Protestant Reformation and the Catholic Reaction; in conclusion, a short account of the subsequent history of religious thought down to our own times. An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject: The Nature of the Universe and of Man in Mediaeval Thought, or The Rise of the Critical Spirit 1200-1520 or The Beginning of National Literature. Text-books: W. H. Hudson, The Story of the Renaissance. Fisher, The Reformation. McGiffert, Martin Luther. Additional reading, especially for Honour students: Sichel, The Renaissance. Taylor, Some Aspects of the Renaissance. Symonds, A Short History of the Renaissance in Italy. Symonds, The Renaissance in Italy. Burckhardt, The Renaissance in Italy, Andre Michel, Histoire de I'Art (III, IV). Christopher Hare, Life and Letters in the Italian Renaissance. Preserved Smith, Erasmus. Emerton, Erasmus. Allen, The Age of Erasmus. Three hours a week. Not given 1927-28. 3 units. 6. The Age of Louis XIV, the Pre-Revolution, the Revolution and Napoleon. Historv 121 The break-up of the medieval system, the evolution of modern intellectual and material conditions, and the effect of the revolutionary spirit. An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject: The Rise of the Middle Class Before 1643. Social Standards and Customs in the Reign of Louis XIV. Text-books: Lowell, The Eve of the French Revolution. Shailer Matthews, The French Revolution. Johnston, Napoleon. Additional reading required of Honour students: Taine, L'ancien regime (abridged), Heath. Aulard, The French Revolution. Lacour-Gayet, Napoleon, or Rose, Napoleon. Fisher, Bonapartism. Tilley, Modern France. Abbott, Expansion of Europe. Three hours a week. Mr. Keenleyside. 3 units. 7. Europe, 1815-1919.—The political, social and economic history of the chief countries of continental Europe, with especial attention to international relations. Intended for Fourth Year students. An introductory essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn term. Subject: Geographic Factors in the European History of the 19th Century, or The Growth of Internationalism, 1815-1914. Text-book: Hazen, Europe Since 1815. Additional reading required of Honour students: Gooch, History of Modern Europe, 1878-1919. Fueter, World History, 1815-1920. Moon, Imperialism and World Politics. Reading and reference: Cambridge Modern History. Lavisse et Rambaud, Histoire Generate. Moon, Syllabus of International Relations. Buell, International Relations. Tilley, France. Mowat, A History of European Diplomacy, 1815-1914. Rambaud, Histoire de la Civilization Francaise. Grant Robertson, Bismarck. Thayer, Cavour. Fairgrieve, Geography and World Poiver. Marvin, Century of Hope and The Unity Series. Gooch, Germany. Makeef, Russia. Huddleston, France. Toynbee, Turney. Toynbee, The Balkans. Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units. 122 Faculty op Arts and Science 8. Great Britain Since 1688. The British Empire — This course aims at an interpretation of the constitutional, political, economic and religious development of the British Isles since the Revolution of 1688. Attention will also be paid to the growth of the British Empire during the eighteenth, nineteenth and twentieth centuries. This course is the sequel to History 3. Text-book: Muir, Short History of the British Commonwealth, Vol. II. Additional reading required of Honour students: Grant Robertson, England under the Hanoverians. Slater, The Making of Modern England. Trevelyan, British History in the Nineteenth Century. For reading and reference: Cambridge History of British Foreign Policy. Poole and Hunt, The Political History of England (Vols. VIII-XII). Cambridge Modern History (Vols. V-XII). Toynbee, The Industrial Revolution. Egerton, A Short History of British Colonial Policy. Basil Williams, Life of Chatham. Morley, Life of Gladstone. Moneypenny and Buckle, Life of Disraeli. Howard Robinson, The Development of the British Empire. A preliminary essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's Work, must be handed in early in the autumn. Subject: Sir Robert' Walpole, or The Irish Question in the Eighteenth Century, or The Social Effects of the Industrial Revolution. Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. ' 3 units. 9. History of the United States of America.—This course begins with a sketch of the American colonies at the outbreak of the Revolution and traces the history of the United States from the commencement of the War of Independence to the close of the World War. Text-book: Muzzey, The United States of America, Ginn. Additional reading required for Honour students: Dealey, Foreign Policies of the United States, Ginn. Malin, Interpretations of Recent American History, Century. An essay, counting 15 per cent, of the year's work, must be handed in early in the autumn. Subject: Washington and Ma r hematics 123 Jackson, A Comparison and Contrast, or The Growth of Nationalism in the United States, 1776-1826. Mr. Soward. 3 units. 10. An Outline of the Social History of the Western World.—The origin of man, pre-literary history, and a discussion of those social developments which have contributed most to the evolution of modern society in the western world. The course will include such topics as inventions, forms of social groupings, changing standards of conduct, the results of exploration, and the development of modern industry and thought. An introductory essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's work must be handed in early in the fall term. Subject: Egyptian Religion, Life Among the Cromagnons, Babylonian Commerce. \ " Text-books: Barnes, An Outline of the Social History of the Western World. Breasted, Ancient Times. Abbott, The Expansion of Europe. Additional reading required of Honour students: Dickinson, The Greek View of Life. Boas, The Mind of Primitive Man. Fowler, Rome. Cheney, Industrial and Social History of England. Assigned readings. Three hours a week. Mr. Keenleyside. 3 units. Honour Seminar, 1927-28, to be chosen from (a) "The Origins of the World War," Mr. Soward. (b) "Problems of the Pacific," Mr. Sage, (c) "Historical Method," Mr. Keenleyside. (d) "The Writing of History," Mr. Soward. (e) "The History of British Columbia," Mr. Sage. Department of Mathematics Professor: Daniel Buchanan. Professor: F. S. Nowlan. Associate Professor: G. E. Robinson. Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan. Assistant Professor: L. Richardson. Assistant Professor: B. S. Hartley. Assistant: Walter H. Gage. Assistant: May L. Barclay. Assistant: C. Islay Johnston. Assistant: A. P. Mellish. 124 Faculty op Arts and Science Courses 2, 3, and 4 are open to students who have completed Course 1. Pass Courses 1. (a) Algebra. — An elementary course, including ratio, proportion, variation, interest and annuities, solutions of equations, simple series, permutations, combinations, and the binomial theorem. Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra, Chapters I to XV, Oxford. Three hours a week. First Term. (») Geometry. — An elementary course in synthetic and analytical geometry as outlined for Senior Matriculation. Text to be announced. Two hours a week. Second Term. (c) Trigonometry. — An elementary course involving the use of logarithms. Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp Clark. Wentworth and Hill, Tables (Ginn). One hour a week, First Term, and two hours a week, Second Term. 3 units. 2. (a) Analytical Geometry.—A review of the straight line and circle, and a study of the other conies. Fawdry, Co-ordinate Geometry, Bell. Two hours a week. First Term. Mr. Buchanan. (b) Algebra. — A continuation of the previous course in algebra involving exponential, logarithmic and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial and continued fractions. Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra (Larger Edition), Oxford. Two hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Nowlan and Mr. Robinson. (c) Calculus.—An introductory course in differential and integral calculus, with various applications. Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn. One hour a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units. Mathematics 125 3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments.—This course deals with the theory of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation of bonds, sinking funds, depreciation, probability and its application to life insurance. Rietz, Crathorne and Rietz, Mathematics of Finance, Holt. Three hours a week. Mr. Robinson. 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 4. Descriptive Astronomy.—The object of this course is to acquaint the student with the various heavenly bodies and their motions. It is intended primarily for Pass students, and only a knowledge of elementary mathematics is essential. The subject- matter treated includes: The shape and motions of the earth, systems of coordinates, the constellations, planetary motion, gravitation, tides, time, the stars and nebulae, theories of evolution of the solar system. Moulton, Introduction to Astronomy, Macmillan. Two hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 2 units. Students desiring credit for an additional unit in connection with this course may register for Mathematics 18. They will be required to write essays on prescribed subjects dealing with various phases of Astronomy. 1 unit. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) Honour Courses 10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications of the subject. - Text to be announced. Three hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 3 units. 11. Plane and Spherical Trigonometry.—The work in plane trigonometry will deal with the following: Identities and trigonometrical equations, the solution of triangles with various applications, circumscribed, inscribed and escribed circles, De Moivre's theorem, expansions of sin nq, etc., hyperbolic and inverse functions. The work in spherical trigonometry will cover the solution of triangles with various applications to astronomy and geodesy. 126 Faculty op Arts and Science Loney, Plane Trigonometry, Parts I and II. Dupuis and Matheson, Spherical Trigonometry and Astronomy, Uglow. Two hours a week. Mr. Richardson. 2 units. 12. Synthetic Plane and Solid Geometry.—The course in plane geometry is intended to cover such topics as the principle of duality, cross ratio geometry, etc. In solid geometry the principal properties of solid figures are studied, as well as the theory of projection in space, with various applications to the conic sections. Dupuis, Elementary Synthetic Geometry, Macmillan. Dupuis, Elements of Synthetic Solid Geometry, Macmillan. Two hours a week. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 13. Analytical Geometry.—A general study of the conies and systems of conies, and elementary work in three dimensions. Loney, Co-ordinate Geometry. Two hours a week. Mr. Jordan. 2 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 14. Theory of Equations and Determinants. — A course covering the main theory and use of these subjects. Burnside and Panton, Theory of Equations, Vol. I, Dublin. Weld, Theory of Determinants. Two hours a week. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 15. Higher Algebra. — Selected topics in higher algebra, including infinite series, continued fractions, the theory of numbers, probability. Hall and Knight, Hiqher Algebra, Macmillan. Chrystal, Text-book of Algebra. Part II. Two hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 2 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 16. Calculus and Differential Equations.—A continuation of the previous course in calculus, treating partial differentiation, Mathematics 127 expansions of functions of many variables, singular points, reduction formulae, successive integration, elliptic integrals, and Fourier series. Ordinary and partial differential equations, with various applications to geometry, mechanics and physics. Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn. Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans. Three hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units. 17. Applied Mathematics. — A course dealing with the applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body, and to the two body problem in celestial mechanics. Loney, Theoretical Mechanics. Three hours a week. Mr. Richardson. 3 units. 18. History of Mathematics.—A reading course covering the historical development of the elementary branches of mathematics from the earliest times to the present. Ball, History of Mathematics. Cajori, History of Elementary Mathematics. Mr. Buchanan. 1 unit. Graduate Courses 20. Analytical Solid Geometry.—Snyder and Sisam, Analytical Geometry of Space. 21. Theory of Functions of a Real Variable. — Goursat- Hedrick, Mathematical Analysis, Vol. I. 22. Theory of Functions of a Complex Variable.—Pierpont, Functions of a Complex Variable. 23. Differential Geometry.—Eisenhart, Differential Geometry. 24. Projective Geometry.—Veblen and Young, Projective Geometry, Vol. I. 25. Celestial Mechanics.—Moulton, An Introduction to Celestial Mechanics. 26. Advanced Differential Equations. — Moulton, Periodic Orbits. 27. Theory of Numbers.—Carmichael, Theory of Numbers. 128 Faculty op Arts and Science 28. Algebraic Numbers.—Reid, Elements of the Theory of Algebraic Numbers. 29. Modern Algebraic Theories. — Dickson, Modern Algebraic Theories. Department of Modern Languages Professor: H. Ashton. Associate Professor: A. F. B. Clark. Assistant Professor: Isabel Maclnnes. Assistant Professor: Henri Chodat. Instructor: Janet T. Greig. . Assistant: E. E. Delavault. I Assistant: G. Barry. Assistant: M. Portsmouth. Assistant: W. Tipping.^ Assistant in German: J. Battle. With the consent of the Professor in charge of the course, a student taking a Pass Degree may be admitted to any course in the Third and Fourth Years in addition to, but not in lieu of, 3(a) and 4(a). Students from other universities who have already taken the work of 3(a) or 4(a), may be given special permission by the Head of the Department to substitute other courses. French 1. (a) Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules, Longmans, Toronto. Berthon, Grammaire Frangaise. Clement and Macirone, Void la France, Heath. Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1. 3 units. 1. (b) Prescribed texts as for 1(a). Revision of the essentials of French grammar and syntax applied to the correct writing of French. There will be an oral examination based on the texts read. 3 units. Note :—Students who choose French will be informed which course 1(a) or 1(&) they must take. The decision will be made after a consideration of the marks in French obtained at the Modern Languages 129 Matriculation examination. Students in 1(b) will normally take not more than two years French, as they will not be sufficiently prepared to profit by the Third and Fourth Year courses. If, however, they make rapid progress in the First Year they may be transferred to the higher course in the Second Year when they have satisfied the examiners of their fitness for more advanced work. Students who have not passed the Matriculation examination in French (or its equivalent) are not allowed to take either of the First Year courses in this subject. 1. (c) Lectures in French on Literature for students who intend to take French throughout the four years. One hour a week; no credit, no examination. Summer Reading:—See the announcement after the Fourth Year courses. 2. (a) La Fontaine, One Hundred Fables, Ginn. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes, Didier. France, Le Livre de Mon Ami, Oxford. Conversation in French on the above. Written resumes. Composition from Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1. 3 units. There will be oral tests. 2. (b) Texts as above. 3 units. 2. (c) Lectures in French on Literature for students who intend to take French throughout the four years. One hour a week; no credits, no examination. Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth Year Courses. 3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period, and on the development of the literature. Careful reading and discussion of the following texts: Racine, Athalie (Warren), Holt. Moliere, Le Misanthrope, Didier; Le Tartuffe, Heath. Schinz and King, Seventeenth Century French Readings, Holt. Conversation and written resumes based on the above. This course is obligatory for all students taking Third Year French. 3 units. 130 Faculty of Arts and Science 3. (b) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—Lectures on the history and social conditions of the period, with special emphasis on the philosophe movement, and the beginnings of romanticism. The inter-relations of French and English thought and literature will be touched upon. Careful reading and discussion of the following texts: Selections from Voltaire (Havens), Century Co. Rousseau, Morceaux choisis (Mornet), Didier. Diderot, Extraits (Fallex), Delagrave. Beaumarchais, Le Barbier de Seville, Macmillan. 3 units. 3. (c) French Composition and translation from English into French. Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 2. 3 units. Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth Year Courses. 4. (a) The Romantic Drama.—Musset, Quatre Comedies, Oxford. Hugo, Hernani, Oxford. Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac. 3 units. 4. (6) Literature and Society in the XVllth Century.— Mme de La Fayette, La Princesse de Cleves (Cambridge); La Bruyere, Les Caracteres (Cambridge) ; Mme de Sevigne, Lettres (Manchester); Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules (Longman), Les Femmes Savantes (Hatier), L'Avare (Hatier), Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme (Hatier). 3 units. 4. (c) Bibliography, Composition and Oral French.—Book required: Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 3. 3 units. 4. (d) Eighteenth Century Drama.—Lesage, Turcaret, Cambridge; Marivaux, Le jeu de Vamour et du hasard, Hatier, Paris (Les classiques pour tous); Regnard, Le joueur, Hatier, Paris; Sedaine, Le Philosophe sans le savoir, Hachette, London. 3 units. Notes—Courses 3 (a) (b) (c) and 4 (a) (b) (c) (d) call for much work out of class. They should be chosen only by students able and willing to work alone. Students intending to take 4(a) or 4(b) should apply to the Head of the Department before the end of the present academic year for instructions for summer reading. Modern Languages 131 Summer Reading Upon entering the courses for the years stated below the student must satisfy the instructor that he has read the books mentioned below. Second Year: 1. Bernardin de St Pierre, Paul et Virginie. 2. Balzac, Eugenie Grandet. 3. Saintine, Picciola; or Vigny, Poesies Choisies. Third Year: 1. Chateaubriand, Atala. 2. Le Sage, Gil Bias. 3. Vigny, Servitude et grandeur militaires. 4. Banville, Gringoire; or Musset,, Poesies Choisies. Fourth Year: 1. Moliere, L'Avare. 2. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme. 3. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes. 4. Racine, Andromaque. 5. Racine, Les Plaideurs. 6. Musset, Fantasio. 7. Musset, Un Caprice. The above have all been chosen from the series Les Classiques pour tous so as to lighten the cost of buying books for vacation reading. At the present rate of exchange they can be bought at the University Bookstore for ten or fifteen cents each. As these books can be carried in the pocket and read at odd moments no excuse will be accepted for failure to do summer reading. German A. Beginners' Course. Composition, Grammar, Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger, Heath. (b) Haertel, German Reader for Beginners. 3 units. B. Beginners' Course (Scientific) Composition, Grammar, Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger, Heath, (b) Gore, German Science Reader, Heath. 3 units. 132 Faculty op Arts and Science 1. Completion and Revision of Zinnecker. Composition and conversation based on texts read. Von Wildenbruch, Das edle Blut, Scribner. Moser, Der Bibliothekar, Ginn. Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath. Science Section with alternate reading. 3 units. 2. (a) Whitney and Stroebe, Easy German Com/position. Holt, Composition and conversation based on texts read. Heine, Die Harzreise, Allyn & Bacon. Lessing, Minna von BarnJielm, Heath. Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath. 3 units. 2. (b) A general survey of German literature. Prerequisite for German 3: Lectures in English and open to students of other literatures. One hour a week. No credit. 3. The Classical Period. Texts: Lessing, Emilia Galotti, Heath. Goethe, Fatist I, Heath. Schiller, Die Tangfrau van Orleans, Holt. Composition based on above texts and Whitney and Stroebe, German Composition, Holt. 3 units. 4. (a) Nineteenth Century Drama. 3 units. 4. (b) Nineteenth Century Fiction. 3 units. These courses, which include the reading of a number of standard works, will be given alternately. 5. A reading course in the short story. 3 units. Department of Philosophy Professor: H. T. J. Coleman. Associate Professor: James Henderson. Assistant Professor of Psychology and Education: Jennie Benson Wyman. 1. (a) Elementary Psychology. Text-book: Warren, Elements of Human Psychology, Houghton Mifflin Co. Philosophy 133 References: Woodworth, Psychology, A Study of Mental Life. Stout, A Manual of Psychology. Titchener, A Text-book in Psychology; A Beginner's Psychology. James, Psychology (Briefer Course). Pillsbury, Essentials of Psychology. Two hours a week. 2 units. (b) Elementary Logic. Text-book: Mellone, Introductory Text-book of Logic, Blackwood (latest edition). One hour a week. 1 unit. (c) A fourth hour per week will be devoted to lectures introductory to the main problems of Philosophy, and a special study of Descartes' Discourse on Method and Berkeley's Treatise Concerning the Principles of Human Knowledge. Attendance at this hour is voluntary and no formal credit is given. Students contemplating Honours are, however, advised to take this course. 2. Ethics. Text-book: Everett, Moral Values, Holt. A special study will be made of selected portions of Aristotle's Ethics, Mill's Utilitarianism, and Kant's Metaphysic of Morals. Three hours a week. 3 units. 3. History of Greek Philosophy from Tholes to Plato (inclusive). Text-books: Bakewell, Source Book in Ancient Philosophy, Charles Scribner's Sons, and Burnet, Greek Philosophy (Part 1), Macmillan. In connection with this course a special study will be made of Plato's Republic, Phaedo, and PhUebus. Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 4. The History of Philosophy from the Renaissance to the Present time. Text-book: Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy, Macmillan. Works of Reference: Rand, Modern Classical Philosophers, and the various Histories of Philosophy. Three hours a week. 3 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 134 Faculty op Arts and Science 5. The Philosophy of Kant, with special study of the Critique of Pure Reason. Two hours a week. 2 units. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) 6. Philosophic Movements since the time of Kant. Post- Kantian Idealism, Pragmatism, Modern Realism, Bergson and others. Two hours a week. 2 units. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 7. Introduction to Education. A course of lectures and discussions dealing with educational movements since the beginning of the 19th century, and with the theories of life and of mind which are implicit in these movements. Texts: Spencer, Education, Everyman Edition. Dewey, Democracy and Education, Macmillan. References: Butler, The Meaning of Education. Moore, What is Education? Adams (ed.), The New Teaching. Holmes, What is and What might be. Articles in Cyclopedia of Education, Macmillan. Philosophy 1 is recommended as preparatory to this course. Three hours a week. 3 units. 8. Social Psychology. — A study of those particular phases of mental life and development which are fundamental in social organization and activity. Texts: McDougall, Social Psychology, The Group Mind, Methuen, London. Ginsberg, Psychology of Society, Methuen, London. Collateral reading will be prescribed from the following : Hobhouse, Mind in Evolution, Morals in Evolution. Sutherland, Origin and Growth of the Moral Instinct. Cooley, Human Nature and the Social Order. Wallas, Human Nature in Politics; The Great Society. Ross, Social Psychology. Trotter, Instincts of the Herd in Peace and War. Bernard, Introduction to Social Psychology. Philosophy 1 is recommended as preparatory to this course. Three hours a week. 3 units. Physics 135 Students will note that Courses 3 and 4, and Courses 5 and 6 are given in alternate years. This arrangement is designed to meet the needs of students who desire to pursue the study of philosophy beyond the elementary stage. Department of Physics Professor: T. C. Hebb. Associate Professor: A. E. Hennings. Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson. Assistant Professor: G. M. Shrum. Assistant: D. F. Stedman. 1. Introduction to Physics.—A general study of the principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound, and electricity, both in the lecture-room and in the laboratory. The course has two objects: (1) To give the minimum acquaintance with physical science requisite for a liberal education to those whose studies will be mainly literary; (2) to be introductory to the courses in Chemistry, Engineering, and Advanced Physics. Students must reach the required standard in both theoretical and practical work. Text-book: Millikan, Gale and Pyle, Practical Physics. Three lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. College Physics.—This course consists of a general course in Physics suitable for those students who have taken the two years of Physics given in the High School. It will cover mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound and electricity, in a fuller manner than would be possible in an introductory course. Text-book: Stewart, Physics, a Text-book for Colleges. Prerequisite: High School Physics. Three lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 3. Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat.—A study of the statics and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body, the laws of gases and vapors, temperature, hygrometry, capillarity, expansion, and calorimetry. 136 Faculty op Arts and Science Text-book: Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat. Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units 4. Electricity, Sound, and Light. — A study of the fundamentals of magnetism, electricity, sound, and light. Text-book: Millikan and Mills, Electricity, Sound and Light. Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 5. Dynamics of a Particle and of a Rigid Body.—A rigorous mathematical study of this subject. Prerequisites: Physics 3 and Mathematics 10. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 6. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism. — In this course, .especial attention is given to the theoretical phases of Electricity and Magnetism. Text-book: Starling, Electricity and Magnetism. Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4 and Mathematics 10. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 7. Kinetic Theory of Gases and Introduction to Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures elucidating the fundamentals of these subjects. Books for reference: Poynting and Thomson, Heat. Boyn- ton, Kinetic Theory of Gases. Preston, Heat, and Meyer, ■Kinetic Theory of Gases. Prerequisites: Physics 3, and Mathematics 10. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 8. Theoretical and Experimental Optics.—A course of lectures accompanied by laboratory work consisting of accurate measurements in diffraction, dispersion, interference, and polarization. Books for reference: Houstoun, Treatise on Light. Mann, Advanced Optics. Wood, Physical Optics. Preston, Theory of Light. Drude, Theory of Optics, and Edser, Light for Students. Zoology 137 Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4, and Mathematics 10. Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 9. Recent Advances in Physics.—A course of lectures dealing with the electrical properties of gases, the electron theory, and radioactivity. Books for reference: Thomson, Conduction of Electricity through Gases. Rutherford, Radio-active Substances and Their Radiations. Millikan, Electron. Thomson, Positive Rays. Hughes, Photo-electricity, and Kaye, X-Rays. Prerequisites: Courses 3 and 4, and Differential and Integral Calculus. Two lectures per week. 2 units. 10. Advanced Experimental Physics. — In this course the candidate for Honours is expected to perform one or more classical experiments and to do some special work. Carefully prepared reports, abstracts, and bibliographies will constitute an essential part of the course. Six hours laboratory per week. 3 to 6 units. Department of Zoology Professor: C. McLean Fraser. Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer. Instructor: Gertrude M. Smith. Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell. Note—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology. 1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals. Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups. Comparative life-histories. Text-books: Parker and Haswell, Manual of Zoology, Macmillan. (American Edition, 1916.) This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units. 2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the classes of Vertebrates. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First Term. 2 units. 138 Faculty of Arts and Science 3. Comparative Anatomy of Invertebrates. — A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the main classes of Invertebrates. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 2 units. 4. Morphology of Insects.—General Entomology. Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First Term. 2 units. (Not given in 1927-28.) 5. Histology.—Study of the structure and development of animal tissues. Methods in histology. Seven hours per week. Second Term. 2 units. 6. Embryology.—A general survey of the principles of vertebrate embryology. Preparation and examination of em- bryological sections. Seven hours per week. First Term. 2 units. 7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the insect pests of animals and plants; means of combating them. Lecture and laboratory work, six hours per week. Second Term. 2 units. (Not given in 1927-28.) 8. Private Reading. — A course of reading on Biological theories. In this course examinations will be set, but no class instruction will be given. 2 units. THE CU FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE FOREWORD The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train Btudents in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a sound knowledge of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural forces and natural products for the benefit of man and the advancement of civilization. Experience shows that such a training is the best yet devised for a large and increasing proportion of the administrative, supervisory and technical positions. ^ J The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers or industrial leaders—these are the product of years of development in the school of experience—, but young men with a special capacity and training for attaining these goals, and thus for helping to develop the industries of the province. Consequently the undergraduate course is made broad and general rather than narrow and highly specialized. Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to the British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in his after life, but also better for later specialization, for it furnishes a more solid foundation, a better background, a broader outlook and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary if the specialist is to achieve the maximum results of which he is capable. The student is offered a full undergraduate course and an additional year of graduate study. The preliminary year required in Arts is intended to increase the student's general knowledge and to broaden his outlook. It is hoped that enough interest will be aroused to encourage the student to continue some study of the humanities as a hobby or recreation. The first two years in Applied Science proper are spent in a general course that includes Mathematics and all the basic sciences. This gives not only a broad training, but enables the student to discover the work for which he has special liking or 142 Faculty op Applied Science aptitude and to select more intelligently the subjects in which to specialize during the two final years at college. During the latter periods students acquire more detailed knowledge and get practice in applying scientific knowledge, in solving problems, in doing things; and there is also training in Economics, Law and Industrial Management. During the long period between sessions, the student is required to engage in some industrial or professional work that will afford practical experience not obtainable in the laboratory or field classes, but that is a necessary supplement to academic study. FACILITIES FOR WORK For laboratory and other facilities see Pages 24-35. ADMISSION The general requirements for admission to the University are given on pages 38, 39. The following are special conditions affecting admission to Applied Science: 1. Nursing and Health courses require Junior Matriculation or equivalent (as for Arts). 2. All other courses require: (a) Junior Matriculation or equivalent. (b) Also a First Year Arts course or equivalent,* which shall include the following subjects: Chemistry 1; Mathematics 1 (Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry); Physics 1, or 2; English 1; Latin 1, or French 1, or German B. The passing grade is fifty per cent, for Chemistry, Physics and each of the Mathematics subjects; but in the others a pass of , forty per cent, will be accepted, provided an average of fifty per cent, has been obtained in the total. Biology 1 may be taken as an optional extra subject, and, if passed with a grade of at least fifty per cent., need not be taken in Applied Science. Economics 1 taken in Arts is accepted in lieu of Economics in Applied Science. A reading knowledge of French and German is desirable for students in Engineering. Information for Students in Applied Science 143 3. No student may enter with any outstanding supplemental in Junior Matriculation or in any of the Chemistry, Mathematics or Physics subjects listed above; or with supplementals in other subjects to the extent of more than three units*. Students who have failed to complete the above requirements may apply for permission to take the September supplemental examinations in Arts. "Students preparing for admission to Applied Science are recommended to take their First Year in Arts and Science rather than Senior Matriculation, but if such students proceed by way of Senior Matriculation they must take Chemistry and Physics, and are required to make 50 per cent, in each of these two subjects and also in Algebra, Geometry and Trigonometry. DEGREES The degrees offered students in this Faculty are: Bachelor of Applied Science (B.A.Sc). (See below.) Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc). (See Page 170.) COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc. The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted on the completion of the work in one of the courses! given below: I. Chemical Engineering. II. Chemistry. III. Civil Engineering. IV. Electrical Engineering. V. Forest Engineering. VI. Geological Engineering. VII. Mechanical Engineering. VIII. Metallurgical Engineering. IX. Mining Engineering. X. Nursing and Health. *A unit normally consists of one lecture hour, or one continuous laboratory period of not less than two or more than three hours, per week throughout the session; or two lecture hours or equivalent laboratory periods throughout a single term. +The curriculum described in the following pages may be changed from time to time as deemed advisable by the Faculty. 144 Faculty of Applied Science A double course in Arts and Science and in Applied Science is offered, leading to the degree of B.A., and B.A.Sc. (See Page 170.) Note,:—A series of noon-hour talks is given during the session by the Faculty and prominent outsiders on the subjects: choice of a profession; occupations for which an Applied Science course forms a suitable preparation; life and work in different engineering professions and industries. The purpose of these talks is to assist students to select the course best suited to their tastes and aptitudes, and their probable life-work. PRACTICAL WORK OUTSIDE THE UNIVERSITY In order to master professional subjects it is very important that the work done at the University should be supplemented by practical experience in related work outside. Therefore students are expected to spend their summers in employment that will give such experience. Before a degree will be granted, a candidate is required to satisfy the Department concerned that he has done at least four months' practical work related to his chosen profession. Third and Fourth Year Essays (see Page 146) should be based, as far as possible, upon the summer work. Students engaged in summer work requiring them to enter the University after the specified date of admission will be allowed to register without penalty, upon the approval of the Dean, in case the work affords necessary experience in connection with their academic courses, as in Geological survey parties; or if statements are received from their employers that circumstances prevent an earlier release. Practical work such as Shop-work, Freehand Drawing, Mechanical Drawing, Surveying, etc., done outside the University, may be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field work (but not in lieu of lectures) in these subjects, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department and approval of the Dean. Students seeking exemption as above must make written application to the Dean accompanied by certificates indicating the character of the work done and the time devoted to it. Courses in Applied Science 145 GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES The work of the First and Second Years' is the same in all courses, except those in Nursing and Health. First Year Subject. Math. 1 Trigonometry Math. 2 Solid Geometry Math. 3 Algebra Math. 4 Calculus CE. 1 Descriptive Geom. .. M.E. 1 Drawing 1 Physics 1 Mechanics Physics 2 Heat Chem. 2a Qual. Analysis ... M.E. 2a Shop Practice Biology 1* Introductory.... C.E. 2 Surveying CE. 30 Engineering Prob. 1 201 201 201 201 180 202 218 218 178 202 174 181 190 First Term. ill Second Term. KM gs ■3 s ge S 3« Field Work I 4 1.. 3 6 3 3 2 2 •Biology 1, Arts, passed with a grade of at least 60 per cent, will be accepted in lieu of this course. Second Year Subject. « 8f a s- 8 8 fa » Math. 6 Calculus Math. 7 Anal. Geom •Chem. 2b Quan. Analysis C.E. 4 Graphics M.E. 6a Elem. Theory Physics 3 Electricity Physics 4 Mechanics CE. 5 Mapping CE. 6 Surveying Geology 1 General tCE. 7 Surveying CE. 81 Engineering Prob. 2. 201 202 178 181 204 219 219 182 182 196 182 190 First Term. III Second Term. Field Work 13 1.. IK in fStudents entering Civil, Forest, Geological, Metallurgical, and Mining Engineering are required to take Civil Engineering 7 (see Page 182) immediately after the spring examinations. •Students entering the Second Year of Applied Science who have not previously taken Chemistry 2 (a) will be required to take Chemistry 2 (a) and 2 (b) during the Second Year; such students will be exempted from taking Civil Engineering 31. 146 Faculty op Applied Science THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS Essays Essays are required of all students entering the Third and Fourth Years, and must conform to the following:— 1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words. 2. It must be a technical description of the engineering aspects of the work on which the student was engaged during the summer, or of any scientific or engineering work with which he is familiar. In the preparation of the essay, advantage may be taken of any source of information, but due acknowledgment must be made of all authorities consulted. It should be suitably illustrated by drawings, sketches, photographs or specimens. 3. It must be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of substantial quality, standard letter size (8V2XII inches), on one side of the paper only, leaving a clear margin on top and left-hand side. Students are recommended to examine sample reports to be found in the library or in the departments. 4. All essays must be handed in to the Dean not later than November 15th. All essays, when handed in, become the property of the Department concerned, and are filed for reference. Students may submit duplicate copies of their essays in competition for the students' prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or the Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations. A maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being based on presentation, English and matter. In third year essays presentation, that is, the manner in which the material is arranged and presented to the reader, is given most weight, with English second and matter third. In fourth year essays most emphasis is placed on matter, but the other two are still rated highly. Courses in Applied Science 147 COURSES I. Chemical Engineering The course in Chemical Engineering should prepare the student for the duties of managing engineer in a chemical manufactory. As such he must be conversant not only with the chemical processes involved, but he must be prepared to design and to oversee the construction of new buildings and to direct the installation and use of machinery. In the industrial life of British Columbia the chemical engineer may be more particularly concerned with the manufacture of acids and alkalies, the preparation from natural sources of various organic and inorganic compounds, the pulp and paper industry, and the utilization of the waste from a number of industrial plants indigenous to the Province. Accordingly, the course of study includes a number of courses in the older branches of engineering along with the maximum of chemical training allowed by the time at the disposal of the student. Third Year Subject. 2 ** ft *> 0 * First Term. ■S 5* Second Term. at t. £53 §88 3a Essay Economics 1 Introductory Met. 1 Introductory Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy ,. Chem. 3 Organic Chem. 4 Theoretical Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis .. E.E. 1 General Physics 5 Light CE. 12 Hydraulics 146 191 215 197 178 179 179 207 219 184 148 Faculty op Applied Science Fourth Year Subject. First Term. a e £ Second Term. it I* Essay Chem. 6 Industrial ... Chem. 7 Physical Chem. 8 Electro Chem. 9 Adv. Organic Chem. 16 Engineering Met. 2 General Thesis 146 179 179 180 180 180 216 12 3 3 ii II. Chemistry The aim of this course is to train the students in the practice of Chemistry, and to give a thorough knowledge in the fundamental principles of this subject, that they may be prepared to assist in the solution of problems of value to the industrial and agricultural life of the Province. The course is arranged to give in the first two years a knowledge of the fundamental principles of Chemistry and Physics, with sufficient mathematics to enable the theoretical parts of the subject to be understood. In the Third Year, Analytical, Organic, and Physical Chemistry are studied from the scientific side and in relation to technology; while in the Fourth Year a considerable amount of time is devoted to a short piece of original work. Courses in Applied Science 149 Third Year Subject. First Term. It III Second Term. It Essay Econ. 1 Introductory . Chem. 3 Organic Chem. 4 Theoretical .. Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis MeL 1 Introductory .. Geol. 2 (a) Mineralogy Met. 5 Assaying German (Arts) B .... Physics 5 Light 146 191 178 179 179 215 197 216 131 219 3 3 9 Fourth Year Subject. ££ First Term. 1* £ « ¥ Second Term. ** ^M get i§* Essay Bacteriology 1 (Arts) Physics 9 Advanced .. Chem. 6 Industrial ... Chem. 7 Physical Chem. 8 Electro- Chem. 9 Adv. Organic Met. 2 General Thesis 146 83 219 179 179 180 180 216 3 3 is III. Civil Engineering The broad field covered by Civil Engineering makes it an adjunct of many other branches of engineering, yet the Civil 150 Faculty op Applied Science Engineer occupies a distinctive field and is intimately associated with a wide group of undertakings vitally affecting the health, comfort and prosperity of the commonwealth. The various branches of Civil Engineering deal with problems in.water supply and water purification; in sewerage systems, sewage disposal plants, and the handling of municipal and industrial wastes; in hydraulic power development; in irrigation and drainage for agricultural activities; in all types of structures, bridges and buildings, piers and docks, sea walls and protective works; in transportation, canals, locks, highways, electric and steam railways; and in the management and direction of public works, public utilities, industrial and commercial enterprises. The course in Civil Engineering is designed to provide, in so far as time will permit, foundations for continued growth along those lines which the student's interests and environment determine, without compelling too early specialization. Training in pure and applied science, in the humanities, in economics and business engineering, and in the technical phases of professional work establishes a broad basis for the stimulation of a sincere spirit of public service and for the development of that capacity for reliable work and judgment which makes safe the assumption of responsibilities. The methods of instruction are planned with the view of bringing out the powers and initiative of the students while training them in habits of accurate analysis and careful work. Students are encouraged to secure summer work which will give them an insight into the various phases of the career upon which they are about to enter, and the summer essays lay the foundation for the ability to set forth, in clear and precise language, descriptions and analyses of projects and engineering activities. In the Fourth Year thesis an opportunity is given for special investigation and research under the supervision of experienced engineers. Courses in Applied Science 151 Third Year Subject. o * O 4* fa M First Term. 9 v ge.8 3« Second Term. I* fa * 5^ §* Essay C.E. 8 Foundations CE. 9 Elementary Design CE. 10 Strength of Mtls.. CE.-11 Railways C.E. 12 Hydraulics CE. 13 Mapping C.E. 14 Surveying CE. 15 Drawing M.E. 6 (b) Laboratory E.E. 1 General Econ. 1* Introductory CE. 16 Surveying CE. 21 Water Power CE. 28 Seminar 146 182 183 183 184 184 184 184 185 205 207 191 185 186 189 Field Work *Economics 1 in Arts will be accepted in lieu of the Science Course. Fourth Year Subject. 3 ■■ Sfi First Term. Second Term. H 5&J JS u rt M oj f- 2 a> Essay CE. 17 C.E. 18 CE. 19 C.E. 20 C.E. 22 CE. 23 CE. 24 CE. C.E, C.E CE. CE. 25 27 Structural Design . Engineering Economics Law—Contracts .... Geodesy Municipal Transportation Mechanics of Mtls. . Theory of Structures . Trips Thesis Seminar Hydraulic Machines .. 146 185 185 186 186 187 188 188 189 189 189 189 190 3 6 Required 2 1 Sat. A M. 152 Faculty op Applied Science IV. Electrical Engineering This' course is designed for those students who desire a general training in the theory and practice of Electrical Engineering in addition to the basic principles of Mechanical Engineering. The Third Year of the course is devoted mainly to Mechanical Engineering, together with work which involves the broad principles which underlie all engineering work. The Fourth Year is devoted to Electrical Engineering, the fundamental principles of industrial economics, works organization, management, and financing. Vancouver and the surrounding country afford excellent facilities for the study of engineering works under commercial conditions. The managing officials of these works are pleased to permit students, in charge of a member of the Faculty, to inspect and conduct tests at pre-arranged times. Organized visits to industrial plants constitute a regular part of the advanced work. Third Year Subject. fa to Pint Term. I*- ■si* Second Term. I* 3 I ■§6* Essay M.E. 3 Kinematics M.E. 4 Dynamics M.E. 5 Design M.E. 7 Thermo-dynamics CE. 10 Str. of Materials E.E. 2 General CE. 12 Hydraulics M.E. 2b Shop Practice Math. 8 (adv. Calculus) or Math. 9 (Differential Equa.) 146 203 204 204 205 183 208 184 203 202 3 3 3 4 3 4 3 3 3 4 3 8 Courses m Applied Science 153 Fourth Year Subject. 3 5 First Term. 3* I in Second Term. I* It Essay E.E. 4 Machines E.E. 5 Traction E.E. 6 Transmission E.E. 7 Design E.E. 8 Radio M.E. 8 Thermo-dynamics M.E. 10 Design M.E. 14 Mechanical Design ... Math. 8 (adv. Calculus) or Math. 9 (Differential Equa.) CE. 18 Engr. Economics CE. 19 Engr. Law C.E. 29 Hydr. Machines 146 211 212 212 213 213 205 206 207 202 185 186 190 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 V. Forest Engineering In British Columbia the forest industries, including logging and the manufacture of lumber, pulp and paper, now lead all others, and are rapidly expanding. They must always play a very important part in the economy of the Province, because seven-eighths of the productive land is absolute forest soil, that will grow good timber but no other crop of value; and because over half the remaining stand of saw-timber — the last big reserve — of Canada is here. The development of these industries is requiring more and more the services of engineers, and especially is this true in logging. Furthermore, most of the forest land is owned by the public, and the management of these vast estates is a task that will require constant growth on the part of the government forest services. This indicates very briefly the various fields of service open to Forest Engineers, and for which the course of studies is designed. Primarily the course is planned for the lumber industry, and a major part of the time — apart from the preliminary foundation work — is devoted to the branches of 154 Faculty op Applied Science engineering most used in it. In addition, the fundamental subjects of forestry are covered. As in other engineering courses the students are expected to obtain practical experience during the summer vacations, this being an essential supplement to the studies at the University. Vancouver contains large sawmills, wood-working plants, and plants for seasoning and preserving wood — more, in fact, than any other place in the Province. Pulp mills, logging operations and extensive forests are within easy reach. The advantages of location are therefore exceptional. A special feature is the affiliation of the Forest Products Laboratory of Canada, maintained at the University by a co-operative arrangement with the Dominion Forestry Branch. A description of this Laboratory and its activities is given in another part of this calendar. It affords opportunities for instruction in testing the mechanical properties of timber and other structural materials, and facilities are now provided for experimental and demonstration work in wood seasoning and preserving. Third Year 2 ■■ •a a, o & S. o° First Term. Second Term. Subject. MM IS* •a c •J §, Z°-M ft M a bS ■§s* 146 191 192 192 192 174 176 207 182 182 183 183 184 184 184 1 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 4 2 2 2 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 i F.E. 1 General Forestry F.E. 2 Mensuration 4 F.E. 3 Protection F.E. 4 Finance CE. 8 Foundations 2 2 2 C.E. 10 Strength Materials ... C.E. 11 Railways 3 3 3 CE. 13 Mapping C.E. 14 Surveying CE. 12 Hydraulics 3 Courses in Applied Science 155 Fourth Year Subject. Essay F.E. 5 Technology . F.E. 6 Organization F.E. 7 History F.E. 8 Silviculture . F.E. 9 Lumbering . F.E. 10 Logging ... F.E. 11 Milling F.E. 12 Products .. Bot. 6 (b) Pathology ) Zool. 7 Entomology \ Bot. 7 (a) Ecology CE. 17 Structural Design C.E. 18 Economics C.E. 19 Law M.E. 6 (b) Steam Lab. ... 5* 146 192 193 193 193 194 194 194 195 177 224 177 185 185 186 205 First Term. J J Second Term. U 0) 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 3a. ■is* VI. Geological Engineering This course is designed to meet the requirements of students who intend to enter Geology as a profession. It gives a broad training not only in Geology, but also in the sciences of Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics, which are extensively applied in the solution of geological problems. The engineering subjects are useful not only to the Mining and Consulting Geologist and the Geological Surveyor, but to the Geologist engaged in original research in any branch of the science. The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the professions of Mineralogist, Geological Surveyor, Mining Geologist, Consulting Geologist, Palaeontologist, Geographer, etc., and is useful for those who will be in any way connected with the discovery or development of the natural resources of the country. As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory and field during the session, the student is expected to obtain practical experience during the summer vacations. 156 Faculty op Applied Science Third Year Subject. Q* First Term. Ste lis Second Term. It 111 Essay Geol. 2 Mineralogy ... Geol. 3 Historical GeoL 4 Structural Geol. 5 Regional Chem. 4 Theoretical .. Econ. 1 (Arts) Min. 1 Metal Mining .. Met. 5 Fire Assaying . Met. 1 General Ore Dressing 1 General ZooL 1 CE. 13 Mapping Chem. 5* Adv. Analysis Met. 6* Wet Assaying . 146 197 198 198 199 179 191 214 216 215 217 224 184 179 217 'Either Chem. 5 or Met 6 must be taken. Fourth Year Subject. ft* First Term. Second Term. 5* I* a* ft Essay GeoL 6 Palaeontology Geol. 7 Petrology GeoL 8 Economic CE. 18 Engr. Economics . Geol. 9 Mineralography .. GeoL 10 Field Min. 2 Coal and Placer ... Min. 3 Metal Mining Min. 5 Surveying Met. 2 Smelting Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory Thesis ". 146 199 199 200 185 200 200 214 214 215 216 217 2 4 1 2 3 9 2 3 2 9 4 1 9 3 Courses in Applied Science 157 VII. Mechanical Engineering As this branch of Engineering forms an outstanding feature in all industrial development, the course of training is general and basic in its character. Because of its general character it is not possible in the time available to give the student an intimate knowledge of the details of practice in any special line of work. The course is designed more particularly for those who are likely to take up the manufacture of machinery, power plant work (in- eluding design and construction of steam, gas, oil, or hydraulic plants), heating and ventilation of buildings, refrigeration, or industrial management. Students in this course are given a systematic course in the fundamentals of Electrical Engineering. Governed by the fact that values and costs are controlling factors in the practice of Engineering, the subjects of the final years are treated with a view of developing a business sense, an understanding of men, and the ability to report clearly on industrial problems. This demands the study of Economics, the use of good English, and the participation in outside industrial work during the vacation. Third Year As in Electrical Engineering. (See Page 152.) Fourth Year Subject. Essay M.E. 9 Thermodynamics M.E. 10 Design M.E. 11 Heating M.E. 12 Plant Design M.E. 13 Metals E.E. 3 Standard Practice CE. 18 Engr. Economics CE. 19 Engr. Law CE. 29 Hydraulic Mach Math. 8 (adv. Calculus) or Math. 9 (Differential Equa.) a« 146 205 206 206 206 206 209 185 186 190 202 First Term. It- Ill Second Term. in 3a 158 Faculty op Applied Science VIII.-IX. Metallurgical and Mining Engineering Modern Metallurgical practice covers a wide and expanding field. The Metallurgical Engineer has to design and operate a great variety of plants and processes. He must be able to deal with furnace and solution processes, based on chemical principles, and mechanical crushing and separating processes, based on physical principles, together with an immense variety of principal and auxiliary machinery, from small to immense, used in the separation and refining of ores, artificial mineral products and metals. The whole forms a keenly competitive and strictly commercial industry, based on, and closely limited by, the practical economic considerations of costs and profits. Rapid and continuous change and improvement is the rule. Methods and machines quickly become obsolete. The field for research and improvement in methods and machinery is ever widening, though the economic margin is ever narrowing. The Metallurgical course, in the Third and Fourth Years,, based on the fundamental earlier years, is designed to give the student a broad general knowledge of standard metallurgical methods and machinery, with a fundamental grasp of the actual applications of the basic sciences in practical metallurgical operations, also sufficient laboratory practice to illustrate and fix these in his mind and train him for an actual junior position after graduation. Modern mining operations cover a field notable for its breadth and variety. The discovery, steadily becoming more difficult, and the development, steadily becoming more scientific, of new mineral deposits are based largely on a knowledge of the laws and processes of Nature, ultimately physical and chemical, but, immediately, chiefly geological in kind. On the other hand, the operations of actual mining are largely mechanical in kind, and call for use and knowledge of mechanical and electrical equipment, adapted to underground methods and conditions. The conditions under which mining operations are carried on are often of great natural difficulty, and many of the factors to be dealt with are, to a large extent, obscure or indefinite Courses in Applied Science 159 * oftener than measureable. The qualities of good judgment and decision are therefore of great importance in the application of technical knowledge to mining. As in metallurgy, economic considerations are paramount. The Mining course is correspondingly broad in scope. In addition to the fundamental sciences, it includes fundamental subjects in Civil, Electrical and Mechanical Engineering, Economics and Economic Geology. The special mining subjects cover the underlying principles and practice on which the discovery, development and economic operation of mines are based, the practical application of technical knowledge to actual operations, and the use of judgment and decision, by precept, example and illustration. Sufficient practical training and laboratory work is included to fit the student for an actual junior position after graduation. "While not given as separate subjects, the social, administrative and ethical sides of the professions of Mining and Metallurgy are included in the general treatment of appropriate subjects. In this University, emphasis is naturally placed on British Columbia conditions and its chief mineral products, namely: Gold, Silver, Lead, Zinc, Copper, Coal and Coke. The University is conveniently located in proximity to coal and metal mining districts, large coal and metal mining operations being carried on within a few hours' journey, in connection with which there are large washing and ore concentration plants. There is a large metallurgical plant at Tacoma, within an easy day's journey. Students have little difficulty in obtaining positions in mines or smelters during their vacation, as several of the larger companies have established the practice of accepting student employees in reasonable numbers during the vacation months. Students are recommended to spend their vacations at practical works, in connection with Metallurgy or Mining, and are required to do so between the Third and Fourth Years as an essential part of their course, without which a degree will not be granted. An essay covering this work is also required, as specified in the Fourth Year curriculum. 160 Faculty op Applied Science Students are advised to become student members of the Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy. VIII. Metallurgical Engineering Third Year Subject. la First Term. o a 3a Second Term. 31 *2 2 * ,3 m Essay Econ. 1 CE. 9 Elem. Design ... CE. 10 Str. of Materials C.E. 12 Hydraulics C.E. 13 Mapping M.E. 6 (b) Laboratory . Geol. 2 Mineralogy E.E. 1 General Min. 1 Metal Mining ... Ore Dressing 1 General . Met. 1 General Met. 5 Fire Assay Met. 6 Wet Assay 146 191 183 183 184 184 205 197 207 214 217 215 216 217 Fourth Year 3 •■ •3 a 3 M First Term. Secpnd Term. Subject. mM H ■§a-J <u a; " a fa «) 3a GeoL 9 Mineralography .... C.E. 18 Engr. Economics ... 146 200 200 185 180 217 214 216 216 216 3 2 3 'a 2 2 2 1 3 9 6 *3 2 "s 2 2 2 1 Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory . Met. 4 Analysis 9 ie Courses in Applied Science 161 IX. Mining Engineering Third Year As in Metallurgical Engineering. (See Page 160.) Fourth Year 35 First Term. Secoiu Term. Subject. lis « u IgS 3a 28 1* ■SI £8 38 146 199 200 185 186 216 217 214 214 215 215 215 215 2 3 2 , 1 1 2 *2 2 2 1 4 1 9 3 2 3 2 1 2 '9 2 2 i GeoL 7 Petrology 4 Geol. 8 Economic 1 CE. 18 Engr. Economics C.E. 19 Engr. Law Met 2 Smelting Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory ... Min. 2 Coal and Placer Min. 3 Metal Mining 9 Min. 4 Machinery Min. 5 Surveying Min. 7 Methods Min. 6 Design 3 Short Courses in Mining The regular Short Courses in Mining for the Session of 1926-27 will commence the second Monday in January, 1927, and will continue for eight weeks. These courses include Mining, Smelting, Ore Concentration, Geology and Ore-deposits, Mineralogy and Rock Study, Fire Assaying, Chemistry, and Surveying. The courses are thoroughly practical in nature. They are not primarily intended for those who have had a technical training, but rather for those who have had practical experience in mining and prospecting, or are connected with the business of mining in any way. The courses are designed to give practical and technical knowledge, helpful in practical mining work and mining business. While they are short they are complete in themselves, and require no other preparation than a common-school education or ability to read and write. 162 Faculty op Applied Science Experience has shown that they fill a real need, and they have proved very successful in the past. As they do not form part of the regular University course, a special bulletin is issued, in which details of the courses and requirements for admission are given. Copies of this may be obtained on application to the Registrar of the University. These courses will not be given unless at least ten students register for them. X Nursing and Health 1. Nursing A.—A five-year undergraduate course. (See below.) 2. Nursing B.—A graduate course of one academic year in Public Health Nursing. (See Page 166.) 3. Nursing C.—A graduate course of one academic year in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. (See Page 167.) Registration for these courses will be subject to the general University Regulations. (See Pages 40 and 41) and to the special requirements of the Department. All regulations are subject to change from year to year, and subjects or courses may be modified during the year as the Faculty may deem advisable. Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course) This is a five-year combined course leading to the Degree of B.A.Sc. (Nursing) and to the diploma in nursing. It is given by the University in co-operation with the Associated Hospital Schools of Nursing, which means those that have signified their willingness to supply the professional part of the course, and have received the approval of the University Senate for that purpose. Up to the present time the Vancouver General is the only Hospital which has entered into association with the University to this end. The course is open to applicants who meet the general requirements mentioned above, and who, in the opinion of the Courses in Applied Science 163 Department, are personally fitted for the profession of nursing. In addition they must be able to satisfy the entrance requirements of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing. The aim of the five-year combined course is to afford a broader education than can be given by the Hospital Schools of Nursing alone, and thus to build a sound foundation for those who desire to fit themselves for Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing or for Public Health Nursing service. The First and Second Years, which are academic, give the students an introduction to general cultural subjects and a foundation in the sciences underlying the practice of nursing. Between the First and Second years a probationary period of four months will be spent in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. The Third and Fourth Years are devoted to professional training in an Associated Hospital, and are planned to afford experience and training in the care of the sick, and to develop the skill, observation and judgment necessary to the efficient practice of nursing. The Fifth Year affords two alternative courses, one in Public Health Nursing (Nursing B) and the second in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing (Nursing C). First Year (Academic) Subject. o^- First Term. 3a Second Term. "■8 si! 3a English 1 (a) English 1 (b) Choice of Mathematics 1 or Latin 1 or French 1 or History 1, 2, or 3 Physics 1 Chemistry 1 Biology 1 Nursing 1 105 106 124 95 128 117 218 178 174 220 164 Faculty op Applied Science Probationary Period (Hospital) The probationary period of four months, to be taken between the first and second academic years, will be spent in an Associated Hospital. In order to meet the admission requirements of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing, the student must have attained such age as may be fixed by the Associated Hospital School of Nursing before entering upon this probationary period; in the Vancouver General Hospital School of Nursing the eighteenth birthday must be passed. During this period the student will undergo rigid examination as to fitness in physique, temperament and character for the practice of nursing. This will afford the Hospital School of Nursing information upon which to judge the students' qualifications for the profession of nursing. It also enables the student to determine whether she feels herself personally fitted or inclined to proceed in the course. The Hospital Schools of Nursing reserve the right to reject candidates who do not reach the required standards. % Second Year (Academic) Subject. 3 •• *§ Si English 2 (a) English 2(b) Zoology 1 Philosophy 1 Economics 1 Bacteriology 1 Bacteriology 2 Nursing 2 Anatomy and Physiology 106 106 224 132 97 221 221 221 220 First Term. C* rjQ w lis Second Term. at u 3a Third and Fourth Years (Professional) The Third and Fourth Years will be spent in practical training in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. Students Courses in Applied Science 165 in these years are required to register with the University even though during this portion of the course they are in residence at the Hospital. During these professional years students are subject to the authority and are under the direction of the officers of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing. The required professional period is twenty-eight months, in which is included the probationary period of four months. Full maintenance and such allowance as the associated Hospital authorities may designate are accorded, and a yearly vacation of three weeks is granted at the convenience of the Superintendent of the School of Nursing. Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given by members of the medical staff of the associated Hospital and by qualified nurse instructors: Introductory Ethics of Nursing; Practical Nursing Procedure; Elementary Nutrition and Cookery; Drugs and Solutions; Materia Medica; Surgical Nursing; Medical Nursing (including charting); Gynecological Nursing; Nursing of Communicable Diseases; Obstetrical Nursing; Diet in Disease; Pediatric Nursing and Infant Feeding; Nursing in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat; Nursing in Tuberculosis; Urinalysis; Introduction to Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy and X-Ray. This schedule is open to change at any time, at the discretion of the associated Hospital School of Nursing. The period of Hospital service includes actual nursing experience in the following departments: Medical. Operating Room. Surgical. Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat. Gynecological. Obstetrical. Pediatric and Orthopaedic. Infectious. Observation and Neurological. Tuberculosis. Infants. Diet Kitchen. The Social Service Department of the Hospital offers opportunity for a four weeks' service to a limited number of students. Selection will be made by the Superintendent of Nurses from the students desirous of receiving this course. 166 Faculty op Applied Science Fifth Year (Academic and Professional) The Fifth Year will be spent in either Nursing B or Nursing C, at the option of the student. The selection between these courses need not be made until registering with the University for the Fifth Year. Nursing B (Public Health Nursing) A graduate course of one academic year, including work in the University, and appropriate field work under the supervision of the various associated Public Health organizations. Nursing B (Public Health Nursing) Subject Preventable Diseases Epidemiology Tuberculosis Venereal Diseases Mental Hygiene Bacteriology Infant Welfare Orthopedics Public Health Public Health Administration Public Health Organiations Vital Statistics .; Principles and Practice of Public Health Nursing Rural Public Health Nursing Urban Visiting Nursing Programme .. Methods in Health Teaching History of Nursing and Contemporary Nursing Problems School Hygiene Hospital Social Service Metabolism and Nutrition Psychology for Nurses Principles of Education Applied to Teaching Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedure Sociology Geography 10 Motor Mechanics Field Work For Detail* Total Hours Total Hours See Page: Lectures Laboratory 221 21 221 21 221 11 221 3 221 11 221 10 221 11 221 5 222 15 222 4 222 4 222 18 21 222 222 6 222 2 222 11 223 11 223 12 223 3 223 11 223 21 223 21 223 13 224 21 224 21 224 10 To run c oncurrently 167 with the work. academic Courses in Applied Science 167 Nursing C (Teaching and Supervision) A graduate course of one academic year, including work in the University, and opportunity for practice teaching and for the observation of Training School administration and ward supervision in associated Hospitals. Nursing C Subject Preventable Diseases Mental Hygiene Bacteriology Infant Welfare Orthopedics History of Nursing and Contemporary Nursing Problems Teaching in Schools of Nursing Principles of Supervision in Schools of Nursing Metabolism and Nutrition Psychology for Nurses Principles of Education Applied to Teaching Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedure Sociology Geography 10 Electives from Nursing B or from related Science Courses Field Work See Page: For Detail* 221 221 221 221 221 223 223 223 223 223 223 223 224 224 167 Total Uouns Lectures 21 11 16 11 21 21 21 10 21 21 13 21 21 Total Hours Laboratory 10 To run concurrently with the academic work. Field Work in Nursing B and C Through the courtesy and co-operation of the following agencies arrangements have been made for supervised field work, or observation: FOR NURSING B Vancouver General Hospital.—The Social Service Department, Miss J. E. Johnston, Director. 168 Faculty op Applied Science The Provincial Department of Health.—Dr. H. E. Young, Provincial Health Officer; Mrs. C. A. Lucas, Saanich Memorial Health Centre; Miss I. Jeffares, Cowichan Health Centre. The Victorian Order of Nurses.—Mrs. E. Calhoun, District Superintendent. The Medical Department of the Vancouver Public Schools.— Dr. H. White, Medical Director; Miss E. Breeze, Director, School Hygiene. The Vancouver Rotary Clinic for Diseases of the Chest.— Dr. H. A. Rawlings, Director. The Department of Child Hygiene, City of Vancouver.— Dr. F. T. Underhill, City Health Officer; Miss L. Sanders, Supervisor, Department of Child Hygiene. The Government Venereal Disease Clinic.—Dr. J. Ewart Campbell, Director; Miss E. V. Cameron, Nurse in charge. The Provincial Mental Hospital, Essondale.—Dr. A. L. Crease, Medical Superintendent. FOR NURSING C The Vancouver General Hospital.—Dr. F. C. Bell, Superintendent; Miss K. "W. Ellis, Superintendent of Nurses. The academic work and field work will run concurrently throughout the two University terms, with the exception of the last four weeks of the Second Term which, in Nursing B, will be devoted entirely to field work under the supervision of the Provincial Rural Public Health Nursing organizations and, in Nursing C, to such Hospital Service as may be arranged by the Associated Hospitals. Rural field work for some students may have to be delayed until after the close of the University year, depending upon the size of the class. During the period spent in the Hospital, all students will be subject to the authority, and under the direction, of the officers of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing. Adequate opportunity for observation, as well as for Courses in Applied Science 169 practice, is thus afforded in all of the more important fields of Public Health Nursing and in the field of Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. Admission to Nursing B and C The courses are open to students of the five-year course, and also to nurses who have graduated from recognized Schools of Nursing, who are eligible for registration in British Columbia and who are personally fitted for their proposed work. For Nursing C it is also required that applicants shall fulfil the University Educational requirement of Junior Matriculation. Applications for admission to the courses of Nursing B or C should be sent to the Department of Nursing and Health not later than July 15th of the current year. A certificate of good health and physical condition, signed by a regular practising physician, must be presented with the applications. As a preparation for Nursing B, nurses without previous Public Health Nursing service are advised to obtain at least one month's experience in a visiting nursing agency, or other public health or social agency approved by the Department. "While not obligatory, this month is most important, and various Field Agencies—the Provincial Board of Health, the Vancouver General Hospital Social Service Department and the Victorian Order of Nurses, have each agreed to receive nurses for this month in so far as it can be arranged. Inquiry should be made at as early a date as possible to the Department of Nursing and Health that arrangements may be made with the Field Agencies. Nurses will be responsible for their own maintenance, and will receive no remuneration during this period. Nurses registering for Nursing C who have had no experience in family case-work, social service or visiting nursing, are also advised to secure this month's experience with one of the Public Health organizations if possible. For the convenience of graduate nurses already engaged in nursing, who wish to take Nursing B or C, but are unable to take 170 Faculty op Applied Science a year off, provision is made that either one may be taken as a part-time course over a period of two or more years. Nurses registering in this way must fulfil the same requirements as the regular-course students. DOUBLE COURSE FOR THE DEGREES OF B.A. AND B.A.SC The requirements for the first and second years are as set forth in the Calendar for the first and second years of Arts (Pages 65-67) except as follows: 1. Physics 1 or 2, Mathematics 2 (c) (calculus) and Chemistry 1 must be taken. The passing grade for each of these subjects is fifty per cent. (See also, admission to Applied Science, Page 142.) 2. Biology 1, Chemistry 2, Mathematics 2 (a) and 2 (b), and Physics 3 or 4 may not be taken. These subjects are covered later in Applied Science. 3. A course in German is recommended (and, for those intending to enter Geological engineering, French also). The third, four, fifth and sixth years of the double course correspond to the first, second, third and fourth years of Applied Science. The degree of B.A. is conferred on completing the fifth year of this course. COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.Sc. 1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Applied Science must hold a B.A.Sc. degree from this University, or its equivalent. 2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00 Courses in Applied Science 171 3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required: (a.) To spend one year in resident graduate study; or (b.) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned) : (i.) To do two or more years of private work under the supervision of the University, such work to be equivalent to one year of graduate study; or (ii.) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident graduate study. 4. One major and one minor shall be required and a thesis must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject. (Two typewritten copies of each thesis shall be submitted. See special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses"). The choice of and relationship between major and minor subjects, and the amount of work in each, or of tutorial work, must be approved by each of the departments concerned, by the Committee on graduate studies, and by the Dean. 5. First or Second Class standing in History and Principles of Education and Educational Psychology of the Teacher Training Course will be accepted as equivalent to a Minor for the M.A.Sc. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head of the Department in which the student wishes to Major. 6. Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required, and a standing equivalent to at least 75 per cent, in the major subjects and 65 per cent, in the minor. 7. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be made to the Registrar by October 15th. For fees see Page 44. 172 Faculty op Applied Science EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT 1. Examinations are held in December and in April. December examinations will be held in all subjects of the First and Second Years, and are obligatory for all students of these years. December examinations in subjects of the Third and Fourth Years, excepting those subjects that are completed before Christmas, shall be optional with the Departments concerned. Applications for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented. 2. Candidates in order to pass must obtain at least 50 per cent, in each subject. The grades .are as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. But in the First and Second Years of the course in Nursing and Health the requirements for passing are the same as those for the First and Second Years in Arts, namely, 50 per cent, of the examination as a whole, and not less than 40 per cent, in each subject. 3. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such examinations have been granted. 4. Supplemental examinations will be held on September 20th, 21st, 22nd and 23rd, and will not be granted at any other time, except by special permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper. 5. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees Page 44), must be in the hands of the Registrar at last two weeks before the date set for the examinations. 6. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 4 units Examinations and Advancement 173 of the preceding year, or with any supplemental examination outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year unless special permission to do so is granted by Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty is satisfied that the failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations had an adequate cause. Students in Nursing A must remove all outstanding supplemental examinations before entering their third year. 7. No student will be allowed to take any subject unless he has previously passed, or secured exemption, in all pre-requisite subjects. If any subject has another which is concurrent with it, both must be taken in the same session. 8. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat his year may, on application in writing, be exempted by the Faculty from attending lectures and passing examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least Second Class standing. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year. 9. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University. 10. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding. 11. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English. 174 Faculty op Applied Science DEPARTMENTS IN APPLIED SCIENCE N.B.—The following subjects may be modified during the year as the Faculty may deem advisable. Department of Botany Professor: A. H. Hutchinson. Assistant Professor: John Davidson. Assistant Professor: Frank Dickson. Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell. Assistant: Jean Davidson. Assistant: Braham G. Griffith. Assistant: C. W. Argue. Biology 1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses closely related to Biological Science, such an Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine. The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelation- ships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division of labour; life-histories; relation to environment. Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea & Febiger, 1924. The course is prerequisite to all other courses in Biology. One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per week. ^^ 2. Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of Genetics illustrated by the race-histories of certain plants and animals; the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications. Prerequisite: Biology 1. Text-book: Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press. Two lectures per week. First Term. 3. General Physiology of animal and plant life processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department should be consulted. Text-book: Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology, Longmans-Green. Botany 175 Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. Botany 1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized courses in Botany. Prerequisite: Biology 1. Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany, except the Evening Course. Partial credit for this course (2 units) may be obtained through the Evening Course. Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per week. 2. Morphology. General Morphology of plants. A comparative study of plant structures. The relationships of plant groups. Comparative life histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures, from the lower to the higher forms, involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence of parts. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany, Vol. I, University of Chicago Press. Two lectures and two periods of two hours laboratory per week. First Term. 3. Plant Physiology. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-book: Palladin, Plant Physiology, English Edition (Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, P. Blakiston. Two lectures and two periods of two hours laboratory per week. First Term. 4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning, staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope, camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus. 176 Faculty op Applied Science Text-book: W. C. Stevens, Plant Anatomy, P. Blakiston. Prerequisite: Botany 1. One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 5. Systematic Botany. 5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and poisonous plants. Methods of control. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-books: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, Jepson, University of California. Thomas and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press. Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First term. 5. (6) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of Canada, the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada, Dominion Forestry Branch Ottawa. Sudworth, Forest Trees of the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, "Washington, D. C. One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory or field work per week. 5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—An advanced course dealing with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering plants." Methods of field herbarium and laboratory work. Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature. Prerequisites: Botany 1 and 5 (a). Text-books: Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley & Sons, N.Y. Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage & Co., Toronto. Chemistry 177 One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 6. (a) General Plant Pathology. — Identification and life- histories of parasites causing plant-diseases; means of combating them. Prerequisite: Botany 1. Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases. One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 6. (b) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant parasites of forests. Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan. One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per week during one-half of one term. 7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The inter-relations of forests and their environment; the biological characteristics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions; physiography. 1 * Text-book: Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press. One lecture per week during one term. Field trips and laboratory work during the session amounting to thirty hours, one period per week. Department of Chemistry Professor: E. H. Archibald. Professor of Organic Chemistry: R. H. Clark. Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer. Assistant Professor: M. J. Marshall. Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris. Instructor: John Allardyce. Lecturer: M. Neal Carter. Assistant: R. W. Ball. Assistant: D. F. Stedman. Assistant: A. F. Gallaugher. Assistant: R. H. Ball. 178 Faculty op Applied Science 1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a full exposition of the general principles involved in modern Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology. Text-book: Horace Byers, Inorganic Chemistry, Scribner's. Three lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. 2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. (a) Qualitative Analysis.—During the first six weeks of the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part of the laboratory work. Text-book: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan. Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per week. (b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis. Text-book: Talbot, Quantitative Analysis, Macmillan. Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per week. Course (6) must be preceded by Course (a), (b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis. 3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the compounds of carbon will include the method of preparation and a description of the more important groups of compounds in both the fatty and the aromatic series. Chemistry 3 will also be given to those students taking Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2. Text-books: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. Chemistry 179 4. Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course on the development of modern Chemistry, including osmotic phenomena, the ionization theory, the law of mass action, and the phase rule. Text-book: James Walker, Introduction to Physical Chemistry, Macmillan. Prerequisite: Chemistry 2. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis. (a) Qualitative Analysis. — The work of this course will include the detection and separation of the less common metals, particularly those that are important industrially, together with the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in nature. One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per week. First Term. (6) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks, as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute consideration than was possible in the elementary course. Prerequisite: Chemistry 2. One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per week. Second Term. 6. Industrial Chemistry. — Those industries which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry will be considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be given by specialists in their respective fields. Prerequisite: Chemistry 2 and 3. Two lectures per week. 7. Physical Chemistry.—The lectures, which are a continuation of those given in 4, include the kinetic theory of gases, thermo-chemistry, the application of the principles of thermodynamics to chemistry, osmotic phenomena, applications of the 180 Faculty op Applied Science dissociation theory, colloidal solutions, and a study of the physical properties of gases, liquids, and solids and of their chemical constitutions. Text-book: Findlay, Physico-Chemical Measurements, Longmans-Green. Reference books: Ramsay's Series of Books on Physical Chemistry, Longmans. Getman, Theoretical Chemistry, Wiley. Prerequisite: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. 8. Electro-Chemistry—As in Arts. (See Page 91.) 9. Advanced Organic Chemistry. — As in Arts. (See Page 92.) 16. Chemical Engineering. — Theory and design of fractionating columns, condensers, multiple effect evaporators; chamber, tunnel, drum, rotary and spray driers. Theory and practice of technical filtration; calculation of capacity of box filters, filter presses, centrifugals, etc. Principles of counter current extraction. Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4. Text-book: Walker, Lewis & McAdams, Principles of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Reference books: Liddell, Handbook of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Robinson, Elements of Practical Distillation. McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week during second term of Fourth Year. Department of Civil Engineering Professor: Wm. E. Duckering. Associate Professor: E. G. Matheson. Assistant Professor: F. A. Wilkin. Special Lecturer: J. R. Grant. Instructor: A. Lighthall. Instructor: A. G. Stuart. Assistant: Carl F. Barton. 1. Descriptive Geometry. — Geometrical drawing; orthographic, isometric and axometric projections. Civil Engineering 181 Text-book: Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, second edition, Wiley. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Matheson, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Barton, Mr. Stuart. 2. Field Work 1.—Elementary surveying. Practical problems involving the use of the chain, telemeter, compass, transit and level. Traverses, closed circuits, contour and detail surveys. Levels for profiles, benches and contours. Work commences immediately upon the close of spring examinations, and consists of field work, eight hours per day for twenty days, or equivalent. Mr. Duckering, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Barton. 3. Materials of Engineering*—Manufacture and properties of iron and steel; principal alloys; considerations governing selection of materials; manufacture and properties of cements; concrete; stone and brick masonry; principal kinds of commercial timber; treating and preservation of timber; discussion of standard specifications for engineering work. Text-book: Moore, Materials of Engineering, McGraw-Hill. References: Mills, Materials of Engineering; Johnson, Materials of Construction, Wiley; Upton, Materials of Engineering, Wiley. ^ One lecture per week. Mr. Matheson. 4. Graphical Statics. — Elementary theory of structures; composition of forces; general methods involving the force and equilibrium polygons; determination of resultants, reactions, centres of gravity, bending moments; stress in framed structures, cranes, towers, roof-trusses and bridge-trusses. Algebraic check methods will be used throughout. Text-book: Hudson and Squire, Elements of Graphic Statics, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisites: Physics 4 must either precede or accompany Civil 4. One two-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall. •Elective 182 Faculty op Applied Science 5. Mapping 1.—Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 2. Maps of telemeter, compass and transit surveys. Contour and topographical maps in convention or color. Mine and land plans. Prerequisite: Civil 2. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall. 6. Surveying 1. — Chain and angular surveying; the construction, adjustment and use. of the transit, level, compass, stadia, minor field instruments, planimeter, and pantograph; leveling; topography; contour surveying; stadia; railway curves; vertical curves; transition curves. Prerequisite: Civil 2. Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Elementary Surveying, Vol. I, Wiley. References: Gillespie, Surveying, Vol. I, Appleton and Co.; Nugent, Plane Surveying, Wiley; Baker, Engineer's Surveying Instruments, Wiley; Allen, Curves and Earthwork, McGraw- Hill ; Sullivan, Spiral Tables, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week. Mr. Stuart. 7. Field Work 2:—(a) Railway surveys, reconnaissance, preliminary and location surveys, methods of taking topography, cross-sectioning; estimating quantities; running in easement and vertical curves, etc. The notes secured will be used in class work for mapping and for estimating quantities and costs. (6) Hydrographie surveys, topography of a section of river-bed by sounding and fixing position by transits and sextants; the three-point problem; stream-gauging by surface and deep floats and by the current meter. (c) Solar and stellar observations for latitude and azimuth; adjustments of instruments; the use of plane table, sextant and minor instruments; mine surveying. Prerequisite: Civil 2. Time, same as for Civil 2. Mr. Matheson, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall. 8. Foundations and Masonry.—Borings; bearing power of soils; pile and other foundations; cofferdams; caissons; open Civil Engineering 183 dredging; pneumatic and freezing processes; estimates of quantities and costs. Prerequisite: Civil 4. Text-book: Jacoby and Davis, Foundations of Bridges and Buildings, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures and one three-hour period, First Term; one lecture, Second Term. 9. Structural Design 1.—Problems in draughting, illustrating designs in structural engineering; estimates of quantities and costs; preparation of plans. Text-book: Conklin, Structural Draughting and Elementary Design, Wiley; Carnegie, Pocket Companion, Carnegie Steel Co. Prerequisite: First Term of Civil 10. One lecture and one three-hour period. Second Term. Mr. Matheson. 10. Strength of Materials.—A thorough introduction to the fundamental principles dealing with the strength of materials; stress, deformation, elasticity and resilience; the application of the laws of derived curves to the construction of load, shear, moment, inclination and deflection diagrams, fibre stress, deflection of simple, cantilever, and continuous beams under any loading; riveted joints; torsion; columns; combined stresses; longitudinal shear; reinforced concrete; special beams. The laboratory period includes the testing of cement, concrete, timber and steel specimens to determine the strength and elasticity of these materials. About one-half of the time will be set aside for the solution of problems in investigation and design. Text-book: Maurer and Withey, Strength of Materials, Wiley." Reference: Swain, Strength of Materials, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisites: Physics 4 and Civil 4. Two lectures and one three-hour period per week. Mr. Duckering, Mr. Lighthall. Note:—The laboratory testing is given in the Forest 184 Faculty op Applied Science Products Laboratories, under the supervision of Superintendent McElhanney and Mr. Lighthall. 11. Transportation 1. Railways.—The inception of railway projects; reconnaissance, preliminary and location; grade problems; grades, curvature and distance and their effects upon operating costs and revenue; velocity and pusher grades; adjustment, of grades for unbalanced traffic; construction; railway economics, traffic, revenue, branch lines. Prequisite: Civil 6 and 7. Text-book: Williams, Design of Railway Location, Wiley. Reference: Allen, Railroads, Curves and Earthwork, McGraw-Hill; Wellington, Economic Theory of the Location of Railways, Wiley. Two lectures per week. Mr. Wilkin. 12. Hydraulic Engineering 1.— (a) Hydrostatics; design of standpipes, reservoirs and dams. r (b) Hydrodynamics; fundamental principles and their application to problems on the discharge of orifices, notches and weirs; flow in pipes and open channels; practical field and laboratory measurements; examination of hydraulic developments. '^ Prerequisite: Physics 4. Text-book: Russell, Hydraulics, Third Edition, Holt. One lecture and one three-hour period per week. Mr. Wilkin. 13. Mapping 2. — Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 7; railway location and hydrographie surveys; map projections; topographic maps from photographic plates. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall. 14. Surveying 2.—A continuation of Civil 6. Theory and use of aneroid, sextant, plane-table and precise instruments; plane-table surveying; mine, hydrographie and photo- topographic surveying; Dominion and Provincial surveys; field astronomy. Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Surveying, Vol. II, Wiley. Civil Engineering 185 References: Johnson and Smith, Theory and Practice of Surveying, Wiley; Wilson, Topographic, Trigonometric and Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Green's Practical and Spherical Astronomy, Ginn and Co; Manual of Surveys of Dominion Lands; Instructions for B. C. Land Surveyors. Prerequisite: Civil 6. Two lectures per week. Mr. Lighthall. 15. Perspective Drawing and Descriptive Geometry.— Mathematical perspective; perspective drawings of buildings and structures, shades and shadows. Prerequisite: Civil 1. Text-book: Crosskey, Elementary Perspective, Blackie & Son; Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, Second Edition, Wiley. One two-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall. 16. Field Work 3.—Problems in geodetic and precise surveying ; determination of latitude, azimuth and time by solar and stellar observations; baseline measurements; precise levelling. Prerequisite: Civil 7. Time, same as for Civil 2. Mr. Lighthall. 17. Structural Design 2. — Selection of types of bridges; determination of loadings; stresses; choice of cross-sectional forms and areas; design of combination wood and steel trusses, steel trusses; design of connections; masonry structures, dams and retaining walls; complete drawings. Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Structural Member and Connections, McGraw-Hill; Carnegie, Pocket Companion. Reference: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern Framed Structures, Vol. Ill, Wiley; Kirkham, Structural Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisites: Civil 8, 9 and 10. One lecture and two three-hour periods per week. Mr. Matheson. 18. Engineering Economics. — A general treatment of: sinking funds; first cost; cost analysis; salvage and scrap values; yearly cost of service; collecting data; estimating; economic selection. 186 Faculty op Applied Science General management; banking; partnerships and corporations ; stocks; bonds; operating and fixed charges; business finance and organization; capital and interpretation of financial statements. Text-book: Fish, Engineering Eocnomics, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill. References: Waddell and Wait, Specifications and Contracts; Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law. Two lectures per week. Mr. Wilkin. 19. Engineering Law.—The engineer's status; fees; salary; as a witness; responsibility; engineering contracts; tenders; specifications; plans; extras and alterations; time; payments and certificates; penalty, bonus or liquidated damages; maintenance and defects; subcontractors; agents; arbitration and awards; specification and contract writing. Text-book: Waddell and Wait, Specifications and Contracts, McGraw-Hill. References: Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law of Canada, W. H. Anger; Ball, Law Affecting Engineers, Constable and Co. One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin. 20. Surveying 3.—Geodesy; the determination of azimuth, longitude, latitude, time, the figure of the earth; measurement of baselines; triangulation systems; adjustments and reductions of observations; precise levelling. References: Hosmer,Geodesy, Wiley; Cary, Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Gillespie, Higher Surveying, D. Appleton and Co. Prerequisite: Civil 14. One lecture per week. Mr. Lighthall. 21. Hydraulic Engineering 2. — Waterpower engineering; rainfall, runoff, stream flow; investigation of power problems; selection of hydraulic machines; hydrographs; auxiliary power; mass curves, load factors and characteristics; impulse and reaction wheels; methods of control and operation of various forms of machines; transmission of hydraulic power. Civil Engineering 187 Text-books: Gibson, Hydroelectric Engineering, Volume I, Blackie. References: Mead, Water Power Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Mead, Hydrology, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisites: Civil 12 must either precede or accompany Civil 21. One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin. 22. Municipal Engineering.—(a) Water Supply, Rainfall; evaporation; run-off; quantity, quality and pressure required; pumping machinery; storage; aqueducts, pipe lines and distribution systems; purification systems; valves, hydrants and fire service; materials, estimates and designs; construction methods and costs. Text-book: Turneaure, Public Water Supply, 3rd Edition, Wiley. I Reference: Flinn, Westbrook, Bogart, Waterworks Handbook, McGraw-Hill. (6) Sewerage and Sewage Disposal. 1. General methods and economic considerations; quantity and run-off; design of sewers, manholes, flushtanks, etc.; construction methods, materials and costs; estimate, design, maintenance and management. 2. Sewage Disposal: physical, chemical, biological and economical aspects of sewage treatment; dilution; screening, sedimentation, filtration; disinfection; maintenance and management costs. Text-book: Metcalf and Eddy, Sewerage and Sewage Disposal, McGraw-Hill. (c) Town planning; covering the economical and artistic development of a city, city management. Street cleaning and disposal of waste; composition and quantity of city wastes; collection, dumping and disposal; land treatment; incineration and reduction; costs and returns. Text-book: Lewis, City Planning, Wiley. Prerequisite; Civil 12. Two lectures and one two-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart. 188 Faculty op Applied Science 23. Transportation 2. (a) Railways.—Organization and rules of maintenance-of-way; roadway; ballast; ties; lumber preservation; rails and appurtenances; turnouts, tracks, accessories ; structures and their design; stresses in track; track tools; track work; work-train service; maintenance-of-way records and accounts; expenditures; betterments; improvements of old lines, yards and terminals; maximum capacity of single track. Prerequisite: Civil 11. Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Wilkin. (b) Highways.—1. Highway economics, surveys and locations; grades; cross-sections; paving materials; construction methods; designs and estimates. ^ ^* 2. Streets and pavements; materials, design, construction, maintenance and repairs. Text-book: Agg, Construction of Roads and Pavements, McGraw-Hill. Reference: Harger and Bonney, Highway Engineer's Handbook. Prerequisite: Civil 11. Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Matheson. 24. Mechanics of Materials. — A continuation of Civil 10, Strength of Materials; the application of the Principle of Least Work to the determination of statically indeterminate forces in beams and rigid frames; stress and deflection of unsymmetrical sections and beams with variable moment of inertia; analysis and design of reinforced concrete beams, slabs, columns, and reinforced concrete arches. Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Concrete Engineer's Handbook, McGraw-Hill. References: Ketchum, Steel Mill Buildings; Hool, Reinforced Concrete, Vol. Ill; Urquhart and O'Rourke, Design of Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill Prerequisite: Civil 10. Two lectures and one three-hour period per week. Mr. Duckering, Mr. J. R. Grant. Civil Engineering 189 25. Theory of Structures.—The analysis of statically determinate framed structures under dead and live loads; distortion of framed structures; the use of influence lines for analysis of stresses and deflections; hinged and hingeless arches; secondary stresses and redundant members. Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Framed Structures, McGraw- Hill. References: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modem Framed Structures, Vols. I and II, Wiley; Malvern Howe, Influence Lines, Wiley; Morley, Theory of Structures, Longmans Green and Co. Prerequisite: Civil 10. One lecture and two three-hour periods per week. Mr. Matheson. ^^ 26. Class Excursions. — Members of the Fourth Year class in Civil Engineering, under the supervision of an instructor, will visit such factories, industrial developments, public works, docks, shipyards, and important examples of engineering construction as are calculated to assist the student best to grasp the application and scope of the studies pursued and to broaden his vision of the engineering field. Written reports of trips are required. 27. Civil Engineering Thesis.—Original research on selected topics or analyses of engineering projects; experimental or theoretical investigations. Topics may be selected from the Civil Engineering Course: Geodetics, Railways, Hydraulics, Municipal, Highways, Economic and Business Engineering, Structures. Copy of thesis must be filed with the department. Work extends throughout the year, four hours per week. 28. Seminar. — Written and oral discussion of articles appearing in the current Transactions and Proceedings of the various engineering societies, also reviews of important papers in engineering periodicals. Reports on local engineering projects visited in Civil 26. Written outlines must be prepared for all oral reports. Includes training in technical writing and public speaking. 190 Faculty op Applied Science Required of all Third and Fourth Year students in Civil Engineering. Reference: Rickard, Technical Writing, McGraw-Hill. One hour per week. 29. Hydraulic Engineering 3. — Theory, investigation and design of hydraulic motors and machinery. Turbines, Pelton and impulse wheels, centrifugal pumps, hydro-electric installations, plant design and operation. Prerequisite: Civil 12. Text-book: Dougherty, Hydraulic Turbines, Third Edition, McGraw-Hill. Reference: Gibson, Hydro-electric Engineering; Volume I, Gibson, Hydraulics and Its Application, Van Nostrand; Mead, Water Power Engineering, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill. One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin. 30. Engineering Problems 1. — Training in methods of attacking, analyzing and solving engineering problems. Coaching in proper methods of work and study, including drill in systematic arrangement and workmanship in calculations. The content is based upon the application of mathematics to problems in physics and engineering. Prerequisite: First Year Arts. Text-books: Swain, How to Study, McGraw-Hill; Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill. Two two-hour periods per week. Mr. Duckering, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Barton. 31. Engineering Problems 2.—A continuation of Engineering Problems 1, involving a thorough drill in problems in the principal divisions of mathematics given in the First and Second Years of Applied Science, drawn from the field of mechanics, electricity and heat, surveying and draughting, and applied to engineering. Prerequisite: Civil 30. Text-book: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill. One three-hour period per week. Economics, Forestry 191 Mr. Duckering, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Barton. 50. Elementary problems in rural engineering, dealing with drainage, water supply, sewerage and sewage disposal, ventilation, simple structures, and surveying. Adapted to the needs of students in Dairying. One lecture per week. Mr. Stuart. Department of Economics Professor: Theodore H. Boggs. Associate Professor: H. F. Angus. Assistant Professor: S. E. Beckett. Lecturer: N. A. Robertson. Assistant: George Allen. Assistant: Doris Lee. 1. Principles of Economics. — An introductory study of general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs, monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of railways and trusts, etc. Text-books: Fairchild, Furniss, Buck, Elementary Economics, Macmillan. The Canada Year Book, 1926. Two lectures per week. Department of Forestry Professor: H. R. Christie. Assistant Professor: F. Malcolm Knapp. 1. General Forestry.—A general survey of the subject. Text-book: Fernow, Economics of Forestry, Toronto University Press. References: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British Columbia, Commission of Conservation, Ottawa. Pinehot, Primer of Forestry, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. Moon and Brown, Elements of Forestry, Wiley, second edition. Allen, Practical Forestry in the Pacific Northwest, Western Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland. Schlich, Forest 192 Faculty op Applied Science Policy in the British Empire, fourth edition, Bradbury Agnew. Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw- Hill. Various government publications. One lecture per week. 2. Forest Mensuration.—Measurement of felled timber, of standing timber, and of growth of trees and forests. Includes scaling, timber estimating, and preparation of tables of volume, growth and yield. Text-book: Chapman, Forest Mensuration, Wiley, second edition. Winkenwerder and Clark, Problems in Forest Mensuration, second edition, Wiley. Reference books: Graves, Woodsman's Handbook, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. Graves, Forest Mensuration, Wiley. Carey, Manual for Northern Woodsmen, third edition, Harvard Press. One lecture and one period of four hours' field or laboratory work per week. 3. Forest Protection.—The fire problem, legislation, organizations, prevention and control. Text-book: Western Fire Fighters' Manual, Western Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland. Reference books: Millar, Methods of Communication Adapted to Forest Protection, Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa. U. S. Forest Service, Trail Building in the National Forests, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. One lecture per week. Second Term. 4. Forest Finance.—Forestry from the financial standpoint, including studies of compound interest, valuation, rotation, insurance and taxation. Text-book: Roth, Forest Valuation, University of Michigan. Reference books: Chapman, Forest Valuation, Wiley. Woodward, Valuation of American Timber Lands, Wiley. Two periods of one hour each, lectures and problems, per week. Second Term. 5. Timber Physics and Wood Technology.—The structure of wood; the identification of different woods and their qualities Forestry 193 and uses; wood seasoning; wood preservation; emphasis on the Canadian woods of commercial importance. Text-books: Record, Economic Woods of the United States, Wiley, second edition. Record, Mechanical Properties of Wood, Wiley. Reference books: Weiss, Preservation of Structural Timber, McGraw-Hill. Snow, Wood and Other Organic Structural Materials, McGraw-Hill. Roth, Timber, U. S. Forest Service, Bui. 10, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Tiemann, The Kiln Drying of Lumber, J. B. Lippincott. Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per week. 6. Forest Organization. — The principles and methods of organizing forest areas for business management. Normal forest, increment, rotation, felling budget, working plans. Text-book: Roth, Forest Regulation, Roth, University of Michigan. Reference books: Recknagel and Bentley, Forest Management, Wiley. Recknagel, Forest Working Plans, Wiley, second edition. Schlich, Forest Management, Bradbury Agnew. Woolsey, American Forest Regulation, Woolsey, New Haven. One lecture per week. 7. History of Forestry and Forest Administration. — The development of forestry in different parts of the world; forest resources and industries, policy, legislation and education. Reference books: Fernow, History of Forestry, University of Toronto Press, second edition. Schlich; Forest Policy in the British Empire, Bradbury Agnew. Boerker, Our National Forests, MacMillan. Ise, The United States Forest Policy, Yale University Press. Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw-Hill. Various government publications. One lecture per week. 8. Silviculture. — Principles and methods of caring for forests and growing timber crops. Text-book: Hawley, Practice of Silviculture, Wiley. 194 Faculty op Applied Science Reference books: Graves, Principles of Handling Woodlands, Wiley. Tourney, Planting and Seeding in the Practice of Forestry, Wiley. Woolsey, Studies in French Forestry, Wiley. Schlich, Silviculture, Bradbury Agnew. Various government publications. Two lectures per week during the year, and one period of three hours field or laboratory work during the second term. 9. General Lumbering.—A general study of the principles and practice of logging and milling in the chief timber regions of North America. Text-book: Bryant, Logging, Wiley, second edition. Reference books: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir Region, U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. One lecture per week. 10. Logging.—An intensive study of logging systems and operations in the forests of western North America. Text-book: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir Region, U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Reference books: Various articles in the Timberman, B. C. Lumberman and other trade journals. One lecture per week throughout the year; one period of four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 11 and 12. 11. Milling.—A study of the sawmilling and allied woodworking industries of western North America. Text-book: Bryant, Lumber, Wiley. Reference books: Oakleaf, Lumber Manufacture in the Douglas Fir Region, Commercial Journal Co. Brown, American Lumber Industry, Wiley. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Seeley, Small Saw- Forest Products Laboratories op Canada 195 mills, U. S. D. A. Bui. 718, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C. Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10. First Term. 12. Forest Products.—A study of other forest industries, including paper and pulp, naval stores, and wood distillation. Text-book: Brown, Forest Products, Their Manufacture and Use, Wiley. Reference books: Whitham, Modem Pulp and Paper Making, The Chemical Catalog Co. Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10. Second Term. Vancouver Laboratory Forest Products Laboratories of Canada T. A. McElhanney, B.A.Sc. (Toronto), D.L.S., B.C.L.S., A.M.E.I.C, Superintendent. R. S. Perry, B.Sc. (McGill), A.M.E.I.C, Timber Tests Engineer. J. H. Jenkins, B.A.Sc. (Brit. CoL), Specialist in Wood Seasoning. H. W. Eades, B.Sc.F. (Washington), Forestry Assistant. J. B. Alexander, B.Sc. (New Brunswick), D.L.S., A.L.S., Timber Tester. J. T. Lee, Timber Tester. D. S. Wright, Timber Tester. The Forest Service of the federal Department of the Interior maintains two Forest Products Laboratories, one at Montreal, in association with McGill University, and the other at Vancouver, in association with the University of British Columbia. The latter was established in 1918 in order to more adequately deal with forest products research problems of the western portion of Canada. It was equipped at first only for timber testing, as British Columbia timbers are of outstanding importance for structural purposes. The scope of the work of the laboratory has gradually extended in accordance with the requirements of the timber industry and now includes lumber 196 Faculty of Applied Science seasoning investigations, timber decay research, etc. A most important phase of the work of the laboratory is its technical service to the timber industries in the dissemination of information on a variety of subjects, such as wood preservation, utilization of wood waste, pulp and paper, wood distillation, ete. Research in wood preservation and in pulp and paper is, at present, confined to the, Montreal Laboratory. An increasingly valuable amount of material has been collected from the research work of other laboratories and catalogued for reference. A mutually beneficial scheme of co-operation exists between the Laboratory and the University, whereby students of the University in Engineering and Forestry have access to the laboratory to watch the work being carried on and to use the apparatus at times in testing strength of materials. The staff of the Laboratory also has the benefit of the University library and the advice and assistance of University specialists in related work. Department of Geology and Geography Professor: R. W. Brock. Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield. Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams. Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrography: T. C. Phemister. Lecturer: E. M. Burwash. Assistant: W. A. Jones. Geology 1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in the lectures: (a) Physical Geology, including: weathering, work of the wind, the work of ground water, the work of streams, the work of glaciers, the ocean and its work, the structures of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-deposits. Geology and Geography 197 Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per week. First Term. Mr. Schofield. (6) Historical Geology, including: the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic, and Quaternary eras. Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per week. Second Term. Mr. Williams. The Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology include the study and identification of the commonest minerals and rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps, and the study of structures by the use of models. Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will take the form of excursions to localities in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver which illustrate the subject-matter of the lectures. The Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology consist of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by their occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will be taken up and illustrated by the study of the palaeogeography of North America. Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology, Wiley. Reference books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill, Rocks, Rock-weathering and Soils, Coleman and Parks. Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils. Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's works. 2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of mineralogy. Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive Mineralogy of 40 of the more common mineral species, with special reference to Canadian occurrences. Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a 198 Faculty op Applied Science brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis. Text-books: Dana, Manual of Mineralogy, revised by Ford (new edition), Wiley. (For students taking only Geology 2 (a).) Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. (For students who subsequently take Geology 2 (6). Prerequisite: Chemistry 1. Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. First Term. Mr. Phemister. 2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This course supplements 2(a) and consists of a more complete survey of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association and alteration. Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Prerequisite: Geology 2(a). Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. Second Term. Mr. Phemister. 3. Historical Geology.—Continental evolution and development of life, with special reference to North America. Text-book: Schuchert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three lectures per week. First Term. Mr. Williams. 4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage, Structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major units of structures, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography of British Columbia. Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, Holt. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield. Geology and Geography 199 5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study of the earth and the development of the geological sciences. Mr. Brock. (6) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Brock. (c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their influences upon life. Mr. Brock. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Three lectures and one laboratory period of one hour per week. 6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both geological and geographical. Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Paleontology. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. Mr. Williams. 7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of the following: (a) Optical Mineralogy, (b) Lithology and Petrogeny, (c) Microscopical Petrography. Lectures deal with the principles of crystal optics, and with the origin, occurrence, classification, metamorphism and decay of rocks. Laboratory Work consists of the study, determination and classification of specimens, structures and textures of rocks contained in the departmental collections. Field and microscopical methods of determination are equally stressed. Text-books: Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley; Luquer, Minerals in Rock Sections, Van Nostrand; Dana, Textbook of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley. Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2. Two lectures and two laboratory periods of two hours per week. Mr. Phemister. 200 Faculty op Applied Science 8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis, and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore- deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on those in Canada. Text-book: Emmons, General Economic Geology, McGraw- Hill. Reference book: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits, 2nd ed. Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course. Four lectures per week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister. 9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means of the reflecting microscope. The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro- chemical methods of mineral determination. During the second term each student is assigned a suite of ores from some mining district for a critical examination and report. k yf Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany this course. One laboratory period of two hours per week. Mr.Phemister. 10. Field Geology. — The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and instruments employed in field geology. Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining. Mathematics 201 Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken, must be taken concurrently. One period of three hours per week. Mr. Schofield. Department of Mathematics Professor: Daniel Buchanan. Professor: F. S. Nowlan. Associate Professor: G. E. Robinson. Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan. Assistant Professor: L. Richardson. Assistant: Walter H. Gage. 1. Plane Trigonometry.—An elementary course, including the solution of triangles and the use of logarithms, inverse and hyperbolic functions. Text-books: Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp, Clark. Six-Place Tables, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week. First Term. • 2. Solid Geometry.—A study of the three-faced corner, the various polyhedra and solid figures, and the theorems of Pappus. Text-book: Foster, Geometry, Practical and Theoretical, (Vol. Ill Solid), Bell. Two lectures per week. Second Term. 3. Algebra.—A review of simple series, permutations, combinations and the binomial theorem, and a study of exponential and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial and continued fractions, graphical algebra. Two lectures per week. Text-book: Rietz and Crathorne, College Algebra, Holt. 4. Calculus.—An introductory study of the differential and integral calculus will be made, and some of the simpler applications considered. Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn. Two lectures per week. 6. Calculus.—Differential and integral calculus with various applications. 202 Faculty op Applied Science Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn. Three lectures per week. 7. Analytical Geometry.—A study of the conies and other curves occurring in engineering practice, and elementary work in three dimensions. Text-book: Fawdry, Co-ordinate Geometry, Bell. Two lectures per week. 8. Applied Calculus. — The applications of calculus to various problems in engineering. Two lectures per week. (Given in 1928-29 and alternate years.) 9. Differential Equations.—A study of ordinary and partial differential equations and their applications. Text-book: Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans. Two lectures per week. (Given in 1927-28 and alternate years.) Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering Professor: Herbert Vickers. Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering: F. W. Vernon. Assistant Professor of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering: H. F. G. Letson. Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering: Leonard B. Stacey. Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering: G. Sinclair Smith. Instructor In Mechanical Engineering: John F. Bell. Mechanical Engineering 1. Mechanical Drawing.—Practice in freehand lettering in accordance with common practice. Geometrical Drawing, to give facility in the use of drawing instruments. Freehand sketching of machine parts and structures from which drawings are made to scale. Drawing to scale of simple machine parts. Making of assembly drawings from detail drawings, and detail drawings from assembly drawings. Tracing and blueprinting. Two three-hour periods per week. 2. (a) Shop Work.—This work is intended to supplement the manual training given in the high schools, and also to give Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 203 the student some knowledge of the more common machine shop methods and processes as employed commercially. The object is to provide some basis for the intelligent design of machines and structural parts. Lectures.—Physical properties of the materials used in machine construction. Modern methods of handling and finishing wood. Forging and hammering of metals. Annealing and tempering. Making of patterns and cores. Cupola practice. Soldering and brazing, tinning, electroplating. Drilling and tapping, turning and boring, calipering and fitting, milling and milling cutters, reaming and reamers, screw cutting. Grinding and abrasive wheels. Lapping. Punching and shearing. Drop forging and die-casting. Metal spinning. Torch and electric welding. Cold sawing and torch cutting. Tool-making and dressing. Use of jigs. Machine shop standards, including wire and sheet metal gauges, threads, etc. Text-book: Colvin & Stanley, American Machinists' Handbook, McGraw-Hill. One lecture per week. Practice in Metal-working.—Bench work, including marking off, chipping, filing, scraping, tapping, and fitting; lathe work, including turning and boring, screw-cutting and finishing; lathe adjustments; shaping; milling; gear-cutting; tool-dressing. One two-hour period per week. 2. (6) Machine Shop Practice.—A continuation of Mechanical Engineering 2. Five hours laboratory per week First Term, and three hours Second Term. 3. Kinematics of Machines. — Displacement, velocity and acceleration. Relative motions. Harmonic motions. Gear trains. Cams, ratchets, and escapements. Classification of mechanisms. Study of mechanisms in common use. Transmission of motion by belting. Design of outlines of gear teeth. Text-book: Durley, Kinematics of Machines, Wiley. One two-hour period per week. 204 Faculty op Applied Science 4. Dynamics of Machines.—Friction and lubrication. Transmission of power by belts, ropes, gears and friction clutches. Function and dynamics of speed governors. Dynamics of the screw. Forces involved in linear and angular acceleration of moving parts, with special reference to engines, turbines, and pumps. Stresses due to centrifugal force. Balancing of moving parts. Dynamics of the gyroscope. Reference books: Low, Applied Mechanics. Dent & Harper, Kinematics and Kinetics of Machinery, Wiley. Two lectures per week. 5. Machine Design.—Strength of materials used in machine construction. Factors of safety and allowable stresses under various conditions of load. Design of: Valve mechanisms for steam engines; governors; thin cylinders and tanks; rivetted joints; fastenings, such as bolts, screws and cotters; levers and winch handles. Reference books: Spooner, Machine Design, Construction and Drawing, Longmans Green. Dalby, Valves and Valve Gears, Arnold. Two lectures and one three-hour period per week. 6. Elementary Thermodynamics.—(a) Fuels and combustion. General principles underlying the construction and operation of steam boilers. Elementary theory of the steam engine. Measurement of power. Performance of various types of steam engines. Elementary theory of internal combustion engines. Design and operation of isolated power plants to give the best economic results. Theory of air compressors, transmission and use of compressed air. Elementary theory and practical operation of producer gas plants. Text-books: Inchley's Heat Engines, Longmans Green; or Allen & Bursley, Heat Engines, McGraw-Hill. Reference books: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press. Callendar, Steam Power, Longman's Green. Simmons, Compressed Air, McGraw-Hill. Marks and Davis, Steam Tables and Diagrams, Longman's Green. Gebhardt, Steam Power Plant Engineering, Wiley. Kent, Mechanical Engineer's Pocket Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 205 Book, Wiley. Fernald & Orrok, Engineering of Power Plants, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week. (b) Laboratory.—Testing of boilers, steam engines and internal combustion engines. Analysis and ealorimetry of fuels. One three-hour laboratory period per week. 7. Thermodynamics. — A more precise study of the performances and construction of various types of boilers, including furnaces and superheaters. Theoretical efficiency of different types of reciprocating engines working under various conditions. Influence on efficiency of Bize, speed and ratio of expansion with variations of load. Compound and triple expansion engines. Use of steam tables in reference to calculations on saturated and superheated steam. Flow of gases and vapours through orifices and nozzles. Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green. Reference books: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press. Callendar, Steam Power, Longman's Green. Lucke, Thermodynamics, McGraw-Hill, and as under Mechanical 6. Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week. 8. Thermodynamics. — Advanced theory relative to the transformation of heat into mechanical energy. Laws governing the flow of heat through various substances. More precise study of the theory and performance of all types of prime movers, including all types of reciprocating and rotary steam engines, steam turbines, and internal combustion engines. Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green. Reference book: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press. Two lectures and one three-hour period per week. 9. Thermodynamics.—For Mechanical Engineering students only. Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longman's Green. Laboratory text-book: Moyer, Power Plant Testing, McGraw-Hill. 206 Faculty op Applied Science Reference book: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge Press. Two lectures and one six-hour laboratory per week. 10. Machine Design.—The design of machine and structural parts, including parts of engines of all types; design of appliances for the transmission of power, including belts, rope, cable, friction and toothed gearing. The student is required to work out the complete design of some machine or appliance, and make the drawings and tracings requisite for its construction. Text-book: Spooner, Machine Design, Longmans Green. Two lectures and one five-hour laboratory per week for Mechanical Engineering, and two lectures and one three-hour laboratory for Electrical Engineering. 11. Heating, Ventilation, and Refrigeration. — Design of steam, hot water, and hot air systems of heating. Heaters for steam and water systems. Use of exhaust steam for heating. Central heating plants. Loss of heat from buildings. Refrigerating systems. Reference book: Harding & Willard, Mechanical Equipment of Buildings (Vols. I and II), Wiley. One lecture per week. 12. Design of Power Plants.—A study of the function, construction, and performance of the various machines and appliances which enter into the design of industrial plants. Special attention is given to the economic results to be expected from various combinations. Reference books: Harding & Willard, Mechanical Equipment of Buildings (Vols. I and II), Wiley. Fernald & Orrok, Engineering of Power Plants, McGraw-Hill. One lecture per week. 13. Physical Treatment of Metals.—A study of the various metals used in commercial work, with special reference to the treatment applied to get the physical properties and qualities required for specific purposes. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 207 Text-book: Colvin & Juthe, The Working of Steel, McGraw- Hill. One lecture and one three-hour laboratory per week. 14. Mechanical Design of Electrical Machines. Electrical Engineering 1. Theory and Operation of Electrical Machines.—A practical course for students not specializing in Electrical or Mechanical Engineering. Units: Absolute electrostatic and electromagnetic, practical units, conversion factors. Magnetic Circuit: Unit magnetic pole, field, intensity, induction; flux, magnetomotive force, reluctance, permeability, potential, B-H curves, hysteresis. Electric Circuit: Unit quantity, current and current density, electromotive force, Ohms Law, Joules Law, Kirchhoff's Laws, resistivity and specific resistance, conductivity and conductance; induction, self and mutual. Direct Current Machines: The dynamo, motor and generator; Emf. equation; armature, simple lap and wave; excitation; characteristic curves of series, shunt, separately and compound excited generators and motors; armature reaction; commutation; efficiency, rating and heating; types of motors suited to various classes of service; boosters; balancers for three wire systems; parallel operation of generators. Alternating Current: The production of simple alternating electromotive forces and currents; wave form; form factor; frequency; maximum, average, and root-mean-square values; effect of induction and capacity on the properties of alternating current circuits; vector diagrams; measurement of power; power factor; polyphase circuits; Y and Delta connections. Alternating Current Machines—Alternator: Emf. equation; armature winding: magneto-motive forces and fluxes; armature reaction; leakage reactance; regulation; efficiency. Synchronous Motor: Principle; vector diagram; output; power factor; synchronizing; hunting; parallel operation of alternators. Transformer: Constant potential1 vector diagrams; leakage reactance; 208 Faculty of Applied Science constant current; losses; efficiency; connections; phase transformation; auto and booster transformers. Induction Motor: Revolving field; slip; characteristics; circle diagram; variable speed; wound rotor induction motor; choice of type1 starting. Rotary Converters: Description of operation. Transmission of Electrical Energy: Comparison of cost of transmission with different number of phases; instrument transformers. The above course is designed to introduce to the students the principal factors in electrical machinery; only enough theory being given to explain intelligently the operating characteristics of the apparatus studied. Text-books: Gray, Principles and Practice of Electrical Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Maclean, Electrical Laboratory Course for Junior Students, Blackie & Sons. Prerequisite: Physics 3. Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per week. 2. Elementary Electrical Engineering.—Units: Absolute, electrostatic, electromagnetic and practical units. Electromagnetism- Permeability; flux-density; magnetomotive force; magnetic reluctance; calculation of pull of electromagnets; inductance, self and mutual. Commercial Current and Voltage Measuring Instruments'- Requirements of good measuring instruments, amperemeters and voltmeters; construction and moving-coil; hot-wire; electrostatic and induction-type measuring instruments. Secondary Batteries'- Theory; use and application. Armature Winding■' Theory of lap and wave windings; use of equalizing connections; characteristics of series, shunt and compound wound motors; characteristics of shunt and compound wound generators; commutation, and armature reaction in direct current machines. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 209 Elementary Theory of Alternating Currents: The production of simple alternating electromotive forces and currents; wave form, frequency, crest and RMS valves; Cartesian and Polar diagrams; effect of self induction and capacity on the properties of alternating current circuits; measurement of power in A.C. circuits; polyphase circuits, balanced and unbalanced systems; star and mesh connections; vector treatment. Elementary Theory of the Transformer. Automatic Reversible Battery Boosters. Testing of apparatus studied. Wave Form Indicators: The Oscillograph, Joubert's contact, the Ondograph. Insulation'- Characteristics of various types, switches and fuses. Illumination and Photometry: Arc Lamps, Incandescent Lamps, Street Illumination, etc. Text-books: MacCall, Electrical Engineering Continuous Currents, University Tutorial Press Ltd. MacCall, Electrical Engineering Alternating Currents, University Tutorial Press Ltd. Smith, Testing Dynamos and Motors, Scientific Publishing Co. Smith, Practical Alternating Currents, Scientific Publishing Co. Maclean, Electrical Laboratory Course for Junior Students, Blackie & Sons. Bennett & Crothers, Electro- Dynamics, McGraw-Hill. For Third Year Electrical and Mechanical students only. Prerequisite: Physics 3. Three lectures and one laboratory period of four hours per week. 3. Electrical Engineering. — Direct Current Machines: Separation of losses by various methods; back to back methods of testing efficiency; parallel operation; review of armature reaction and the compensating thereof; further study of commutation. Alternating Current Machines: The Alternator; Induced Electromotive force, Armature winding, Magnetomotive forces and fluxes concerned in the operation of an Alternator, Arma- 210 Faculty op Applied Science ture Reaction, Armature leakage reactance, Armature effective Resistance, Regulation, Methods of predetermining Regulation and the vector diagrams thereof, Losses, Efficiency. Static Transformers: Types of Transformers, The Ideal Transformer, True equivalent circuit of a Transformer, Approximate equivalent circuit of a transformer, Calculation of Magnetizing current and inphase current supplying Core losses, Calculation of leakage reactance, Solution of the vector diagram and Calculation of Regulation, Losses in a Transformer—Eddy Current Loss—Hysteresis Loss—Copper Loss, Calculation of Efficiency, Ratio Test, Polarity Test, Short Circuit Test. Calculation of Regulation from the short circuit Test, Regulation by loading, Sumpner efficiency Test, Separation of Hysteresis and Eddy Current loss Test, Current Transformer, Potential Transformer, Constant Current Transformer, Auto-Transformer, Induction Regulator, Parallel operation of Transformers, Transformer Connections, Phase Transformation. Synchronous Motors: General characteristics, Power factor, V Curves, Methods of starting, Explanation of the operation of a Synchronous Motor, Hunting, Damping, Stability, Circle diagram of the Synchronous Motor, Losses and Efficiency, Parallel operation of Alternators. Synchronous Converters: Voltage Ratio and current relations, Armature heating and resistance and the effect thereof of change in power factor. Polyphase Induction Motors: Revolving field, slip, Transformer properties of an Induction Motor, True and approximate equivalent circuit of an induction motor, Load equivalent to a non inductive resistance, Circle diagram, Characteristic Curves, Methods of starting Induction Motors, Speed Control. Transmission of Electrical Energy: A brief treatment dealing with the economy of conducting material for different number of phases. Text-books: Smith, Practical Alternating Currents, Scientific Publishing Co. Lawrence, Principles of Alternating Current Machinery, McGraw-Hill. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 211 For Fourth Year Mechanical students only. Prerequisite: Electrical 2. Two lectures and one laboratory period of three hours per week. 4, Electrical Machinery. Theory of the Transformer. Core and Shell types. Vector diagrams. Magnetizing current, Regulation, Current Rush on suddenly switching on. Systems of Connection. Methods of Cooling. Testing. The Alternator. Salient and non-salient pole types. Alternator windings. EMF equation. Breadth factor, Form Factor, Coil-span Factor. Method of obtaining pure sine wave form. Regulation. Calculation of Regulation. Synchronous Impedance. Short Circuit Currents. Method of Calculating excitation on loads of various power factors. Synchronizing of alternators. Synchroscopes. Parallel Operation of Alternators. The Synchronous Motor. Single and Polyphase Typea Vector diagram. Variation of power factor with excitation. Calculation of excitation necessary for power factor improvement. Damping windings. Hunting and its cure. Methods of Starting. The Induction Motor. Windings. Production of Rotating field, Circle diagram. Slip, torque and other characteristics. Squirrel Cage and Slip Ring Types. Effect of rotor resistance. Torque slip curves. Starting methods of Squirrel cage machines. Calculation of steps of starting resistances for wound rotor machines. Crawling of Induction motors. Leakage fluxes in Induction motors. Pole changing. Cascade Connection and its characteristics. Speed Control by rotor resistance, by change of frequency, by use of AC commutating motors. Hunt Cascade motor. Efficiency Tests. Stroboscopic method of slip measurement. Single Phase Induction Motor Theory. The Rotary Converter. EMF and current relations. Heat- 212 Faculty of Applied Science ing of Rotaries. Methods of Changing voltage ratios. Starting and Synchronizing. The Three Phase Commutator Motor. Shunt and Series Types. Vector diagrams and characteristics. Text-books: Miles Walker, Specification and Design of Electrical Machinery, Longmans, Green & Co. Lawrence, Alternating Currents, McGraw-Hill. Steinmetz, Theory and Calculation of Electric Apparatus, McGraw-Hill. H. Vickers, The Induction Motor, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons. Two lectures and one laboratory period of six hours per week. 5. Electric Traction.—Electric Railways: advantages and disadvantages of various systems. Low tension DC and high tension DC. High tension systems. Speed-time curves and their estimation. Estimation of power required for electric trains. Train Resistance. Series Traction Motors DC and AC and their complete theory and characteristics. Control and Control Systems. Equipment and Rolling Stock. Regenerative Braking. Overhead construction and rail construction. Feeder systems and their design. Sub-station Equipment. Text-books: A. T. Dover, Electric Traction, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons. F. W. Carter, Electric Traction, Chapman & Hall. One lecture per week. 6. Electric Power Plants and Transmission Lines. — Comparison of amounts of Copper for Various Systems. Choice of Site and type of machinery. Load Factor and diversity factor. Inductance and Capacity Calculations. Voltage drops on Single Phase and Three phase lines. Charging currents. Voltage rises on AC systems. Automatic Protective Switch-gear. Lightning Arresters. Kelvin's Law. Design of Feeders. Voltage drops in feeders and cables. Conductors and disributing networks; loss of potential in networks. Voltage control. Tirrill Regulator. Economics of hydro-electric development. Design of E.H.T. feeders. Suspension Type Insulators and other types. Mechanical design of line and towers. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 213 Corona. Losses due to Corona. Laws of Corona. Voltage and Power Factor Control of Transmission lines. Text-book: Still, Overhead Power Transmission, McGraw- Hill. Two lectures per week. One lecture per week. 7. Electrical Design.—Design of DC generators and motors. Induction motors. Salient and non-salient Pole Alternators. Rotary Converters. Transformers. Text-books: Slichter, Design of Electrical Machinery, Wiley & Sons. Miles Walker, Specification and Design of Electrical Machinery, Longmans, Green & Co. H. Vickers, The Induction Motor, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons. Whittaker, The Rotary Converter, Benn Bros. One lecture per week. 8. Radio, Telegraphy and Telephony. — Open and closed oscillators. Resonance. Coupled Circuits. Forced and free vibrations. Waves on coils and wires. Antennae and Earth Connections. Propagation of waves over the earth's surface. Generation of Oscillations. Spark. Arc. High-frequency Alternator. Frequency Changers and Ionic Valves. Methods of Detection. Valve Circuits, beat reception, relaying, amplifying, with special attention to work on Ionic Valves. Wireless Telephony. Microphones: Various Types. Transmitting Circuits. Receiving Circuits. Tuning. Direction Finding. Latest work on above. Interference and its prevention. Short Wave Work with Beam Systems. Text-book: Eccles, Continuous Wave Telegraphy and Telephony, Van Nostrand. Morecroft, Principles of Radio Communication, Wiley & Sons. One lecture per week. 214 Faculty op Applied Science Department of Mining and Metallurgy Professor of Mining: J. M. Turnbull. Professor of Metallurgy: H. N. Thomson. Associate Professor of Mining: Geo. A. Gillies. Assistant in Metallurgy: W. B. Bishop. Mining 1. Metal Mining.—An introductory course in metal mining, covering the following subjects: Ores and economic minerals; economic basis of mining; ordinary prospecting; mineral belts; conditions in British Columbia; preliminary development of mines; timbering and framing; tunnelling; shaft sinking; transportation and haulage; drainage; ventilation. Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull. 2. Coal and Placer Mining.—A general course in coal and placer mining, covering the following subjects: (a) Classification of coals; prospecting; mine development; mining methods; ventilation; transportation and haulage; drainage ; tipples; coal mines acts and laws. (b) Gravel deposits; nature and origin of paystreaks; prospecting ; examination and testing of deposits; ordinary mining methods; hydraulic and dredging methods; plant and equipment ; placer mines acts and laws. Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull. 3. Metal Mining. — An advanced course in metal mining, covering the following subjects: Scientific prospecting; development work in mines; mining methods; blasting and explosives; examination of mines and prospects; methods of ore sampling; mine valuation; accounting and costs, administration; welfare and safety work; mining laws and contracts; economics; ethics. Prerequisite: Mining 1. Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull. Mining and Metallurgy 215 4. Mining Machinery.—A special course covering the structural and mechanical features of Mining Engineering, as follows: Mine structures; mining plant and machinery; core and churn drills; tramways, etc. Prerequisites: Mining 1; Mechanical Engineering 3, 6; Civil Engineering 3 and 10. Two lectures per week. Mr. Gillies. 5. Mine Surveying.—A practical course covering the work of the surveyor and staff in metal mines: Methods and practice in mine surveying; geological work underground; maps, plans and models; notes and records. Prerequisites: Civil Engineering 2 and 6. One lecture per week. First Term. Mr. Turnbull. 6. Mining Design.—A laboratory draughting course covering the special requirements of Mining students in regard to design of the layout and details of mining plant, structures, and mine survey plans. One three-hour period per week. Mr. Gillies. 7. Mining Methods.—A special course covering the mining of large ore bodies by special mining methods. Prerequisite: Mining 1. Concurrent Courses: Mining 2, 3 and 4. One lecture per week. Second Term. Mr. Turnbull. Metallurgy 1. General Metallurgy.—This course covers the fundamental principles underlying metallurgical operations in general, and is introductory to subsequent more specialized study. The lectures follow in general the subject as taken up in Principles of Metallurgy, by Chas. H. Fulton, including the following main subjects: Physical mixtures and thermal analysis. Physical properties of metals. Alloys. Measurement of high temperatures. Typical metallurgical operations. Roasting and fusing. Electrometallurgy. Slags. Matte. Bullion. Refractory materials. Fuels. Combustion. Furnaces. 216 Faculty of Applied Science Text-book: Fulton, Principles of Metallurgy, McGraw-Hill. Reference books: Hofman, General Metallurgy, McGraw- Hill. Current • Mining and Metallurgical Journals. Trade Catalogues. Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 and 2. Two lectures per week. Mr. Thomson. 2. Smelting and Leaching.—A general course covering principles and practice of Pyrometallurgy and Hydrometallurgy as applied to gold, silver, copper, iron, lead and zinc. Prerequisite: Metallurgy 1. Two lectures per week. Mr. Thomson. 3. Metallurgical Calculations.—A special course covering Thermochemistry; Metallurgical Calculations; Furnace Design and Efficiency; Special Processes. A large portion of the time will be given to the study of heat balances of typical smelting operations. Reference book: Richards, Metallurgical Calculations. Prerequisites: Metallurgy 1, Chemistry 1. Two hours per week. Mr. Thomson. 4. Metallurgical Analysis.—Advanced course in Metallurgical Analysis of Ores and Furnace Products, Pyrometry and Refractories. Special attention will be given to analytical methods used by smelting plants in purchase of ores and control of furnace operations. Prerequisites: Metallurgy 1, Metallurgy 6. Six hours laboratory per week, First Term. Twelve houn laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr. Thomson. 5. Fire Assaying.—Quantitative determination of gold, silver, and other metals by fire-assay methods, with underlying principles. Mining and Metallurgy 217 Text-book: Fulton, Manual of Fire Assaying, McGraw-Hill. One lecture and one five-hour laboratory period per week. First Term. Mr. Thomson. 6. Wet Assaying.—An introductory course in metallurgical analysis of ores and concentrates. Most of the time will be given to the technical determination of zinc, copper and lead. One three-hour laboratory period per week. Mr. Thomson. Ore Dressing 1. Ore Dressing.—A general course covering the concentration of ores by mechanical means. Most of the time is spent in considering fundamental principles, typical machines, and their general operations and relations in modern milling practice, emphasizing the economic and practical aspects. Students are taught the commercial and technical characteristics of true concentrating ores, the general principles on which the size, character, site, and other features of a mill are designed. The general lay-out of crushing, handling, and separating machinery. The laws of crushing and of various classifying and separating actions, and the design, operation, and comparative efficiency of typical machines, such as crushers, rolls, stamps, ball and tube mills, jigs, tables, screens, classifiers, and slime- handling devices. Attention is paid to pneumatic, magnetic, electrostatic, flotation, and other special processes, including coal-washing. Text-books: F. Taggart, A Manual of Flotation Processes, Wiley. Reference Books: S. J. Truscott, Text-book of Ore Dressing. Richards and Locke, Text-book of Ore Dressing. Two lectures per week. Mr. Gillies. 2. Ore Dressing Laboratory.—A variety of crushing, sizing, classifying and separating operations are carried out by the students and studied quantitatively on appropriate machines. 218 Faculty of Applied Science singly and in combination. Special attention is paid to flotation processes, several types of machines being used. Ores from British Columbia mines are usually chosen, so that the work of the students is along practical lines in comparison with actual work in operating plants. Prerequisite: Ore Dressing 1. Nine hours laboratory per week. Mr. Gillies. Note.—All students in Mining and Metallurgy are advised to provide themselves with a copy of Peele's Mining Engineer's Handbook (Wiley), which is used for reference in many of the courses in which no special textbook is required. Department of Physics Professor: T. C. Hebb. Associate Professor: A. E. Hennings. Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson. Assistant Professor: G. M. Shrum. Assistant: D. F. Stedman. The instruction includes lectures on the general principles of Physics, accompanied by courses of practical work in the laboratory. 1. Mechanics 1.—An elementary treatment of the subject of statics, dynamics, and hydrostatics, with particular emphasis on the working of problems. The course is given in the first half of the First Year of Applied Science. Text-books: Loney, Mechanics and Hydrostatics, Cambridge University Press. Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat, Ginn. Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week. 2. Advanced Heat.—This course is begun when Mechanics 1 is finished, and the six hours devoted to it are divided in the same manner. The course is based on the supposition that the student is already familiar with the elementary principles of heat. Physics 219 Text-books: Edser, Heat for Advanced Students, Macmillan. Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat, Ginn. 3. Electricity and Magnetism.—A quantitative study of the fundamental principles of electricity and magnetism, with a special reference to the fact that the student is to be an engineer. The course includes a short treatment of the elements of alternating currents. Text-books: Millikan and Mills, Electricity, Sound and Light (first part), Ginn. Smith, Electrical Measurements, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week. 4. Mechanics 2.—The subject-matter consists of an extension of the statics and dynamics of Mechanics 1, but with the use of the differential and integral calculus. Prerequisite: Mechanics 1. Text-book: Poorman, Applied Mechanics, McGraw-Hill. Two lectures per week. 5. Light. — A short lecture course on light for students taking Chemical Engineering. The time will be devoted to a study of refraction, dispersion, interference, diffraction, double- refraction, polarization and spectroscopy. One hour per week. 9. Recent Advances in Physics.—A course of lectures dealing with the electrical properties of gases, the electron theory, and radioactivity. Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 4, and Mathematics 10. Reference books: Thomson, Conductivity of Electricity Through Gases, Cambridge University Press, Second Edition. Rutherford, Radio-active Substances and Their Radiations, Cambridge University Press. Millikan, Electron, University of Chicago Press, Second Edition. Thomson, Positive Rays, Longman's. Hughes, Photo-electricity, Cambridge University Press, X-Rays, Longman's. 220 Faculty of Applied Science Department of Nursing and Health Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill. Assistant Professor: Mabel F. Gray. Part-time Lecturers: Miss Elizabeth Gertrude Breeze, R. N. Mrs. Eva D. Calhoun, R.N., Cert.P.H.N. (Ann Arbor, Michigan). John Ewart Campbell, B.A., M.D., C.M. (McGill). Ralph Elswood Coleman, M.B. (Toronto). William A. Dobson, M.D. (Jefferson Medical College). Miss Isabelle M Jeffares, R.N. Miss Jane E. Johnston, R.N., Cert.P.H.N. (British Columbia). Miss Ruby Adeline Kerr. Frank Cornwall McTavish, M.B. (Toronto), L.S.A. (London), M.R.C.S. (England), L.R.C.P. (London). Robert Lester Pallen, D.M.D. (North Pacific College of Dentistry). Alfred Howard Spohn, M.B. (Toronto). Frederic Theodore Underhill, L.R.C.P. &S., L.M., and F.R.C.S. (Edinburgh), D.P.H. (Edinburgh and Glasgow), F.R.S.I. London), F.R.I.P.H. Charles Harvey Vrooman, M.D., C.M. (Manitoba). Harold White, M.D. (McGill), L.M.C.C. Henry Esson Young, B.A. (Queen's), M.D., CM., (McGill), LL.D. (Toronto), LL.D. (McGill), LL.D. (British Columbia), L.M.C.C. Subjects of Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course) 1. Introduction to Nursing.—A series of lectures dealing with the nature of hospital service and discipline, designed to prepare students for entrance to Schools of Nursing. No formal credit is given for this course, but attendance is compulsory. One hour per week, First Year. Miss Gray. 2. History of Nursing.—A series of lectures dealing with the origin and history of nursing. One hour a week, Second Year. Miss Gray. 3. Anatomy and Physiology.—A study of the structure and function of the normal human body as the basis for the study of all pathological conditions, as well as for the study of hygiene. Two hours a week, Second Year. Miss Gray. Nursing and Health 221 Nursing B (Public Health Nursing) Preventive Medicine in the Public Health Nursing Programme 1. Preventable Diseases. — Brief sketches of the more important of the preventable diseases; immunology; vaccine therapy. One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Hill. 2. Epidemiology.—Principles and practice in the control of disease. One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Hill. 3. Tuberculosis.—A study of tuberculosis, its prevention and cure. Eleven lectures. Dr. Vrooman. 4. Venereal Diseases.—The care and control of venereal Three lectures. Dr .Campbell. 5. Mental Hygiene.—An introduction, with clinical demonstrations, to the study of mental illness, its cure and prevention. Eleven lectures. Dr. Dobson. 6. Bacteriology.—A short laboratory course to familiarize students with the practical application of laboratory technique in Public Health measures. Ten hours. Miss Wilson. Child Welfare 7. Infant Welfare.—A series of lectures and clinics dealing with pre-natal care, and the normal development of the infant; also dealing with the disorders of infancy, their prevention and cure. Eleven hours. Dr. Spohn. 8. Orthopedics.—A series of lectures dealing with the problem of children handicapped by deformities, with emphasis upon the importance of early recognition of deformities and their prevention and cure. Five hours. Dr. McTavish. 222 Faculty of Applied Science Public Health, Hygiene and Sanitation Public Health, Hygiene and Sanitation. 9. Public Health.—A series of lectures covering the fields of general hygiene and sanitation. One hour a week. Fifteen lectures. Dr. Hill. 10. Public Health Administration.—A study of the official relation of the Public Health Nurse to the Departments of Health. Four lectures. Dr. Underhill, Dr. Young. 11. Public Health Organizations.—A series of single lectures dealing with special aspects of their work. (a) Diagnostic Clinics for Tuberculosis. Dr. Lamb. (b) The Hospital's Relation to the Community Health Programme. Dr. Bell, a (c) The Rotary Clinic. Dr. Rawlings. (d) The Workmen's Compensation Act. Dr. Bastin. 12. Vital Statistics.—The general principles governing the collection and arrangement of statistical facts, and their application in Public Health Nursing. One hour a week. Eighteen lectures. Dr. Hill. Nursing 13. Principles and Practice of Public Health Nursing.— A study of the principles and practice of public health nursing. One hour a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray. Text-book: Gardner, Public Health Nursing, Macmillan. 14. Rural Public Health Nursing.—A study of the principles and practice of public health nursing in rural communities. Six hours. Miss Jeffares. 15. Urban Visiting Nursing Programme. Two lectures. Mrs. Calhoun. 16. Methods in Health Teaching.—A consideration of the Nursing and Health 223 material to be presented in the teaching of personal hygiene and home nursing, and the methods of presentation. One hour a week. Second Term. Miss Gray. 17. History of Nursing and Contemporary Nursing Problems.—A study of the origin and history of nursing, followed by the consideration of recent developments in the nursing field. Eleven lectures a week. Miss Gray. 18. Teaching in Schools of Nursing.—A study of the Curriculum; the selection of subjects, and content of each, and methods of presentation. One lecture a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray. 19. Principles of Supervision in Schools of Nursing.—A study of the organization of the School of Nursing, its relation to the various departments of the Hospital; and the problems of training and record keeping. One lecture a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray. 20. School Hygiene.—A series of twelve lectures given by members of the staff of the Medical Departmnt of the Vancouver School Board, dealing with the specific problems of this division of Public Health. One hour a week. First Term. Miss Breeze, Miss Kerr, Dr. Pallen, Dr. White. 21. Hospital Social Service.—A presentation of the principles underlying Medical Social Service. Three lectures. Miss Johnston. 22. Metabolism and Nutrition. Ten lectures. Dr. Coleman. 23. Psychology for Nurses. One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Wyman. 24. Principles of Education Applied to Teaching. One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Weir. 25. Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedure.—Prin- 224 Faculty op Applied Science ciples and practice, fitting students for giving addresses and conducting meetings. One hour a week. Thirteen hours. Dr. Hill. 26. Sociology.—The nature of Sociology as a study; environment; influence of technology and other conditions on social development, etc.; social pathology. One hour a week. Both Terms. Mr. Beckett. Text-book: Beach, Introduction to Sociology, Houghton- Mifflin. 27. Geography 10. One hour a week. Both Terms. Mr. Brock, Mr. Schofield. 28. Motor Mechanics. ^^T Practical instruction in the structure and operation of automobiles, including practice driving. One hour a week. One Term. Mr. Bell. Department of Zoology Professor: C. McLean Fraser. Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer. Instructor: Gertrude M. Smith. Assistant: Mildred H. Campbell. Note:—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology. 1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals. Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups. Comparative life-histories. Text-books: T. J. Parker and W. A. Haswell, Manual of This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology. Zoology, Macmillan (American Edition, 1916). Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 7. Economic Entomology (in part).—The portion of the course in Economic Entomology that deals with forest insects. One lecture and two hours' laboratory work per week for half of Second Term. (Not given in 1927-28.) THE £s FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE 226 Faculty op Agriculture TIME TABLE FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE- FIRST Monday Room Tuesday Roost Wednesday Room 9-10 jAgronomy 1 AglOO English I b A 100 AglOO Agronomy 1 AglOO Poultry 1 10-11 Animal Husbandry I AglOO Biology 1 AplOO AplOl French 1 A 104 A 204 Biology 1 Zoology 1 AplOO AplOl 11-12 Zoology 1 12-1 1-2 Chemistry 1 a .... English 2 b S300 A 100 Agronomy 1 Bacteriology 1 Agl03 S Chemistry 1 a English 2 a S100 A 100 2-3 Agronomy 1 Bacteriology 1 Agl03 S Botany 1 Lab... ' AP 3-4 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 _ Bacteriology 1 ... S S Agronomy 1 Chemistry 2 Lab b Agl03 S Botany 1 Lab... Ap 4-5 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Bacteriology 1 .... S S Chemistry 2 Lab b S 5-6 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Bacteriology 1 .... s s Chemistry 2 Lab b S SECOND Monday Room Tuesday Room Wednesday Room AglOO English 1 b A 100 AglOO Agronomy 2 AglOO 9-10 Dairying 1 10-11 Horticulture 1 .... AglOO Animal Husbandry 4 AglOO Animal Husbandry 4 AglOO Biology 1 Zoology 1 AplOO AplOl French 1 A 104 A 204 Biology 1 . Zoology 1 AplOO AplOl 11-12 Botany 1 12-1 1-2 Chemistry 1 a .... English 2 b S300 A 100 Agronomy 2 Agl03 Chemistry 1 a ... English 2 a S300 A 100 2-3 Dairying 1 Lab.. Agl08 Agronomy 2 Agl03 Botany 1 Lab- Ap 3-4 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Dairying 1 Lab. S Agl08 S Agl08 S Agronomy 2 Chemistry 2 Lab.b Agl03 S Botany 1 Lab.... Ap 4-5 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Dairying 1 Lab.. Chemistry 2 Lab.b S 5-6 Chemistry 1 Lab. 1 Chemistry 2 Lab.b S KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Agriculture; Time Table 227 -1927-28 FIRST AND SECOND YEARS. TERM Thubsday Room Fmday Room Satubday Room English lb A100 Poultry 1 AglOO English 1 a , Poultry 1 A 100 Agl02 9-10 Animal Husbandry 1 Chemistry 2 Agll4 S800 Poultry 1 Agl02 10-11 French 1 . A 104 A 204 Animal Husbandry 1 Agll4 French 1 . Poultry 1 A 104 Agl02 Botany 1 11-12 12-1 Zoology 1 Lab Ap Chemistry 1 a — English 2 a S300 A 100 1-2 English 1 a Zoology 1 Lab A 100 Ap Bacteriology 1 S 2-3 Animal Husbandry 1 . Chemistry 2 Lab. k Agll4 S Bacteriology 1 ...... S 3-4 Animal Husbandry 1 . Chemistry 2 Lab. h Agll4 S Biology 1 Lab. 6... Ap 4-5 Chemistry 2 Lab. bj S Biology 1 Lab. 6... Ap 5-6 TERM Thubsday Room 1 Fbiday Room Satubday Room English 1 b A 100 Dairying 1 AglOO English 1 a A 100 9-10 Animal Husbandry 4 . Chemistry 2 AglOO S300 AglOO 10-11 French 1 A 104 A 204 Horticulture 1 - French 1 A 104 Botany 1 11-12 12-1 Zoology 1 Lab. Ap Chemistry 1 a English 2 a S300 A 100 1-2 English 1 a A 100 Ap Horticulture 1 .... Agl04 Zoology 1 Lab 2-3 Chemistry 2 Lab.b S Horticulture 1 .... Agl04 3-4 Chemistry 2 Lab.b s Biology 1 Lab Horticulture 1 .... Ap Agl04 4-5 Chemistry 2 Lab.b s Biology I Lab..... Ap 5-6 Ap, Applied Science; S, Science. FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE INFORMATION FOR STUDENTS IN AGRICULTURE The degrees offered in this faculty are: Bachelor of Science in Agriculture (B.S.A.) and Master of Science in Agriculture (M.S.A.). Courses of Study Five distinct lines of study are offered, as follows: (1.) A Four-year Course leading to the Degree of Bachelor of Science in Agriculture (B.S.A.). (2.) A One-year Occupational Course in which the basic work is in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture, and Poultry Husbandry, leading to a Diploma in Agriculture. (3.) A series of Short Courses at the University, in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and Poultry Husbandry. (4.) Extension Courses at different points in the Province. (5.) Graduate work in Agriculture, leading to the degree, M.S.A. Course Leading to the Degree of B.S.A. Students in Agriculture are required to have Junior Matriculation or its equivalent before entering upon this course (see "Matriculation Requirements"). The degree of B.S.A. is granted only after the successful completion of four years of lecture and laboratory work. The course is planned for students who wish to obtain a practical and scientific knowledge of Agriculture, either as a basis for demonstration and teaching, or as an aid to success in farm management. The Occupational Course The Occupational Course is planned for those students whose academic qualifications are not high, but whose practical 230 Faculty of Agriculture qualifications are satisfactory. The course permits of work in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Poultry Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture, Farm Management and Marketing on the part of those who wish to extend their practical knowledge. A successful completion of the course leads to a Diploma in Agriculture. Matriculation standing for entrance is not required. A printed descriptive folder giving further details of this course may be secured on application to the Registrar, University of British Columbia. Short Courses The Short Courses are planned for those men and women who are unable to take advantage of the longer courses, but who desire to extend their knowledge of agriculture in one or more of those branches in which they are particularly interested. The work throughout is intensely practical. Illustrative material and periods devoted to demonstration and judging work are strong features of the course. No entrance examination is required, nor are students asked to write an examination at the conclusion of the course. Special announcements giving details of the various divisions of the course are issued in December of each year, and may be obtained from the Registrar on application. Extension Courses In order to reach those engaged in Agriculture who are not able to avail themselves of the Winter Courses given at the University, the Faculty of Agriculture offers extension Bhort courses in various centres throughout the Province. These courses are of at least four days' duration, are proceeded with according to a definite time-table, and include lectures and demonstrations in connection with the work of each department of the Faculty. Detailed programmes are prepared to suit the specific centres, and requests for such courses may be addressed to the Registrar. (Not offered in 1927-28.) Courses in Agriculture 231 Graduate Work For regulations, see page 236. CURRICULUM Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period of not less than two or more than three hours) per week throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent laboratory periods) throughout a single term. The first two years of work leading to the degree in Agriculture are devoted to acquiring a knowledge of the basic sciences upon which Agriculture rests, in adding to the student's knowledge of language, and in laying a foundation for more advanced studies in practical and scientific Agriculture. The Third Year is devoted largely, and the Fourth Year almost wholly, to courses in Applied Agriculture. Except under special circumstances, students under the age of seventeen will not be eligible for registration. Specialization will begin at the commencement of the Third Year. Students who have not had at least one full season's practical farm experience will be required to obtain this preliminary training before registering for the Third Year. First Year Units Agronomy (1 and 2) 3 Animal Husbandry (1 and 4) 3 Biology 1 3 Chemistry 1 3 English 1 3 The first course in a language offered for Matriculation 3 Total required 18 232 Faculty op Agriculture Second Year Units Poultry Husbandry 1 IV2 Horticulture 1 l1/^ Dairying 1 IV2 Botany 1 3 Zoology 1 3 English 2 3 Bacteriology 1 2 Chemistry 2 3 Total required 18^ Third and Fourth Years On account of the specialized types of farming which must necessarily be followed in many parts of British Columbia, the work in the Third and Fourth Years leading to the degree of B.S.A. has been arranged in major courses so as to admit of a measure of specialization in one of the several recognized branches of Agriculture. At the same time all courses have been so arranged that every student will get the basic work in all lines no matter what option is chosen. Prior to the beginning of the Third Year every student must indicate in which one of the major options he wishes to continue his study, and shall arrange his elective courses with the approval of the Head of the Department in which he is majoring, and in consultation with the Heads of other Departments directly concerned. A thesis shall be prepared by each student on some topic, the subject of which shall be selected, with the approval of the Head of the Department in which the student is majoring, before the end of the Third Year's work. Two typewritten copies of each thesis on standard-sized paper (8V2 in- hy 11 in.) shall be submitted on or before the 1st of April in the graduating year. Agricultural students are required to take a total of 35 units, thesis included, in their Third and Fourth Years. Courses in Agriculture 233 Third Year (Required subjects) Units Economics 1 3 Chemistry (Special Course) 3 (for all except Dairy Students) Principles of Heredity—Biology 2 1 Total required 7 Fourth Year (Required subjects) I Units Agricultural Economics iy2 Thesis 3 Total required 4y^ Agronomy Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2 Systematic Entomology—Zoology 4 2 Economic Entomology—Zoology 7 2 •Total 13 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above iy2 Animal Husbandry 9 iy2 •Total 6 * Students are required, with the advice and consent of the Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18 units. 234 Faculty op Agriculture Animal Husbandry Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 •Total 7 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4*/2 Agronomy 7 iy2 •Total 6 Dairying Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 4 Chemistry 3 3 •Total 7 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4y2 Civil Engineering (Special) 1 Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2 Dairy Chemistry 2 •Total 9y2 * Students are required, with the advice and consent of the Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 1& units. Courses in Agriculture 235 Horticulture Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 Plant Physiology—Botany 3 2 Systematic Entomology—Zoology 4 2 Economic Entomology—Zoology 7 2 •Total 13 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4^2 Plant Pathology—Botany 6 (c) 2 • Total Y2 Poultry Husbandry Major Third Year ^ Units Required subjects, as above 7 •Total : 7 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4% •Total iy2 Botany (Plant Pathology) Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 •Total T~ * Students are required, with the advice and consent of the Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18 units. 236 Faculty op Agriculture Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above iy2 •Total 4% Zoology (Entomology) Major Third Year Units Required subjects, as above 7 •Total 7 Fourth Year Units Required subjects, as above 4% * Total 4*£ COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.S.A. 1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Science in Agriculture (M.S.A.) must hold a bachelor's degree from this University, or its equivalent. 2. A graduate of another university applying for permission to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his application an official statement of his graduation together with a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. 3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records who proceed to the master's degree shall be required: (a.) To spend at least one year in resident graduate study; or * Students are required, with the advice and consent of the Head of the Department, to elect up to a total of from 15 to 18 units. Examinations and Advancement 237 (b.) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned): (i.) To do two or more years of private work under the supervision of the University, such work to be equivalent to one year of graduate study; or (ii.) To do one year of private work under University supervision and one term of resident graduate study, the total of such work to be equivalent to one year of resident graduate study. 4. Students doing tutorial work shall not be. allowed to come up for final examination in less than two academic years after registration as M.S.A. students. 1 ^ 5. One major and one minor shall be required. Candidates may select their minor in another Faculty. 6. (a.) A thesis must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject. (b.) Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required. 7. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-sized thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.") 8. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be made to the Registrar by October 15th. (See schedule of fees.) Examinations and Advancement 1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students, are held in December and in April. Applications for special consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close of the examination period. In cases where illness is the pleai for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented. 238 Faculty op Agriculture 2. In the First and Second years candidates taking a full course will not be considered as having passed unless they obtain at least 40 per cent, on each subject and 50 per cent, on the aggregate. In the Third and Fourth years candidates will not be considered as having passed unless they obtain at least 50 per cent, on each subject and at least 60 per cent, on all subjects of the Department in which the student is majoring. Candidates taking less than a full course (15 units) must obtain at least 50 per cent, on each subject of the First and Second years, and at least 60 per cent, on each subject of the Third and Fourth years. Students taking work in the Summer Session will not be considered as having passed unless they obtain 50 per cent, or more in each subject. 3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. 4. If a student's general standing in the final examinations of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such examinations have been granted. 5. Supplemental examinations will be held in September and will not be granted at any other time, except by special permission of the Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper. 6. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees) must be in the hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date set for the examinations. 7. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 3 units of the preceding year, nor with any supplemental examination outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year or of Matriculation unless special permission to do so is granted by Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty Examinations and Advancement 239 is satisfied that the failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations had an adequate cause. 8. A student may not continue in a later year any subject in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the Second Year. 9. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat his year may, on application in writing, be exempted by the Faculty from attending lectures and passing examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least Second Class standing. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year. 10. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to withdraw from the University. 11. Any student whose academic record, as determined by the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding. 12. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English, and, in this event, students will be required to pass a special examination in English to be set by the Department of English. 240 Faculty op Agriculture COURSES IN AGRICULTURE Department of Agronomy Professor: P. A. Boving. Associate Professor: G. G. Moe. Assistant Professor: D. G. Laird. Assistant: G. B. Boving. 1. Soil and Soil Fertility.—An examination will be made of the more important soil types; cultivation, manuring, and rotation of crops will be studied in their relation to soil productivity; methods of treatment will be observed, and the principles under lying soil management and improvement will constitute the basis for subsequent courses in Agronomy. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, First Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. Laird. iy2 units. 2. Field Crops.—This course embraces a study of the most important grain, corn, forage, and root crops. A detailed study of the crops, in the field and in the laboratory, will supplement the lecture work in order to give the student a comprehensive idea, not only of the different phases of crop production, but also of the relative value of separate specimens and samples. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, First Year. Mr. Moe, Mr. G. B. Boving. iy2 units. 3. Seed Growing.—This course deals with the production and marketing of vegetable, root, clover, and grass seeds. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. G. B. Boving. iy2 units. 4. Field Crops (Advanced).—Course 4 constitutes a more detailed study of field crops than was possible in Course 2. It also embraces special lecture and laboratory work on the harvesting, threshing, cleaning, storing, and marketing of our ordinary field crops. The two courses combined will give the student a more complete understanding of the various factors bearing upon the production of a first-class article, whether intended for sale or for feeding. Agronomy 241 One lecture and one laboratory per week. First and Second Terms, Third Year. Mr. Moe. 2 units. 5. Economics of Crop Production.—This course embraces a study of the selecting, planning, and operating of a farm. Various conditions, systems and practices prevailing on the American Continent and in Europe will be discussed and compared. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. P. A. Boving, Mr. Laird. 1% units. 6. Field-crop Judging. — The judging and handling of grains, grasses, forage and root crops will be taken up in the field as well as in the laboratory. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Moe. V/2 units. 7. Soil Management. — Different systems of cultivation, rotation, manuring and irrigation, as practised in Canada and elsewhere, will be discussed, and the influence of these factors on the maintenance or exhaustion of soil fertility will be studied. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Laird. IV2 units. 8. Plant-breeding. — This course is planned to follow Biology 2. With this as a basis, the course is designed to illustrate and explain the breeding of field crops. One lecture and two laboratories per week. Second Terra, Fourth Year. Mr. Moe. iy2 units. 9. Field Experiments. — The scope, the methods and the interpretation of field experiments will be discussed, and a study will be made of the more important results obtained in different parts of the world. Two lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Laird. 1 unit. 10. Thesis. 3 units. 11. Crop Adaptation and Distribution (Crop Ecology).— The relation of field crops to elevation, climate and soils will be 242 Faculty op Agriculture studied in order to give the student a comprehensive idea of the distribution of crops and the adaptation of various types to different parts of the world. One lecture per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Moe. y2 unit. 12. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) 13. Soil Bacteriology.—Laboratory and lecture course, in which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility. Text: Lohnis and Fred, Agricultural Bacteriology, latest edition, McGraw-Hill. Prerequisites: Bact. 1, Agronomy 1. J Five hours per week. First Term. I . Mr. Laird. 2 units. Students majoring in Agronomy are required to work one summer under the direction of the Department. Department of Animal Husbandry Professor: H. M. King. Assistant Professor: R. L. Davis. Assistant Professor: H. R. Hare. Lecturer in Veterinary Science: J. G. Jervis. 1. Market Classes and Grades of Live Stock.—A study of the characteristics and requirements of the various market classes and grades of beef cattle, dairy cattle, horses, sheep, swine and goats. Texts: Vaughan, Types and Market Classes of Live Stock. Plumb, Judging Farm Animals. Three laboratories per week. First Term, First Year. Mr. King, Mr. Davis, Mr. Hare. iy2 units. 2. Breeds of Cattle. — A study of the origin, history of development, characteristics, and adaptations of the breeds of cattle. Students are required to make several trips to leading herds in the Province. Animal Husbandry 243 Text: Plumb, Types and Breeds of Farm Animals. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1. Three laboratories per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. King, Mr. Davis. IV2 units. 3. Breeds of Horses, Sheep, Swine and Goats.—A study of the origin, history of development, characteristics, and adaptations of the breeds of horses, sheep, swine and goats. Text: Plumb, Types and Breeds of Farm Animals. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1. Two laboratories per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Davis, Mr. King. 1 unit. 4. Live-stock Feeding and Management.—The feeding, care, and management from birth to maturity of the various types of live stock. Text: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding, abridged edition. Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 1. Three lectures per week. Second Term, First Year. Mr. Davis, Mr. King, Mr. Hare. iy2 units. 5. Advanced Judging.—A continuation of the type of work represented in the laboratory of Animal Husbandry 2 and 3. Designed to strengthen Animal Husbandry students in the selection of herd sires, foundation breeding herds, and in the building up of superior flocks and herds. Special work in the fitting and handling of live stock is presented. Students are required to make several trips to leading herds in the Province. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3. Three laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Davis, Mr. King. iy2 units. 6. Live-stock Breeding. — A study of the principles of breeding in their application to live-stock development and improvement. Text: Rice, Breeding and Improvement of Farm Animals. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3 and Biology 2. Two lectures per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Davis. 1 unit. 244 Faculty op Agriculture 7. Herd, Flock and Stud-book Study.—An advanced course in the study of the principal breeds of live stock, familiarizing the student with the leading sires, dams, families, and herds of the various breeds, and the blood lines entering into their formation. Emphasis will be placed upon a study of pedigrees. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 2 and 3. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. King, Mr. Davis. iy2 units. 8. Nutrition. — A study of the elements and compounds important to animal nutrition and their relation to the animal organism; the digestive system; the digestion, absorption, assimilation, and disposition of food materials. A study of the various feedstuffs. Texts: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding. Armsby, Animal Nutrition. Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Davis. 1 unit. (Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.) 9. Animal Feeding.—The feeding of all classes of live stock, having distinct regard to the economic problems confronting the breeder and the producer. Text: Henry and Morrison, Feeds and Feeding. Three lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Davis, Mr. King, Mr. Hare. IV2 units. (Not offered in 1927-28.) 10. Markets and Marketing.—A careful study of the markets with their requirements for live stock and live-stock products, and the relation which these bear to production. Marketing of breeding stock. Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. King. 1 unit. (Not offered in 1927-28.) 11. Thesis. 3 units. 12. Live-stock Practice and Seminar.—Every Animal Husbandry student is required to spend the summer months between Dairying 245 the Third and Fourth Years on an approved live-stock farm and to present a written report upon his summer's work before entering upon the Second Term of the Fourth Year. Open only to students majoring in Animal Husbandry. A seminar of one hour per week for the special study of current problems and literature is held. Mr. King. iy2 units. 13. Livestock Farm and Ranch Management.—The management of the range, ranch, and farm for the production of live stock. Texts: Potter, Western Live Stock Management. Sampson, Farm and Range Management. Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 12. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. King, Mr. Hare. ' iy2 units. (Not offered in 1927-28.) 14. Veterinary Science.—A study of the common diseases of horses, cattle, sheep, swine and goats; their causes, prevention, and treatment. Prerequisites: Animal Husbandry 1 and 4. Three lectures per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. Jervis. iy2 units. (Not offered in 1927-28.) 15. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) Department of Dairying Professor: Wilfrid Sadler. Associate Professor: N. S. Golding. Assistant: J. D. Middlemas. 1. Elementary Dairying.—An elementary course of lectures on the principles underlying the successful practice of dairying. Laboratory work on the control of milk, the preparation of dairy products, the judging of the same, and the methods of testing adopted. 246 Faculty op Agriculture Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Second Year. Mr. Golding, Mr. Sadler. iy2 units. 2. Farm Cheese-making. — Principles and practices of cheese-making, hard-pressed, blue-veined, and soft; the making of cheese on the farm; a general knowledge required of the principal varieties of each class of cheese, and laboratory practice in the making of standard varieties. This course is offered in the Third Year or Fourth Year to students other than those who propose to major in Dairying. One lecture and two laboratories per week for one term. iy2 units. (Not offered in 1927-28.) 3. Dairy Bacteriology.—The bacteriology of milk, and milk products; sources of bacteria in milk, number and varieties; influence of time, temperature, etc., on these; methods of culture and isolation; fermentation of milk, lactic, butyric, peptonizing, gaseous, ropy, etc.; relation of milk to spread of tuberculosis, typhoid fever, and other diseases; pasteurization and sterilization of milk; certified milk and bacterial standards applied to milk; relation of bacteria to cream, butter-making and butter; control of bacteria in relation to milk and milk products. Two lectures and two laboratories per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. Sadler. 2 units. 4. Creamery Butter-making. — Creamery butter-making- grading of cream; treatment and preparation of cream for butter-making; pasteurization; manufacture of creamery butter; judging, grading, and marketing of butter. Prerequisite: Dairying 3. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. Golding, iy2 units. 5. Market Milk.—The hygienic aspect of milk production; the bacterial quality of machine-drawn versus hand-drawn milk; certified milk; handling and management of milk for city consumption; grading of milk on bacterial standards; pasteurization; transportation and distribution of milk; ordinances and Dairying 247 regulations concerning the sale of milk. This course will include laboratory work in dairy bacteriology, practice in the dairy, and visits to selected farms and milk distributing depots. One lecture and two laboratories per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Sadler, Mr. Golding. iy2 units. 6. Cheese and Cheese-making.—This course deals with the principles and practices of cheese-making — hard-pressed, blue- veined, and soft. Offered to those majoring in Dairying. Two lectures and two laboratories per week. Fourth Year. Mr. Golding. 4 units. 7. Dairy Bacteriology. — Qualitative and quantitative bacteriological analysis of market milk, condensed milk, milk powder, cream, butter, and cheese; bacterial changes in storage butter; ripening of cheese. Opportunities are presented for exercising bacterial control of the various processes carried out in the dairy laboratory. Offered to those majoring in Dairying. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Sadler. iy2 units. 8. Testing of Milk and Dairy Products. — The testing of milk, cream, butter, and cheese; the selling of milk and cream on the butter-fat basis; causes of variation in butter-fat content. One lecture-laboratory per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Golding. y2 unit. (Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.) 9. Dairy Buildings and Equipment.—Buildings suitable for handling of milk and manufacturing of dairy products; their situation, construction, arrangement; equipment of farm dairies, creameries, and cheese-factories. This course includes detailed studies of selected buildings. One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. 1 unit. (Not offered in 1927-28.) 248 Faculty op Agriculture 10. The Judging and Grading of Milk and Milk Products.— Offered to students of the Senior Year. Mr. Golding, Mr. Sadler. iy2 units. (Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.) 11. Thesis. ' 3 units. 12. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) Department of Horticulture Professor: F. M. Clement. A Professor: A. F. Barss. Assistant Professor: F. E. Buck. Assistant: John C. Wilcox. 1. Principles of Horticulture. — A study of the principles involved in the selection, propagation, planting, and general care of the more important fruits, vegetables, flowers and ornamental trees and shrubs, with sufficient practice to enable a student to care for the home plantings. This course is designed to meet the needs of all students in Agriculture, giving them a general knowledge of Horticultural Crops. At the same time the work is fundamental for students who are planning to take further courses in Horticulture. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Second Year. Mr. Barss, Mr. Buck. iy2 units. 3. Practical Pomology. — A detailed study of the best methods in Orchard Management with field practice in various orchard operations, such as planting, pruning, and spraying. The course also deals with the culture of small fruits. Two lectures and two laboratories per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Barss. 2 units. 4. Plant Propagation and Nursery Practice.—This course deals with the methods used in propagating plants, including budding and grafting; and with Commercial Nursery practices. One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Buck. 1 unit. Horticulture 249 5. Commercial Pomology.—A study of the problems connected with the handling of fruits and vegetables!—harvesting, grading, packing, shipping, storing, marketing; packing and storage houses; marketing associations; costs of production and marketing. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Barss. iy2 units. (Not offered in 1927-28.) 6. Systematic Pomology.—A course in description, identification, classification, displaying, and judging of fruits. The course also includes a certain amount of work in Systematic Olericulture. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Buck, Mr. Barss. iy2 units. (Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.) 7. Practical Vegetable Gardening.—A study of the problems connected with the commercial growing of vegetables, including the selection of a location, soil requirements, fertilizing, irrigating, and special cultural methods for the more important vegetables. This course also deals with the construction of hot-beds, cold-frames, greenhouses, and their management in the forcing of vegetable crops. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Buck. iy2 units. (Not offered in 1927-28.) 8. Special Horticulture.—A course for the study of special branches of Commercial Horticulture, including the manufacture of horticultural products, such as canned fruits, dried products, jams, jellies, and fruit juices. Two lectures per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Barss. 1 unit. (Open to Third Year Students in 1927-28.) 9. Horticultural Problems.—An introduction to the study of problems in Horticulture, including the breeding of Horticultural crops, variety adaptations, and methods of research, 250 Faculty op Agriculture together with a review of Horticultural investigational work in other institutions. There will also be practice in outlining investigations, and in preparing reports. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Barss. V/2 units. 10. Landscape Gardening and Floriculture. — The course aims to give the student a working knowledge of the selection, planting and care of ornamental plants—trees, shrubs, and flowers; with the principles for the improvement of home grounds, school grounds, city streets, and parks. The course includes practice in identification of plant materials; also practice in making of planting plans. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Buck. ^ iy2 units. 11. Thesis. 3 units. 12. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) Department of Poultry Husbandry Professor: E. A. Lloyd. Assistant Professor: V. S. Asmundson. Assistant: W. J. Riley. 1. General.—Fundamentals of poultry-keeping, including breeds, breeding, judging, selection, culling, feeds, feeding, incubation, brooding, poultry-house construction, killing, egg- grading, marketing, sanitation and hygiene, diseases, general management. The regular laboratory exercises are supplemented by practice work in the feeding and care of poultry flocks. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. First Term, Second Year. Mr. Lloyd. IV2 units. 2. Markets and Marketing.—Marketing conditions for poultry products in British Columbia. The relation of the home market to outside markets. Canadian Egg Marketing Regulations. Provincial Egg Acts and Regulations. Egg-grading, care, Poultry Husbandry 251 packing, storing, selling. Fattening poultry for market; killing, packing, storing, selling. Production and sale of high-class breeding stock for local demand and export trade. Advertising. Principles and practice of marketing, private and co-operative. Study of prices. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Third Year. Mr. Lloyd. iy2 units. 3. Incubation and Brooding.—Selection and care of hatching eggs. Shipping hatching eggs. Natural incubation. Artificial incubation. Types of incubators. Natural brooding. Artificial brooding. Rearing, including systems of management, housing, feeding and training chicks. Brooding equipment. Practice in operating incubators and brooders. ^* Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 1. ^ One lecture and two laboratories and practice per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Asmundson. iy2 units. 4. (a) Breeds and Breeding.—The breeds of poultry; their history, origin and economic qualities. The principles of breeding as applied to Poultry Husbandry. Breeding records. Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 1 and Biology 2. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Third Year. Mr. Asmundson. iy2 units. 4. (6) Advanced Breeding.—Breeding for egg and meat production. Statistical study of production records. Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 4. One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit. 5. (a) Poultry Management.—Types of poultry farms and their respective problems. Farm layouts. Economy of investment of capital in land, buildings, stock and equipment. Efficiency in breeds, maintenance, labor, housing, feeding, production and personnel. Marketing. Farm income, labor income and profit as based on University survey. Studies of individual farms for criticism. One lecture and two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Riley. V/2 units. 252 Faculty op Agriculture 5. (6) Advanced Farm Management.—Continuation of Poultry 5, with more detailed study of surveys and cost account records to determine labor income and profits.. Inventory valuations. Special study of disease problems. Estimates on cost of developing poultry farms. Efficiency factors. Costs of production. One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Riley. ' 1 unit. 6. Diseases, Housing and Hygiene.—Common ailments of poultry and their treatment. Parasites. Infectious and contagious diseases of poultry and chicks, turkeys, geese and ducks Autopsies. Dissection. Poultry-house construction, building sites, types, costs and uses. Yarding. Sanitation and hygiene. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd, Mr. Asmundson. iy2 units. 7. (a) Feeding Management.—Feeding growing stock, laying hens, breeding males and females, turkeys, ducks and geese. Use of lights. Study of standard methods of routine management. Prerequisite: Animal Husbandry 8. Two lectures per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit. 7. (b) Poultry Rations.—Application of the facts revealed by studies in nutrition to the compounding of rations for poultry. Study of feed mixtures. Problems and assigned reading. Prerequisite: Poultry Husbandry 7 (a). One lecture and one laboratory per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. 1 unit. 8. Seminar.—Poultry literature. Reports on current events. Research and experimental problems. Preparation of reports and bulletins. Export trade. Advertising and other economic propaganda. One lecture per week. Three hours practice per week. Second Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Lloyd. 1 unit. Agricultural Economics 253 9. Judging and Selection.—Judging according to standard. Changes induced by egg production. Characteristics of layers. Selection for egg production. Selection for meat production. Two laboratories per week. First Term, Fourth Year. Mr. Asmundson. .1 unit. 10. Thesis. 3 Units. 11. Research (Directed). 3 units. (Not required of Undergraduates.) AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS Dean Clement. A. Farm Organization and Management.—This is a lecture and laboratory course, based on a detailed study of five hundred farms in British Columbia, as recorded on the Farm Survey Sheets. References and assigned readings. Two lectures and one laboratory per week. Fall Term. The Staff. iy2 units B. Agricultural Economics and Marketing.—Some applications of the principles of Economics and Marketing to Agriculture. Required of all students in the Occupational Course, but not open for credit to degree students. Text: Carver, Elements of Rural Economics, Ginn. Three lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Clement. iy2 units. 1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economics as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural problem, and some special topics, such as the agricultural surplus, production in relation to population growth, the farm income and the share of agriculture in the national income. Text: Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan. References and assigned readings from! Grey, Carver, Nourse, and others. Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units. 254 Faculty op Agriculture 2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to the individual farm and to Agriculture as a whole. The general principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements, co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat, fruit, and milk in Canada. Texts: Brown, Marketing, Harper and Brothers. • Mackintosh, Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada. Ryerson Press, Toronto. References and assigned readings from Macklin, Hibbard, Boyle, Benton, and others. Three lectures per week. Mr. Clement. 3 units. Note:—Where courses other than those listed under Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture, Poultry Husbandry and Agricultural Economics are mentioned, the student will please refer to outlines of courses in Arts and Science or Applied Science. List op Students 255 LIST OF STUDENTS IN ATTENDANCE, SESSION 1926-27 FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE Fibst Yeak Full Undergraduates Name. Home Addren. Abernethy, E. Frances Vancouver Ades, Jessie J Vancouver Adey, Jessie J Sandwick Alderson, Eva M Vancouver Alexander, Charles F Vancouver Alexander, Kenneth F Fernie Andrews, Herbert Fernie Arbuthnot, Leland C Vancouver Archibald, Reginald MacG Vancouver Armstrong, L. Gwendolyn New Westminster Arnold, Eleanor Glen North Vancouver Ashby, Barbara M Vancouver Asquith, Richard L New Westminster Austin, Ernest Vancouver Bailey, Myrtle A. H Vancouver Baker, Maurice G Vancouver Baker, Russell Vancouver Balkwill, Mildred C Vancouver Ballentine, George Van N Vancouver Ballentine, Helen M Vancouver Balneaves, Chrissie J Vancouver Barnes, Elmer G Vancouver Barratt, Herbert J Vancouver Barratt, Philip S Vancouver Bates, Freda A Gifford Baynes, George E Vancouver Beacham, Frances H Vancouver Beamish, W. Randolph New Westminster Bell, Helen V Hollybnm Bennett, Ruth M Vancouver Best, Vincent G. O Ganges Bingay, Marjorie W Trail Birch, Robert H New Westminster Black, Peter T Prince Rupert Black, Ross M Kelowna Booth, Constance M. Vancouver Boothroyd, Gordon G Surrey Centre Borthwick, Winifred Vancouver Bowden, J. Rosina New Westminster Bowen, Marjorie M Vancouver Bowering, Fred. N. Vancouver Bowness, Warren H Cranbrook Brankin, Gladys M Port Coquitlam Breger, Bertha M Vancouver Bridgman, Erica M North Vancouver Briggs, S. Isabelle Vancouver 256 The University op British Columbia Name. Home Addreti. Brock, David H Vancouver Brookes, Mary Vancouver Brown Brenton S Vancouver Brown, Louise D Vancouver Brown, Mary L Vancouver Brown, Ralph MacL Vancouver Brydone-Jack, Margaret A Vancouver Buckworth, Dorothy G Vancouver Burchell, William U Vancouver Burdett, Winnifred Kimberley Burns, Ronald M Vancouver Burton, Margaret Mel Vancouver Cameron, James E Vancouver Cameron, Manly Vancouver Campbell, Allan C Vancouver Campbell, Cherry Stewart Campbell, J. Kenneth Prince George Campbell, Marion I Abbotsford Campbell, Mary E Vancouver Carre, Stephen N Vancouver Cather, E. Gwendolyn Vancouver Chalmers, Thomas M Burnaby Chambers, Robert C North Vancouver Chapman, Maxine F Trail Chapman, Robert J New Westminster Chenier, M. Josephine Vancouver Chin, George H Vancouver Christie, Jean S , New Westminster Clark, Gordon A. Port Moody Clayton, John N. C Vancouver Clifford, Octavia M Vancouver Clugston, M. Irene Vancouver Coles, Albert E Vancouver Colledge, M. Elaine Vancouver Collier, Sarah I Chilliwack Collinson, Carl A Lloydminster, Sask. Conlan. Jack R Vancouver Cook, Helen A North Vancouver Coope, Margaret Berkeley, Calif. Copeland, Van Potter New Westminster Cornish, Naomi H Hollyburn, W. Van. Crawford, Elmer J Oyama Crawford, Muriel M Stewart Creamer, Wm Burnaby Creelman, Arthur G. North Vancouver Creelman, Lyle M Steveston Creighton, George L. D Vancouver Crosby, Helen J Vancouver Cross, Frank New Westminster Crowe, M. Loraine Vancouver Cull, F. Edna ... Vancouver Cupit, Ernest H Vancouver Dadson, Edith G Vancouver Darough, Neil W Chilliwack List of Students 257 Name. Home Addret: Davis, Beatrice E Vancouver Dawe, Harold J. F New Westminster Dawson, N. Elliott Vancouver De Bou, Bernice I Vancouver Dewar, Dorothy G Revelstoke Dick, Margaret B Vancouver Dickie, Frances O Vancouver Dillabough, Alice E Vancouver Dobie, C. Jean New Westminster Dobson, B. Jean L Vancouver Dobson, Wm. Kenneth A Oyama Doheny, Marie G. Vancouver Doherty, Robert S Vancouver Dow, Marion E Vancouver Dowler, David R Vancouver Downing, Dorothy M Vancouver Duckering, Margaret G Vancouver Duncan, Campbell Vancouver Dunham, Burtt Abbotsford Dunham, Charles B Vancouver Dunlap, Francis A New Westminster Elliot, John A. F Savona English, Lloyd E Vancouver Etherington, Dorothy E New Westminster Etter, Georgina M Vancouver Fairley, J. Jeckell Vancouver Fawcett, Fairvan C Vancouver Fenner, J. May Vancouver Fernlund, Holger B Vancouver Fisher, Elizabeth M Vancouver Fisher, J. Frederick Eburne Fladgate, F. Wm. G Vancouver Fleck, William J Agassiz Fletcher, Lucy Vancouver Follick, Clifton R. Vancouver Forsyth, Agnes J Vancouver Fraser, Stewart T Vancouver Fraser, T. Clyde Vancouver Freeman, Helen Vancouver Freeman, Ida C Vancouver French, Norma E. Princeton Gale, Myrtle G Vancouver Gallagher, J. Wilfred Vancouver Gardner, J. Smith Nakusp Garratt, H. Jean Vancouver Garratt, Morley W Vancouver Gaudin, Melvin L New Westminster Gaul, Katharine L. C Vancouver Gavin; Harold D New Westminster Gavin, Mary F Burnaby Gilbert, Ernest W Ladner Gillespie, Charlotte R. L Vancouver Gilley, H. Frances New Westminster Gillies, Eleanor M. D Vancouver 258 The University op British Columbia Name. Home Address. Goard, Dean H Vancouver Godfrey, Margaret B. Vancouver Gourlay, Jessie M Vancouver Govenlock, H. Elizabeth Vancouver Grant, Donald E. New Westminster Grant, Jessie M. C Vancouver Grant, Marion R Vancouver Gray, Kenneth R Vancouver Gray, Roland C. V New Westminster Green, Andrew North Vancouver Green, Maxwell L New Westminster Greenwood, F. Marjorie Vancouver Grimmett, Frederic K Merritt Grossman, Peter F Chilliwack Gustafson, Y. Eric Penticton Hacking, Catherine L Vancouver Hale, J. Stewart North Vancouver Hallonguist, Frank W New Westminster Hamilton, Norval E Vancouver Hamilton, Rognvald T Vancouver Hanes, F. E. Evelyn North Vancouver Hanna, Wm. Clarence E New Westminster Harbord Harbord, Patrick R. D New Westminster Hardy, Ella New Westminster Hardy, Walter T Vancouver Harris, Irene M West Summerland Hart, Harold W Vancouver Harvey, G. Lloyd Vancouver Harvie, M. Muriel Vancouver Haslett, Thomas A Ocean Falls Ha worth, Lilian New Westminster Helliwell, Hilary R. B Vancouver Helmer, Cecil D Vancouver Hemsworth, Frederick J Vancouver Henderson, E. Ruth Vancouver Henderson, Gibb G. Vancouver Henderson, Jean A. B Vancouver Henderson, Margaret H. T Vancouver Henderson, Percy H Vancouver Hill, Dorothy R Vancouver Hillier, Wm. Vibert Vancouver Hilton, Freda S Port Alberni Hodnett, Lisle Vancouver Holliday, Celia M North Vancouver Holloway, M. Emily Vancouver Holmes, A. Constance Vancouver Holt, Barbara New Westminster Horn, Howard J Vancouver Horton, Dorothy A Vancouver Horton, R. Donald Vancouver Horton, Ruby J Vancouver How, L. Kathleen Vancouver Hudson, Gertrude M Vancouver Hughes, Kathleen R North Vancouver List op Students 259 Name. Home Addret: Hughes, Norah L Abbotsford Ingraham, Kathleen A Vancouver Inkster, Joseph D Vancouver Inouye, Kuramitsu Vancouver Ireland, Elizabeth B. W Vancouver Irvine, Margaret C New Westminster Irvine, Margaret S Fernie Irwin, Wallace S Irwin Itter, Stuart Vancouver Jackson, Roscoe A Hollyburn James, Albert H Vancouver James, Bessie M Vancouver Jamieson, Gerald C Vancouver Jenkins, F. Norman Oyama Johnson, A. Harry Vancouver Johnson, Daniel E Ocean Falls Johnson, Florence B Vancouver Johnson, James R Revelstoke Johnson, Thelma H. C Vancouver Johnston, Annette E Vancouver Johnstone, Havelock H Rossland Jones, Charles Vancouver Jones, F. Oulton Vancouver Keeling, F. Temple New Westminster Keenleyside, E. Wm. Irvine Vancouver Keillor, Dorothy E Vancouver Kelly, Eric Vancouver Kennett, William T. E Vancouver Kershaw, Ernest McD Ladner Kidd, Kathleen M Burnaby King, Everett H Burnaby Kinninmont, Russell J North Vancouver Knudsen, Catherine M New Westminster Kokoros, Antonio Vancouver Kolle, William J. Vancouver Kuwabara, Hiro Vancouver Lamb, Margaret B Vancouver Lambert, Jennie I Vancouver Lang, George W. Vancouver Lang, S. Howard Vancouver Larbalester, Beatrice M New Westminster Latimer, Edgar C Burnaby Layman, Donald L Vancouver Lazarus, Louise J Vancouver Leach, D. John Vancouver Leach, Jean F. M Vancouver Leard, Ralph M Wardner Leatherdale, Donald A Vancouver Lehrman, K. Marguerite Vancouver Leslie, Jean O'Dell Los Angeles, Calif. Lewis, Dorothy S Vancouver Linfield, Arthur G Vancouver Lister, C. Louise Vancouver Loch, Margaret S Vancouver 260 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Lough, Dallas E Vancouver Madigan, Stephen E. Vancouver Mahon, Thelma H. Vancouver Malcolm, Olive M. C Vancouver Martin, Kenneth W Vancouver Mason, Ralph P * Vancouver Masterson, Robert V New Westminster Mathers, Alice Vancouver Matthews, Edith L Grand Forks Mathews, J. Donald Vancouver Mayers, E. Wallace New Westminster Mayers, R. J. Neville Vancouver Menten, R. Claire New Westminster Merrin, Violet B Vancouver Merryfield, Basil Vancouver Merry weather, Barbara J Vancouver Miles, L. Chester Vancouver Millar, Alexander M Vancouver Millar, Edith K. Vancouver Millerd, Muriel F Vancouver Milligan, Annie Ocean Falls Mitchell, Alexander S Prince Rupert Mitchell, James A. Wellington Moffatt, Donald W. Vancouver Moffatt, Ethel G. Vancouver Moncrieff, Ann Alice Vancouver Moncrieff, C. May Vancouver Monroe, J. Lewis Vancouver Moore, Alexander L. Vancouver Moore, Mildred I Vancouver Moore, Sanderson E Vancouver Morell, Douglas L Vancouver Morgan, Edward H. Vancouver Morris, Rhoda A J. Vancouver Morrison, Clarke Van Vancouver Morrison, Malcolm C Vancouver Mulholland, Georgina R. Vancouver Muncey, Neenah M , Vancouver Murray, Mae M. Vancouver Murray, Walter A Vancouver McAfee, Jessie A. Georgetown Mills McAlister, Louise M Vancouver McCharles, Donalda M Vancouver McColl, Edythe M North Vancouver McConnachie, Archibald Vancouver McConnell, Elsie A. Vancouver McConnochie, Ralph A. Vancouver McCormack, D. Gordon New Westminster McCormick, C. Marjorie K. New Westminster McCormick, Henrietta I New Westminster McCreery, Frances E Vancouver McDiarmid, Donald S Trail MacDonald, Everett J Vancouver MacDonald, Helen L. Vancouver List of Students 261 Name. Home Address. McDonald, M. Frances Vancouver McDougald, Donald L Vancouver McDowell, Ethel F Vancouver McEwen, Enid C New Westminster McEwen, Theodore S New Westminster McGougan, Jean North Vancouver McGregor, Malcolm F Vancouver Mcintosh, D. Arnold D Vancouver Macintosh, Jean Vancouver Mclntyre, Douglas F Vancouver Maclver, Dorothy Vancouver McKay, Georgie A Vancouver McKay, Marjorie Vancouver McKee, Kenneth M. Vancouver McKee, M. Ruth Vancouver McKellar, Andrew Vancouver McKenzie, Betty C Vancouver McKenzie, Lillian B Vancouver McKeown, Olive E New Westminster Mackillop, Katherine R Vancouver McKinnon, Gertrude M Vancouver MacKinnon, Peter E Revelstoke McKivor, Hazel M Vancouver McLean, Donald H Vancouver McLean, Ella E. New Westminster McLennan, Jack Vancouver McMillan, Donald C. Vancouver McMorris, Mary A Vancouver McMurphy, Jessie M New Westminster McPherson, Lewis J Port Alberni McPhillips, Frances M Vancouver McQuarrie, Mary F. C New Westminster MacRae, Duncan G Vancouver McRae, Donalda E Vancouver McSweyn, E. M. LaNier Vancouver Neelands, Rosella L Vancouver Negoro, Tsuyuko Vancouver Nelsen, Henrietta J Revelstoke Newberry, John D Vancouver O'Hagan, Eileen K Vancouver O'Hagan, James P Vancouver Olson, Florence C Cassidy Palmer, V. Elvira Vancouver Parker, Jack R Vancouver Parker, John A Vancouver Patterson, Albert H Britannia Beach Paul, G. Harold G. Vancouver Paulding, Harold New Westminster Peacock, Gardiner New Westminster Pennington, Harold R. Vancouver Petrak, Milshie Vancouver Petrie, Jean E , Vancouver Phillips, Paul Vancouver Pigott, Arnold D Vancouver 262 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Pilkington, Roderick A Vancouver Pollock, Marion C Vancouver Poole, Irene A Vancouver Pound, Dorothy R Vancouver Pretty, Jonathan M Vancouver Price, Reginald C. New Westminster Pritchard, Donald L Vancouver Proctor, Fred T Vancouver Pugh, Phyllis E Vancouver Pullinger, Mary E. S Burnaby Purdy, Kathleen M New Westminster Rankin, Emma A Vancouver Read, R. Verne Erie Reece, Frances C Vancouver Reeve, Phyllis Vancouver Reynolds, Frances E Vancouver Richards, Margaret E Vancouver Richardson, Jack E Vancouver Riggs, Margaret I Vancouver Rigney, Irene B Vancouver Risk, Sydney P Vancouver Roberts, Berniece Vancouver Roberts, Don Wm Vancouver Robertson, Barbara M Vancouver Robinson, Bertha M Hollyburn Robinson, Evelyn M. F Vancouver Robinson, J. Ripley Vancouver Robson, Lawrence A. New Westminster Ross, Kathleen MacK Vancouver Ross, M. Ruth Vancouver Rosseau, Ralph H Lynn Creek Ruark, Ruth C North Bend Rudkin, Gerard H Landon Salter, Jean R. G Vancouver Sanderson, Adrian B Vancouver Sanderson, Leonard E. W New Westminster Sanderson, Thomas J New Westminster Saunders, Milton E Vancouver Savage, Dorothy E Ladner Savage, Edna M Vancouver Savage, Gertrude M Vancouver Saville, John W Vancouver Sedgwick, Harvey J Vancouver Shayler, Stanley V Vancouver Shewbrooks, B. Eileen West Burnaby Shore, Julius Vancouver Short, Nellie B Vancouver Shortreed, Margaret M Rock Bay Shuttiewood, K. Estella Vancouver Siddall, Kathleen Y Ladner Silbernagel, Benedict L Vancouver Sinclair, Isabelle T Vancouver Sinclair, Rosa M. M Vancouver Smart, George S Cloverdale List of Students 263 Name. Home Address. Smith, Belva A New Westminster Smith, Donald S Vancouver Smith, Grace I Vancouver Smith, Hilda M New Westminster Smith, H. Winnifred Vancouver Smith, Irving C. Vancouver Smith, Wm. Cameron Vancouver Smith, Wm. George Vancouver Smith, William W Ladner Snell, Jean E. A Vancouver Solloway, Kathleen P Vancouver Solly, Ivor H West Summerland Solly, Nicolas O West Summerland Speed, Marjorie E. J Victoria Spencer, Verna E Vancouver Sproule, Elmin Vancouver Sproule, Marion A Vancouver Stanley, Beatrice M Vancouver Stedman, Cecil K. Vancouver Steele, Isobel F New Westminster Stewart, James D Vancouver Stewart, John M Vancouver Stewart, Peggy E Vancouver Stinson, Verna C Vancouver St. Martin, Clive S Khurda Road, India Stoddart, James Vancouver Stoddart, Jean I Vancouver Stohlberg, Edith M Vancouver Stone, Harriet L Dawson, Yukon Territory St. Pierre, Ella M Vancouver Strachan, James Fernie Straight, Harold LeBaron Vancouver Sutherland, Donald F Vancouver Sutherland, Helen E Nelson Swanson, Emma Vancouver Swanson, Ralph A. Burnaby Symons, Harold E Vancouver Tait, Elsie M Vancouver Taylor, G. Cuthbert Vancouver Teetzel, Jean Julia Vancouver Thomas, Melvin A Prince Rupert Thomas, Olwen E Vancouver Thompson, G. Morrin Vancouver Tite, David A Prince Rupert Tobin, Bernard Vancouver Todd, Lois Vancouver Truax, Clarence W Grand Forks True, Eileen Sointola Tull, E. Harold Courtenay Tullett, Alice V Vancouver Tupper, Margaret L New Westminster Turnbull, Dorothy W. Vancouver Tweed, Reginald C. R » Cochrane, Alta. 264 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Underhill, H. Fabian Burnaby Urie, Agnes W. Vancouver Waddell, D. Graeme A Vancouver Walker, Kathleen Vancouver Walker, Mary B Cumberland Ward, George J Vancouver Ward, Kathleen J Vancouver Webster, Alan Burnaby Webster, William B Vancouver Weeks, Samuel B Vancouver Werts, Frederick R New Westminster Whipple, Annie A. Vancouver Whiteford, Florence E Nicola Whiteside, Elizabeth McC New Westminster Williams, D. Cameron Vancouver Williams, Lloyd Kelowna Willis, Laura H. Vancouver Wilson, Arthur R Belmont Col. Co., N.S. Wilson, Ernestena Vancouver Wilson, Muriel T Vancouver Wilson, William T. P Vancouver Winch, Eileen New Westminster Winter, John H Kelowna Wong, Wing Y Vancouver Wood, Berton M Vancouver Wood, Doris J. M Vancouver Wood, Ernest A Vancouver Woodbury, Charles P Vancouver Woodworth, Jean D Vancouver Woodworth, Margaret E Vancouver Wright, Basil O Summerland Wright, Margaret J Vancouver Wright, Vernon S Vancouver Wyllie, Jessie I Vancouver Yasuda, Toyoyoshi Vancouver Yip, Kew Dock Vancouver Yochlowitz, Joseph Vancouver Young, Allan C. Vancouver Young, Doris I Vancouver Young, Eileen F. M Revelstoke Young, Helen M Vancouver Conditioned Acorn, Jessie I. Vancouver Barclay, Grace Vancouver Chodat, Henry H Vancouver Draney, W. F. Campbell Vancouver Elliott, Dorothy L Vancouver Grant, Hugh New Westminster Hager, Alvah R Vancouver Hardy, Wm. K. F New Westminster Jamieson, Margaret Vancouver Johnson, C. Bernard Robson Kemp, Wm. E. G Northfield Lost of Students 265 Name. Home Address. Litch, John B Vancouver Little, Wm. Robert A. Vancouver MacKenzie, Helen J Vancouver McLeod, Margaret A Vancouver O'Connor, Aileen J Britannia Beach Pinkerton, J. Gordon Vancouver Rendell, Victoria J Dawson, Y. T. Rindal, Kaare Vancouver Robertson, Campbell McL New Westminster Smith, Norman E Vancouver Secokd Yeas Full Undergraduates Abramson, Nicholas H Vancouver Adam, Jean H Nanaimo Almond, Irene Vancouver Alpen, Robert R. Vancouver Anderson, O. Elmer Burnaby Andrew, Jean E Vancouver Anthony, Alan R Vancouver Arbuthnot, Eva V Eburne Bailey, Jean G. H Vancouver Barr, A. Jean Vancouver Barton, Mary K Vancouver Bell, Alice Vancouver Billings, John MacD Vancouver Bowen, Dorothy F Vancouver Brealey, Daisy J Hollyburn Brennan, Wm. Earle Vancouver Brooke, Melville C .- Steveston Brown, Harold MacB Vancouver Brown, Robert C North Vancouver Burch, Arthur F Vancouver Burgess, Thomas E Vancouver Cameron, Ivan W. Prince Rupert Carlaw, D. Jeanne Vancouver Carment, D. Malcolm Vancouver Carter, Mary J Vancouver Caufield, Rose F. Fernie Chandler, Thomas A Vancouver Chilton, Eleanor G Hollyburn Christie, Daisy Vancouver Christison, May H Shawnigan Lake Clark, Mary E Vancouver Clark, Norman Cassidy Clarke, Doris E Vancouver Cliff, Evelyn E. S Vancouver Colledge, Thelma M Vancouver Conklin, James S. A Vancouver Cole, Irene R Vancouver Crompton, Doris I Vancouver Crossman, Margaret L New Westminster Cruise, M. Evelyn G Vancouver 266 The University op British Columbia Name. Home Address. Daniels, H. Muriel E Vancouver Dawson, Lome Trail Deeks, Dorothy I Vancouver DesBrisay, Maurice P Vancouver Dewar, Douglas J Vancouver Dobson, Lily C Vancouver Douglas, Elizabeth M Vancouver Dow, Elizabeth Vancouver Dowler, Jean M. Vancouver Eddy, Esther Vancouver Edwards, Marjorie L Vancouver England, Arthur W Milestone, Sask. Farish, Henry G Vancouver Farris, Ralph K Vancouver Fennell, Freda M. New Westminster Fleming, Richard H Victoria Foote, Wm. Rodgers Kamloops Fowler, Frances L Riondel Freeman, Harry Vancouver Freeman, Phyllis M White Valley, Vernon Freshwater, Norman G Vancouver Frost, A. C. Gardner Vancouver Fuller, Evelyn L Vancouver , Fullerton, Harold W Vancouver Garner, F. O. Roswell Duncan Genser, Joe Vancouver George, Mary C Burnaby Gillespie, F. Margaret Vancouver Gillespie, Vera I Vancouver Glasgow, Mary Helen Salmon Arm Gold, Norman L Vancouver Grant, Beryl E. L Vancouver Grant, Margaret I . Vancouver Green, Kathleen B Vancouver Griffis, Robert S Vancouver Gunn, William D New Westminster Haggerty, Wilmer P Vancouver Hall, Winifred H Vancouver Harrell, Milton M Vancouver Hart, Josephine F. L. Victoria Healy, Eleanor J Vancouver Helmer, Dorothy E. Vancouver Higman, Lois C. Vancouver Hodgson, Shirley Wm New Westminster Holland, Virginia C Vancouver Holyroyd, Nora M Vancouver Honeyford, Cleon D Vancouver Horton, Edward Wm Vancouver Hulbert, John E. B Sardis Hyndman, Ernest E Vancouver Jacob, Joshua J. M Jerusalem, Palestine Jenkins, N. Joyce New Westminster Johnson, Juliet P Hollyburn Johnson, Margaret C Vancouver List of Students 267 Name. Home Address. Kajiyama, Toshio Cumberland Kay, William Vancouver Keeling, M. Elizabeth New Westminster Keenlyside, Robert Wm Vancouver Killam, Elizabeth D. T Vancouver King, Norma L Vancouver Kirk, Marjorie S Vancouver Kirk, T. Downie Vancouver Klinck, Ronald W Vancouver Korenaga, George J Vancouver Laing, Lionel H Victoria Lamb, Robert S Vancouver Lang, Barbara Trail Lanning, Marjorie G. Vancouver Lloyd, Alma M Vancouver Lloyd-Jones, David A Kelowna Loomer, J. Claire Hedley Lovitt, Edward H Vancouver Mahon, Harold S Vancouver Manson, J. Norman Vancouver Marshall, H. Borden New Westminster Mathers, Lillian Vancouver Mathers, M. Kathleen L Burnaby Lake Maxwell, Duncan A. Vancouver Mellish, Ellen F Vancouver ■ Mennie, Jessie R Burnaby Meredith, J. Laurence R Vancouver Millar, Helen H Field Moffat, Margaret E Vancouver Moloney, Mamie P Vancouver More, Kenneth R Vancouver Morgan, John G Vancouver Mouat, Olivia D. Vancouver Murphy, Denis W. Vancouver Murphy, Paul D. Vancouver Macdonald, David Wm Vancouver McDonald, Ileen M. L Vancouver McDonald, Jean G Vancouver Mclnnes, M. J. Vera North Bulkley Mcintosh, Irene S Vancouver McKay, Jean I New Westminster MacKay, Ronald D Vancouver McKinnell, Gwendolyn M Vancouver Maclean, Donald N Vancouver McPhail, Murchie K New Westminster McRae, Alida B Vancouver McTavish, Constance C. Vancouver Nicholson, Howard G. Vancouver Nordberg, Inga Vancouver Oldfield, Frederick A Vancouver O'Neil, Margaret Vancouver Ormsby, Margaret A Vernon Oulton, Reta W. Penticton Owen-Jones, E. E. Doanie Vancouver 268 The University of British Columbia Nam*. Home Address. Parr, A. Paul New Westminster Partridge, E. Douglas Cumberland Patterson, Dorothy J Vancouver Pearce, Denis W Vancouver Pendray, Gladys I Vancouver Poole, Albert R Port Hammond Porteous, Diana Vancouver Punter, Eveline T. V. M Vancouver Reed, Helen J Penticton Rees, Lloyd E New Westminster Reid, John S New Westminster Reid, Harold A Vancouver Ricketts, Mary D Vancouver Riggs, A. Eleanor C. Vancouver Ripstein, Reitta Vancouver Robarts, Norma V Vancouver Rogers, David D. MacN Sullivan Ross, Beatrice V. G Vancouver Ross, Geraldine W. Vancouver Rouvier, Frank E Nanaimo Rowland, Greville J Vancouver Saiga, Sakaru Vancouver Sanders, Frederick H Esquimau Scott, Archibald O Vancouver Seed, Harry J Vancouver Simpkins, E. Grace Vancouver Sinclair, Margaret M Vancouver Smith, Helen E Eburne Sparks, Jack Vancouver Speck, S. Lloyd New Westminster Stangland, Luella M New Westminster Steele, David A Vancouver Stevens, Marjory G Vancouver Sturdy, Florence MacD Vancouver Sutton, Arthur . Vancouver Switzer, J. Gordon North Vancouver Tamura, Miyoko Port Haney Taylor, Murray N Kelowna Taylor, Patrick S Kelowna Teetzel, Grace E Vancouver Thompson, Marguerite A Ocean Falls Thurston, Kenneth T Port Moody Todd, Alan L Vancouver Todd, J. Ronald Vancouver Tolmie, John R Vancouver Trent, G. D. John Vancouver Unsworth, Edith Vancouver Watson, Henry T Cumberland Watts, Mary H Vernon Whitaker, A. Geraldine Vancouver White, Alice M. G Vancouver Wilson, Reginald A. Vancouver Wilson, Ruth Vancouver York, Gladys Abbotsford List of Students 269 Conditioned Name. Home Address. Bailey, Dora M. Parksville, V. I. Bailey, Doris J Vancouver Baker, H. Gordon Vancouver Bennett, Thomas E North Vancouver Bolton, Lorraine DeH Vancouver Bowering, E. William Vancouver Burdett, Mildred E Kimberley Carl, G. Clifford Vancouver Carrick, R. Bruce Vancouver Connor, Earle C Vancouver Davis, A Iola Vancouver Estabrook, Alan D Vancouver Evans, George E Wellington Gordon, Frayne G Vancouver Gordon, J. Eleanor C Vancouver Howarth, Harry Vancouver Hundal, Teja Singh Vancouver Jackson, Lylian G. Cranbrook Jackson, Suzanne C Vancouver King, Harold F. A. Vancouver Kwan, Diamond Vancouver Lazarus, Bernard H Vancouver Lucas, Charles F Burnaby Madeley, Frances E Vancouver Millar, M. Stanley Vancouver Morrison, M. Mackenzie Vancouver Murray, John V Nanaimo McDonald, Margaret C. C Vancouver Mcintosh, Veronica A. Vancouver Mackenzie, Hazel M Vancouver McKeown, Harry L Vancouver McPhee, Muriel I Courtenay McSweyn, Edith L. Vancouver Nakano, Thomas T Cumberland Plommer, John W Vancouver Rae, G. Gordon Vancouver Runge, Francis C Vancouver Ryall, Grace A Nanaimo Shields, Gordon J. Vancouver Sparling, James F Port Hammond Stevens, Gerald B.'H Portland, Ore. Stewart, Kenny N Fernie Stewart, Vernard L Vancouver Taylor, James A Cranbrook Waterfield, Jean K. M Nakusp Webster, Katharyn I Vancouver White, H. Edward Vancouver White, Oscar A New Westminster 270 The University op British Columbia Third Year Full Undergraduates Name. Home Address. Allan, Donald S Vancouver Allan, Kathleen Vancouver Ayton, Ernest R Victoria Baird, Kathleen P Vancouver Bamber, Irene Vancouver Barnett, Thomas Vancouver Barr, Bruce A Hatzic Beattie, Arthur H Vancouver Berry, Ethel Vancouver Brown, Harry L Vancouver Brown, J. Everett Victoria Brown, William MacB Vancouver Bulger, Russell J. Prince Rupert Bull, Ernest B Vancouver Burritt, Flora MacD. Vancouver Burton, Helen J. M Vancouver Butler, Francis A New Westminster Cameron, Eugene F ; Vancouver Carter, Elizabeth B Vancouver Cassidy, Florence E. Vancouver Clarke, Sidney V Vancouver Cole, Mary R Vancouver Cornish, Olive G Vancouver Craig, L. Margaret Vancouver Currie, John H Vancouver Davidson, George F Vancouver DeCew, Dorothy M Vancouver Dickson, George B Victoria Donley, Wilfred G New Westminster Douglass, Isobel G L. .J Vancouver Duff ell, Stanley Vancouver Dyer, Eleanor G Vancouver Elliott, Philip L Vancouver Estey, Margaret J. Vancouver Farris, Donald Vancouver Fitzpatrick, Dudley M Vernon Fraser, James A Vancouver Frith, Mary K Vancouver Gammie, Margaret H Vancouver Gardiner, P. Victoria Victoria Gibbs, Enid A Vancouver Gould, Charles E. G Vancouver Graham, Mona N. Vancouver Greenlees, Margaret M Vancouver Greig, Margaret L Vancouver Groves, Elizabeth A Vancouver Gwyer, Patricia E. K Penticton Haddock, Norah Vancouver Hallonquist, Earland G New Westminster Hatfield, Harley R Penticton Hedley, Isabel B Victoria Hendry, Harry A Dundas, Ontario List of Students 271 Name. Home Address. Heritage, Oliver W Victoria Hill, Vernon Reid Vancouver Hillas, Gertrude Vancouver Hipperson, Dorothy C Nelson Hogg, Robert Wm Vancouver Hornsby, Ruth M Prince George How, Helen J Vancouver Hudson, Vivienne G Vancouver Jackson, Wilfrid A Vancouver James, Ralph D Vancouver Kask, Jack L Vancouver Kelly, Gordon E. Silverton Kendall, Elizabeth Van H Vancouver Kennedy, Dorothy N Vancouver Kerlin, Donald E Vancouver Kerr, Ruby E Vancouver Lamb, Helen A Vancpuver Lane, Joseph H. Nanaimo Lane, Mary E New Westminster Law, Margaret J Sidney Lee, Gerald H Bonnington Falls Leeming, H. Hope Victoria Logie, Russell M Vancouver Lucas, Verna Z Vancouver Lyons, Hermiena M. , Penticton Mann, Doris E New Westminster Marshall, M. Alexander Summerland Masterson, William J New Westminster Matheson, Helen D Vancouver Matheson, Jean U New Westminster Matheson, Priscilla L Penticton Mellor, Margaret B Victoria Milley, Elva M Vancouver Mitchell, H. Inez Victoria Munro, Ferdinand L Vancouver Murphy, Lorna M Vancouver Musgrave, Gwendolyn M Kelowna McAlpine, Gladys C North Vancouver McBain, Wilberta J Vancouver McCharles, John A Vancouver McDonald, L. Dorothy Vancouver MacDonald, Margaret C. ... i Vancouver MacDonald, Norman D. New Westminster Maclnnes, Wm. Edmund Vancouver Maclver, Dolina C Vancouver McKay, Dorothy C New Westminster MacKay, Muriel A Vancouver McLaughlin, Grace V Vancouver MacLean, Edwin U. Vancouver McLennan, Edna C Vancouver McLuckie, Kathleen L. Vancouver McMillan, John A Vancouver McPhee, Angus L. Vancouver McQuarrie, George R New Westminster 272 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Macqueen, M. Evelyn Victoria McWilliams, Harold G Vancouver _ Neill, Ruth A. Vancouver ' Nicol, Grace AM Vancouver Noble, Kenneth F Vancouver Noble, Robertson D'O Vancouver Nordberg, Elsie Vancouver Northey, Helen G. Vancouver Oberg, Kalervo Tofino Oswald, Drummond W New Westminster Paterson, Ethylwin A Vancouver Patrick, Wm. Beverly Vancouver Petrie, Robert M. Victoria Pilkington, Francis C Vancouver Pollock, Mary E Vancouver Poole, F. Abner Port Hammond Ralph, Kathleen M Vancouver Reid, Marjorie S Vancouver Reid, Wm. Tennant Grand Forks Robertson, Muriel A Vancouver Ross, Lucy K. Vancouver Ruttan, Beatrice M Victoria Salisbury, Dorothy E Vancouver Skelton, Jean W. Victoria Smith, Margaret S Vancouver Simpson, Samuel L Massett Sostad, Odin S Vancouver Spencer, Myrtle A. Vancouver Starr, Jean C Vancouver Stevenson, Alan M. North Vancouver Stewart, C. Jean Crescent Stusser, Max Vancouver Sugarman, Howard W. Vancouver Sugarman, Ruth A. ~^. Vancouver Swanson, Gladys E Vancouver Swanson, John D Vancouver Swanson, Marion L. Burnaby Taylor, Annie New Westminster Taylor, Grace E. Vancouver Taylor, William H. Vancouver Telford, Douglas Vancouver Thompson, G. Hester Cranbrook Thomson, Margaret M. Vancouver Thomson, William E Vancouver Tolmie, M. K. Jean Vancouver Tufts, Evelyn E Vancouver Turpin, William R. Vancouver Vosper, V. Lorine Vancouver Waddington, Guy Victoria Washington, Norma R. Vancouver Watson, Neill McK Vancouver Weaver, Alice L Vancouver White, Helen A Vancouver Whiteley, Albert S Victoria List op Students 273 Name. Home Address. Williams, John H Kelowna Williamson, Marien A Vancouver Wilson, Jean K Cranbrook Wodlinger, David B Vancouver Woods, Doris J Vancouver Woodworth, Hugh MacC Vancouver Wright, Robert H Vancouver Yerburgh, Richard E. M Victoria Conditioned Bride, William W West Vancouver Bryson, L. Elmer New Westminster Buckley, L. Mason Vancouver Corlette, Anita M Vancouver Crawford, Alan M Vancouver Davies, Dermot A. Vancouver Delbridge, Clayton Vancouver Eaton, George H Vancouver Gillespie, Gordon D Vancouver Hurst, Flora E. Vancouver Litch, Edith S Vancouver McFarlane, Meredith M Vancouver Newall, Nathan Vancouver Osterhout, Victor H Vancouver Robinson, Audrey Vancouver Robson, Annie O Vancouver Thompson, Alfi eda E Vancouver Foubth Year Full Undergraduates Allen, J. Stanley Naramata Almond, Blanche Vancouver Bailey, Albert E Victoria Ballard, Ernest R Vancouver Berry, Anne B Langley Prairie Black, Albert E New Westminster Black, Bishop Vancouver Black, Mary L New Westminster Black, R. May Vancouver Blatchford, Annie Vancouver Boyes, Winifred E Vancouver Brown, Dorothy E Vancouver Brown, Norman Vancouver Buckingham, William N Vancouver Bumstead, V. Grace Vancouver Burton, John S Vancouver Calvert, Donald E Kaslo Cameron, Maxwell A. Nelson Cameron, Wm. Murray Vancouver Chislett, Charlotte Vancouver Clegg, E. Beatrix Vancouver Cleveland, Hester C Victoria 274 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Coade, Lillian M Vancouver Coles, Hilda C Vancouver Coombe, Dorothy L Vancouver Cottingham, Mollie E Vancouver Crickmay, Geoffrey W North Vancouver Dalrymple, Thomas Vancouver Dee, Henry D Victoria Denman, Ester O'D Vancouver Dick, R. Norman Britannia Mines Dowsley, Gertrude O Vancouver Duncan, James D Vancouver Dwinnell, Edith L Vancouver Elliott, Frank Wm Vancouver Farris, Katherine H Vancouver Fordyce-Clark, H. Eustace Vancouver Fraser, Jean H Vancouver Freeborn, Grace M Vancouver French, Joan Vancouver Fugler, M. Ethel Vancouver Fullerton, Wm. Evan Vancouver Galbraith, Gladys E Vancouver Gillespie, Robert M Vancouver Gilley, Jean R. D New Westminster Grantham, Herbert H Vancouver Gretton, Ronald H New Westminster Groves, Kenneth P Vancouver Harding, Cora L Vancouver Hemsworth, Phyllis M Vancouver Hill, Evelyn M Vancouver Hockin, John MacG Vancouver Holland, F. Jean Vancouver Hood, Orlo McG Vancouver Hope, Grace E Vancouver Howay, Undine L New Westminster Hurry, Margaret I Vancouver Ingledew, Wm. Edward Vancouver Johnston, Frederick B Vancouver Johnston, Mary H Vancouver Keillor, Margaret G Vancouver Kerr, Ida M Vancouver Kilpatrick, M. Elspeth Vancouver King, Hubert B Vancouver Lam, George Vancouver Lamb, Wm. Kaye Cloverdale Lamont, Donald MacK Vancouver Lamont, K. Mary Vancouver Leigh, Morton D Revelstoke Mattlce, Clarence R Keremeos Meagher, John F Nelson Millward, Louis G Vancouver Morell, A. Ernest Vancouver Morrison, Edmund Vancouver Morrison, Margaret G Vancouver Morriss, Mary R Vancouver List of Students 275 Name. Home Address. Mottley, Charles M Vancouver Mulhern, Edmond F Vancouver Munro, Hector G Vancouver Musgrave, Jean I Vancouver MacDonald, Jessie J New Westminster McIntosh, Josephine H Simoom Sound Mackenzie, Anne Vancouver MacKenzie, L. Margaret New Westminster MacKenzie, Henriette D Vancouver McKie, Archibald Vancouver McLean, J. Beattie Vancouver McMeans, Beatrice K Vancouver MacNeill, Lome C Vancouver McQuarrie, Clare N Vancouver MacTavish, Isabelle G Vancouver Newby, Cecil D Sardis Nixon, Myrtle Vancouver Orr, Mildred C Vancouver Partington, Dorothy West Vancouver Parton, Marion F Vancouver Patten, Charles G Armstrong Peck, Helen T Vancouver Pettapiece, Edna L Vancouver Phillips, George L Vancouver Piggott, Eleanora Armstrong Pillsbury, Richard W Prince Rupert Porter, Ida S Hollyburn Pumphrey, K. Avis Vancouver Ralph, Isobel Vancouver Rankin, Margaret J Vancouver Reid, Elsie M Vancouver Reid, Katharine O. M New Westminster Riddell, J. Marie Vancouver Ripstein, Horace R Vancouver Roberts, Marion O Vancouver Robertson, Mary S Vancouver Robinson, G. Russell Vancouver Robinson, Lillian A Vancouver Russell, Dorothy B Vancouver Selwood, Pierce W West Vancouver Shakespeare, Jack S North Vancouver Sheridan, Richard H Vancouver Smith, Harold D Vancouver Stanley, John New Westminster St. Denis, Frederic G Vancouver Stevens, Francis H Vancouver Stevenson, M. Ian Vancouver Stewart, Jean E Vancouver Stocks, George H Vancouver Strauss, A. Donalda Vancouver Streight, H. R. Lyle New Westminster Swanson, Violet M Vancouver Thorpe, Robert S Victoria Tutill, Douglas Merritt 276 The University op British Columbia Name. Home Address. Underhill, H. Margaretta New Westminster Wagenhauser, Muriel E Princeton Wagg, E. Blanche Vancouver Walker, Day Vancouver Walmsley, Sheridan E New Westminster Walsh, Clara M Vancouver Warden, David C Vancouver Wellington, Beatrice M Barnet Whaun, Moore Sun-Ning, China Wilkinson, John H Vancouver Wilkinson, Margery H Vancouver Winter, Edyth W Vancouver Woodworth, Charles A Vancouver Conditioned Allan, Dalton D Vancouver Boyden, Ashley W Victoria Christie, William H Victoria Guernsey, Elizabeth Vancouver Howlett, Leslie E Victoria McDiarmid, Margaret A Ladner Stedman, Ralph E Vancouver Wells, Harry N Vancouver Wilson, Isabel A Vancouver Wright, Max H. C North Vancouver Partial Aalbersberg, Willem J. G Vancouver Alihan, Milla Vancouver Argue, Charles W Vancouver Bell-Irving, Dorothy Vancouver Berlet, Roy E Vancouver Black, Roger J. W Vancouver Brooks, Leslie D. G. Vancouver Bryson, Margaret A Ashcroft Callan, Lawrence Vancouver Cameron, Elizabeth V Vancouver Camozzi, R. Oliver Blaine, Wash. Cunningham, Frederick H Burnaby Dial, Puran Singh Punjab, India Dobson, Herbert E Vancouver Edwards, Byron Vancouver Elson, Robert T. Vancouver Evans, Maxwell Vancouver Fournier, Frank L Vancouver Fowler, Earle L Robson Galbraith, Helen K Vancouver Hale, Agnes Capilano Harkness, John A. C, Burnaby Harrison, Rupert N Ganges Harbour Hay, Letitia A Vancouver List of Students 277 Name. Home Address. Keeling, Patrick H North Lonsdale Kilpatrick, Heather Vancouver Knox, George A. Vancouver Lang, Arthur H Vernon Manery, Frederick S. Penticton Marrion, R. Francis C Vancouver Maxwell, John A Vancouver Mito, Kendo Vancouver Moscrop, Harold J Vancouver McCutcheon, James C Victoria Macdonald, Ruth E Vancouver McGill, Esther M Vancouver McGugan, Donald McP Vancouver MacKenzie, Donald Vancouver McLennan, Reid L Prince Rupert McSweyn, Maxine M. M Vancouver Nash, Everard T. W Vancouver Osterland, Audrey E Vancouver Phillips, R. Gaundry Vancouver Stephens, Harriette G Vancouver Smith, Edna Vancouver Thomas, Margaret J Vancouver Thorpe, C. Crews Vancouver Vike, Karl H Vancouver Wilson, F. Lloyd Vancouver Wiser, Virginia J Texas, U.S.A. FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE ^ First Year Full Undergraduates Abernethy, Emerson Vancouver Adam, Ian MacLean Vancouver Allardyce, V. Fraser Vancouver Andersen, George C Vancouver Berto, Thomas V Vancouver Bews, Kenneth F New Westminster Buckland, Francis C Vancouver Cross, Gordon P Lynn Creek Cruise, K. Albert Vancouver Davis, Harry V Revelstoke Deans, Charles W Victoria Edwards, Howard I. Moosomin, Sask. Emery, Philip C. B New Westminster Fraser, W. A. Schubert Victoria Fyfe, Kenneth R Vancouver Garcha, Hazara Singh Punjab, India Graham, Roy Langley Prairie Hadwin, Thomas F Vancouver Halley, J. Kenneth Sandal, Salt Spring Isl. Harrower, George A New Westminster Hill, Henry L Vancouver Holland, Stuart S Vancouver Kingsberry, John Victoria Lazorek, William Anyox 278 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Leask, John R Cranbrook Legg, Maxwell New Westminster Lewis, Frank A Kelowna Locke, C. William E Victoria Lunn, Edward 0 Hollyburn Madeley, Wm. Arthur Vancouver Mar, Teh-Chien Foochow, China Matheson, Donald N Prince Rupert Matheson, William M Vancouver Mathews, L. Gerard Vancouver McAllister, Kenneth Victoria McCallum, John L. G Grand Forks Macdonald, Alan J Vancouver McKechnie, Neil D New Westminster Nixon, George R. W. Vancouver Pike, James A Vancouver Polley, J. Clifford Vancouver Pradolini, Hugo Revelstoke Rayner, G. Eric Naramata Rhodes, Audsley V Victoria Ridington, Bernard C Vancouver Roberts, James C Cranbrook Scott, Norman V Vancouver Selby, William R Kimberley Shiels, Thomas Vancouver Smith, Robert H Victoria Swanson, Jack R Vancouver Taylor, Reginald M ".... Vancouver Thornber, William Summerland Towgood, Thomas S Oyama Turnbull, Charles F Vancouver Unsworth, Arthur Vancouver Wainman, William Vernon Watson, Howard D Vancouver Willis, Philip E Victoria Woo, Chong W New Westminster Woodhouse, Albert F Vernon Woodland, Harold E Grand Forks Conditioned Abraham, Francis J. Vancouver Bayley, Charles M Vancouver Chapman, Ray E Vancouver Craster, James E Vernon Cunliffe, Jack A Vancouver Madsen, Christy Vancouver Nelems, Harry E Chilliwack Parmley, Thomas F Penticton Phillips, John P Victoria Phillips, Richard A Victoria Sohi, Budh Singh Punjab, India Trant, Geoffrey A. Vancouver Vaughan, Aubrey W Vancouver Wilson, Norman O Vancouver Wong, Charles Vancouver List of Students 279 Second Year Full Undergraduates Name. Home Address. Baker, John A Eburne Berquist, Rupert A Vancouver Bishop, Joseph W Vancouver Blackett, Harold W Victoria Canfield, Orra W New Westminster Cornish, Charles R Vancouver Duckering, Charles E Vancouver Emery, Donald J New Westminster Gormely, Marcus W Vancouver Graham, Leslie W Vancouver Grant, Wylie S Victoria Hall, Wilfred N Vancouver Heelas, John C. Vancouver Hubner, Rudolph Trail Hunt, Basil G. North Vancouver Jagger, Albert E Vancouver Leek, Walter E Vancouver Legg, John H New Westminster Lord, Clifford S New Westminster Morrison, Robert L Vancouver McDonald, Walter V Vancouver Ogawa, Thomas T Vancouver Peebles, Archie Vancouver Pollard, William F. A Victoria Richmond, W. Osborn Chilliwack Rudnicki, Alois H Fernie Sargent, Hartley Victoria Stanley, Thomas R Vancouver Stevenson, John S Vancouver Todd, Eric E Vancouver Todd, Harold J Victoria Turnbull, Thomas A Vancouver Wallis, John C Britannia Mines Warden, Thomas Vancouver Wilson, George H Vancouver Workman, William R Fernie Conditioned Bebb, Elon Fernie Blankenbach, William W Victoria Carpenter, R. Burton Vancouver Cornwall, George L Vancouver Curtis, James D Vancouver Dhami, Bhagat Singh Punjab, India Foerster, Fred S. Vancouver Hadgkiss, James Vancouver Horwood, H. Clare Kingston, Ontario Macdonald, John E Vancouver McKeever, James L Penticton McLean, Alexander Vancouver Robertson, Francis McG North Vancouver Swift, William A Penticton Thompson, George Vancouver 280 The University of British Columbia Third Year Full Undergraduates Name. Home Address. Chemical Engineering Thomson, W. Gregg Vancouver McDiarmid, Ralph G. North Vancouver Civil Engineering Bell, Douglas E Vancouver Logan, Gordon Van E Vancouver Marin, Joseph Vancouver Morris, Wilfred H Vancouver McQuarrie, Hector N North Vancouver Stewartson, Alan New Westminster Sutherland, James B Vancouver Ei.ectb.tcai, Engineering Duncan, Jack D Vancouver Harvie, Ralph A Vancouver Mooyboer, A. Peter Grand Forks Newmarch, Gerald Vancouver Tokunaga, Tadashi Vancouver Tupper, Bert R Vancouver Forest Engineering Hodgins, Hugh J. Vancouver Geological Engineering Goronson, Edwin A New Westminster Mechanical Engineering Sinclair, James Vancouver Mining Engineering Farrington, John L Vancouver Gibbs, Thomas C Vancouver Conditioned Electrical Engineering Crawford, Lionel G Merritt Forest Engineering Touzeau, Ernest G Vancouver Mechanical Engineering Parsons, Harold E Vancouver Metallurgical Engineering Gibson, Swanston Vancouver Fourth Year Full Undergraduates Chemical Engineering Brown, Rex L Vancouver Hartley, James D Victoria Nunn, Edward H Vancouver List of Students 281 Name Home Address. Civil Engineering Bloom, Jason Vancouver Gordon, Arthur I. E Skidegate Larsen, Arthur G. Vancouver Oliver, John C Vancouver Phillips, Wilfred J London, England Rothwell, James M Vancouver Todd, Robert L. Vancouver Electrical Engineering Clement, Bruce D Vancouver Gale, Stanley C Vancouver Gill, Otto H Cranbrook Manson, Harold E Hatzic Mathews, John T Vancouver Mathewson, Philip E Essondale Mosher, Harry E North Vancouver North, J. Terry Vancouver Pottinger, Alexander Vancouver Wainman, Philip R Vernon Forest Engineering Elley, Frederick W. Fernie Liersch, John E North Vancouver Miller, George W. North Vancouver Geological Engineering Kidd, Desmond F Vancouver Lees, Everett J. Vancouver Mechanical Engineering Bishop, Charles B Vancouver D'Aoust, J. Gilbert Vancouver Leek, Charles W Vancouver Millar, James W Field Metallurgical Engineering Farrar, Ben K. Vicosa Mining Engineering Arnold, Theodore E Vancouver Maclean, Hugh A Vancouver Richmond, Alexander M Vancouver Shannon, Jack D Vancouver Stevenson, C. Douglas Victoria Waddington, George W. Merritt Conditioned Geological Engineering Pearcey, John G. Vancouver Partial Andresen, Sigurd Vancouver Annand, Roy F New Westminster Astell, Joseph J Vancouver Barclay, Guy Lumby 282 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Barnsley, Frank R Vancouver Carver, Stanley C Victoria Crickmay, James L North Vancouver Dalton, John North Vancouver Dykstra, Anton A. Vancouver Emery, Geoffrey B New Westminster Fraser, James S. Chisholm Victoria Gustafson, Carl E Vancouver Hay, Edward C Vancouver Jones, Allan J Nanaimo McDonald, Hugh J Vancouver Pretious, Edward S Hollyburn Somerton, Thomas W Prince George Sparks, Wilbur H Vancouver Young, Robert B Compeer, Alta. NURSING First Year Full Undergraduates Elliott, Ethel L. . Vancouver Hillas, Hedwig Vancouver Homfray, Geraldine E Kamloops MacDonald, Margaret I Vancouver Mclntyre, Kathleen V Revelstoke MacKenzie, Dorothy E New Westminster O'Neill, Dorothy E Vancouver Reid, Katherine B Vancouver Smith, Muriel R Vancouver Tisdall, Sheila M Duncan Young, M. Fyvie H Victoria ^^ Second Year Full Undergraduates Armstrong, Mary Vancouver Cardwell, Merion T Vancouver McPhee, Mary Vancouver Ross, Mary Victoria Conditioned Henderson, Isobel M Vancouver Third Year Full Undergraduates Anderton, Evelyn Cranbrook Aske, Jessie Vancouver Dorsett, Margaret Vancouver Henderson, Mary Vancouver Tisdall, Edith W Vancouver Upshall, Edna M Vancouver List of Students 283 Fourth Year Full Undergraduates Name. Home Address. Harvey, Myrtle E Kamloops Johnston, Mabel Vancouver MacKechnie, Flora Vancouver Yates, Annie Vancouver Fifth Year Full Undergraduates Higgs, Nora L Albert Head, V.I. Lyne, Frances E Esquimau Olmstead, Dorothy G Vancouver Reilly, Ruby R Vancouver Stoddart, Elizabeth Clinton Partial Hilton, Grace I Vancouver Steves, Martha W Steveston Sutherland, Margaret F Vancouver Swencisky, Victoria M New Westminster FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE Fibst Year Full Undergraduates Aspinall, Thomas E fi. im Fauquier Christmas, Irene M Cloverdale DesBrisay, Eileen Vancouver Forsyth, Ralfe M Vancouver Gilmore, Edward J Steveston Grauer, Frederick Wm Vancouver Morris, John R Vancouver Nesbitt, Richard T New Westminster Roberts, Bertram B New Westminster Spilsbury, Richard H North Vancouver Thompson, Lloyd B Vancouver Utsumi, Kiku Mission City Conditioned Currie, Lyall A. Cloverdale Koga, Vernon Vancouver Preston, Shirley G Vanderhoof Partial Second Year Full Undergraduates Black, Lindsay McL Vancouver Ink, Joseph C Nelson Lott, Thomas B Kamloops Odium, Roger M Vancouver Swanson, Jack R Vancouver Waterfield, Donald C Nakusp 284 The University op British Columbia Conditioned Name. Home Address. Brooke, Ralph E Salmon Arm Charlton, Gerald Wm Port Haney Sutherland, Donald Vancouver Yarwood, Cecil E, Huntingdon Third Year Full Undergraduates Asher, Charles R. Vancouver Brown, William C Hammond Moffatt, Kenneth F Vernon Thorneloe, Keith Vancouver Conditioned Boyes, Edgar D .* Vancouver Fourth Year Full Undergraduates Berry, Jack C Langley Prairie Mallory, Lester DeW. Sardis Matthews, Willoughby W. Westholme, V.I. Milne, Helen I. ...: Vancouver Ross, Herbert H Vancouver Partial Bowman, Sydney J Vancouver Buenzly, Alphonse Zuerich 5, Switzerland Dekema, Wouter Vancouver Eden, A. Harold Vancouver Luyat, Gabriel A Agassiz Mclntyre, Douglas C Vancouver McKay, Leslie W Vancouver MacKenzie, C. Duncan New Westminster MacKenzie, J. Cameron New Westminster Noble, Grace I Hatzic Roach, William Vancouver Usiskin, Isidore London, England Wells, Oswyn A London, England Zaitzeff, Anatoly Karbin, China GRADUATES Facultt op Arts and Science Abercrombie, Clinton Wm Vancouver Baird, J. Douglas Vancouver Ball, Ralph H Kelowna Ball, Robert Wm Sandwick Bonsall, Henry B. Vancouver Campbell, Mildred H Vancouver Chalmers, William Vancouver Churchill, Josie C Vancouver List of Students 285 Name. Home Address. Cross, Harry N Seattle, Wash. Davidson, Jean E — Vancouver Elliott, Muriel E Kamloops Esler, Mary R. Vancouver Farrand, Charles J. S Vancouver Gallaugher, Arthur F Vancouver Gordon, Margaret Vancouver Griffith, Graham G. Vancouver Griffith, Mary E Sardis Hopkins, Jean F. C Stockton, Man. Hose, Reginald E Victoria Kask, Marie K. Vancouver Kidd, Honor M. Vancouver Mawdsley, M. Dorothy Vancouver Mellish, A. Preston Vancouver Macdonald, Alexander B Vancouver Northrop, Harold Vancouver Paterson, Philip G Vancouver Phemister, Mary W Vancouver Portsmouth, Madge Mission City Rae, Hugh McC Vancouver Rankin, Agnes H Vancouver Reith, Helen W. Penticton Sangster, Norman Vancouver Sharpe, Vera M Enderby Smith, Louis F Vancouver Sparks, Frederick P Vancouver Telford, Gordon D Vancouver Thompson, Homer A Rosedale Tipping, Wessie M. M Vancouver Tonks, J. Charles Enderby Webster, Arnold A Vancouver Weld, John N Vancouver Woodrow, Jean Vancouver Facultt of Applied Science Jones, William Alfred Vancouver Facultt of Agriculture Caple, Kenneth Percy Vancouver Middlemass, James Douglas Edinburgh, Scotland Tarr, Hugh Lewis Aubrey North Vancouver TEACHER TRAINING COURSE Arkwright, Dorothy Vancouver Armstrong, Helen Jessie Penticton Barton, Carl Francis Vancouver Barton, Isobel Wilson Vancouver Beane, May Elizabeth Victoria 286 The University of British Columbia Name. Home Address. Bolt, Sybil Vancouver Byrne, Thomas Scully Vancouver Catterall, John Leslie Vancouver Chamberlain, Edward Robert Vancouver Clark, Kathleen Lilian Vancouver Conrad, Elsie Vancouver Crich, Evelyn Pethalda Vancouver Dobie, Margaret Helen New Westminster Doidge, Gilbert North Vancouver Fowler, Horace Wesley Vancouver Fuller, Betty Sarah Campbell Victoria Gadd, Gwendolyn Mavis Vancouver Gauthier, Alexander Cairns Vancouver Gilley, Hazel Letitia New Westminster Grace, John New Westminster Greggor, Clara Fenella Vancouver Groves, Dorothy Vancouver Handford, Cecile Margaret Vancouver Hill, Mark Russell Vancouver Hopkins, Jean Frances Christina Stockton, Manitoba Jenks, Edwin Leslie Cardiff, Wales Johns, Alfred Edward Tacoma, Wash. Kievell, Myrtle Lorraine Vancouver Langridge, Gertrude Annie Vancouver Ledingham, George Menzies Vancouver Leeming, Marjorie Hope Victoria Levirs, Franklin Oliver Parker Victoria Logie, William James Vancouver Lynn, Mildred Brown Vancouver Marsh, D'Arcy Gilbert Vancouver Matheson, Laughlin Alexander Caron, Sask. Menten, Marjorie Evelyn New Westminster Meredith, Jean Odette Foulis North Vancouver Minaty, William Vancouver Myers, Alice Elizabeth MacDougall Naramata Macdonald, A. Bruce Vancouver MacDonald, Kenna Cecilia Vernon McGregor, Mary Catherine Vancouver Mclntyre, Charles Mearns Vancouver MacKinnon, Marion Catherine Cranbrook Osborne, Donald James Fitz Vancouver Norman, Ralph Overton Vancouver Palmer, Peter Fourie Vancouver Pollock, James Robert Vancouver Potter, Frank Cumberland Raby, Ila Gertrude Salmon Arm Reid, Mary Fraser Vancouver Spargo, Thomas Vancouver Story, Jean Margaret Vancouver Straight, Winona Thereza Vancouver Sutherland, John Houston Vancouver Swannell, Charles Frederick Victoria Swanson, Margaret Vancouver Swencisky, Grace Helen New Westminster Registration for 1926-27 287 Name. Home Address. Teeple, Ruth Eleanor Vancouver Thompson, Bertha Hazel Vancouver Thomson, Isabelle McMillan Winnipeg Usher, Katherine Hepburn Vancouver Vincent, George Gaston Victoria Wallis, Hubert Douglas Courtenay # Washington, Dorothy Marion Vancouver White, Arthur Edwin Vancouver Registration for 1926-27 Faculty of Arts and Science Women First Year 265 Second Year 126 Third Year 98 Fourth Year 81 Partial 16 Faculty of Applied Science First Year — Second Year — Third Year — Fourth Year — .Partial — Nursing First Year 11 Second Year 5 Third Year 6 Fourth Year 4 Fifth Year 5 Partial 4 Faculty of Agriculture First Year 2 Second Year — Third Year — Fourth Year 1 Partial 1 Graduates Arts and Science 18 Applied Science — Agriculture — Men Total 274 539 124 250 87 185 72 153 34 50 —1177 77 77 51 51 24 24 37 37 19 19 208 11 .— 5 — ■ 6 — 4 .— 5 ■ 4 35 13 15 10 10 5 5 4 5 13 14 — 49 24 42 1 1 3 3 46 288 The University of British Columbia Teacher Training Course Teacher Training Course 37 30 67 Short Courses Summer Session 438 Agriculture 98 Public Health Nursing 9 Botany 51 67 1582 DEGREES CONFERRED Mat, 1926 Faculty of Arts and Science The Degree of Master of Arts (Name* in alphabetical order) Carpenter, Gilbert B., B.A. Davis, N. F. Gordon, B.A. Gage, Walter H., B.A. ... Gillanders, Earl B., B.A. . Greig, Janet T., B.A Hallamore, Gertrude Joyce, B.A, Hamilton, George H., B.A. Mathews, Helen M., B.A. . Morrison, Louise D., BA.. Nuttall, Thomas H., B.A. . Palmer, Peter F., B.A. ... Russell, Isabel M., B.A. .. Smith, Gertrude M., B.A . Stevens, Ernest S., B.A. .. Story, Evelyn S., B.A. ... Williamson, Lillian A., B.A ... Major Minor ... Major Minor ... Major Minor }.. Major Minor ... Major Mnior ... Major Mnior ... Major Minor ... Major Minor ... Major Minor ... Major Minor ... Major Minor ... Major Minor ... Major Minor ... Major Minor .. .Major Minor ... Major Minor Chemistry Mathematics and Physics Geology Zoology Mathematics Physics Geology Zoology and Paleontology French English German English Philosophy Sociology Bacteriology Education French German Philosophy English English Economics French Education Zoology Botany History Economics History Sociology English French Degrees Conferred 289 The Degree of Bachelor of Arts With Honours (Names in alphabetical order) Aitken, James (1st class honours in Economics) Ball, Ralph Henry (2nd class honours in Chemistry) Barton, Bernice Eveline (1st class honours in French) Barton, Lorna Durnford (2nd class honours fn French) Berkeley, Alfreda Alice ..(1st class honours in Biology — Zoology option) Birney, Alfred Earle (1st class honours in English Language and Literature) Boyles, Sadie Margaret (1st class honours in French) Campbell, Mildred Helena ...(1st class honours in Biology — Zoology option) Catterall, John Leslie (1st class honours in Classics) Chalmers, William (1st class honours in Chemistry) Freeman, Maurice (1st class honours in Economics) Fuller, Betty (2nd class honours in English and History) Gallaugher, Arthur Frederick (2nd class honours in Chemistry) Gould, Clara Walters Heavysege.. (2nd class honours in French) Grace, John (2nd class honours in French) Griffith, Braham Grey (2nd class honours in Biology — Botany option) Gruchy, Allan Garfield (1st class honours in Economics) King, Gladys Agnes (2nd class honours in Economics) Kobe, Susumu (2nd class honours in Economics) Langridge, Gertrude Annie (1st class honours, in French) Leach, Frances Wanetta (1st class honours in French) Logie, William James (2nd class honours in Chemistry) Mellish, Arthur Preston (1st class honours in Mathematics) Mitchell, Marion (1st class honours in History) Murphy, William (1st class honours In History) Myers, Alice Elizabeth MacDougall (1st class honours in French) McCulloch, Walter Fraser (2nd class honours in Biology — Botany option) McGregor, Mary Catherine (2nd class honours in French) Mclntyre, Charles Mearns ........ (2nd class honours in French) Nakano, Noboru Abe (2nd class honours in Economics) Price, Anna E (2nd class honours in French) Stirling, Barbara Grote..., (1st class honours in Biology — Zoology option) Story, Jean Margaret (1st class honours in English Language and Literature) Sutherland, John Houston (1st class honours in French) Taylor, David Allan Brown (2nd class honours in English and History) Taylor, Thos. Mayne Cuninghame.. (2nd class honours in Biology — Botany option) Wales, Bertram Edward (2nd class honours in Mathematics and Physics) 290 The University of British Columbia Smith, Louis F. In Pass Course (Names in order of merit) Class I Smith, Marlon R. Minaty, William Graham, Jean A. C. Gibbard, Charles A. Potter, Frank MacKinnon, Ronald L. McKay, Doris G. MacKay, Mary A. Swannell, Charles F. Bonsall, Henry B. Bridge, John W. Leeming, Marjorie H. HU1, Mark R. Levirs, Franklin O. P. Telford, Gordon D. Macdonald, A. Bruce Jones, Margaret E. Verchere, David R. MacDonald, Kenna C. Crees, Norman J. Gauthier, Alexander C. Mercer, W. E. Arthur Henderson, Robert A. Henderson, Anne A. Cull, J. Simpson Washington, Dorothy M. Gartshore, Hendrie Hodgins, Lillian Lynn, Mildred B. Edgett, Freda B. McLennan, Percy G. Bolt, Sybil Garner, Edna B. Moore, Hilton M. Handford, Cecile M. Brown, Florence V. Bell, William J. Barton, Isobel W. Armour, John A. K. Armstrong, Helen J. Meredith, Joan 0- F. Wilkinson, Jane H. Thompson, Bertha H. Irwin, M. Lenora Gilley, Hazel L. Phipps, Edith Sheila M. Woodrow, Jean Class II Musgrave, Flora M. Dimock, Marjorie C. Piters, Jack Purdy, Harry Leslie Teeple, Ruth E. King, Esther E. Arkwright, Dorothy Beane, May E. Hunter, H. Murray Baines, Alyce A. W. Clark, Kathleen L. Dobie, M. Helen Chamberlain, Edward R. Marsh, D'Arcy G. Garesche, Gladys Mary Farrand, Charles J. S. Ash worth, George William Vincent, George G. Lade, Mary E. Swanson, Margaret Byrne, Thomas S. Palmer, Russell A. Dlckman, Esther E. Fowler, Horace W. 'Passed Bridgman, Clara M. MacRae, Jean W. Balmer, Ian . Usher, Katherine H. Reid, Mary F. Lyttleton, Helen M. Gadd, Gwendoline M. Baillie, Oenone G. Stuart, Ronald J. : Davidson, Allen E. Swencisky, Grace H. Cogslan, Basil S. Menten, Marjorie E. Eaton, Virginia L. Baynes, Doris L. Straight, Winona T. Gregger, Clara F. Macdonald, Eileen Wilcox, Laura Ledingham, George M. Fraser, Ruth A. Raby, Ha Gertrude Bullock-Webster, Marlon L Degrees Conferred 291 Passed (Unranked) (Names in alphabetical order) Auden, Kenneth F. Kidd, Honor M. Baker, Lorimer G. Lanning, Walter S. W. < Clarke, Mary Kathleen Marin, Rosa A. M. Cooper, Ursula H. McKee, Mary M. Faulkner, Jean C. Poore, Henry J. C. Double Course Arts and Applied Science Liersch, John Edward Oliver, John Craig Millar, James W. Faculty of Applied Science The Degree of Master of Applied Science (Names in alphabetical order) Carter, Marshall Neal, B.A. Sc Major: Chemistry Minor: Physics Jackson, Gerald Christopher Arden, B.A. Sc.Major: Geology Minor: Biology Lucas, Colin Cameron, B.A. Sc Major: Chemistry Minor: Biology Price, Peter, BA. Sc Major: Geology Minor: Civil Engineering The Degree of Bachelor of Applied Science (Names in order of merit) Chemical Engineering Passed (Unranked) Niederman, Otto Emil Civil Engineering Class I Baylis, Robert Henry Class II Louden, Thomas Newton Electrical Engineering Class I Tarr, Francis Gilbert Aubrey Class II Robinson, George Richard Buchanan, Thomas Gwynne Tamura, Moriklyo Passed (Unranked) Callander, Maitland Bruco Steede, John Horsford 292 The Uuiversity op British Columbia Forest Engineering Class II Bassett, Edward William Falconer, Joseph G. Guernsey, Frederick tyilliam Abernethy, Gordon McKellar Geological Engineering Class I Norman, George William Hal Class II Kania, Joseph Ernest Anthony Brock, Byron Britton Jones, William Alfred Pollock, James Robert Barton, Carl Francis Mechanical Engineering Class I Hale, Frederick Montague Passed ^^ Wilks, Ernest Fabian Timleck, Curtis^James Bain, William Alexander Passed (Unranked) Letson, Gordon Mcintosh Mining Engineering Passed (Unranked) Hodson, Reginald Groves, Godfrey Francis Charles Nursing Class I Kerr, Margaret E. Innes, Florence A. I. Armstrong, Norah Faculty of Agriculture The Degree of Bachelor of Science in Agriculture (Names in order of merit) Class I Biely, Jacob - McCurrach, John Bruce Class II Allen, Maude Andrews Mutrie, Fergus Tarr, Hugh Lewis Aubrey Rive, Charles Gough, William Frederick Passed (Unranked) Caple, Kenneth Percy Thompson, David William September, 1926 Faculty of Arts and Science The Degree of Bachelor of Arts Warren, Harry Verney Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 293 MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, AND PRIZES Awarded Mat, 1926 Faculty of Arts and Science Fourth Tear 1. The Governor-General's Gold Medal William Chalmers (Head of Graduating Class in Arts.) 2. The Historical Society Gold Medal Marion Mitchell (History.) Third Year 1. University Scholarship, |75.00 Harold D. Smith (General Proficiency.) 2. University Scholarship, $75.00 H R. Lyle Streight (General Proficiency.) 3. The Arts '19 Scholarship, $150.00 David C. Warden (Standing and Character.) 4. The Gerald Myles Harvey Prize, Books, $50.00 No award (Essays in Economics or Political Science.) Second Year 1. The McGill Graduates' Scholarship, $137.50 George F. Davidson (First in English and French.) 2. University Scholarship, $75.00 George F. Davidson, by (General Proficiency.) reversion to Eleanor G. Dyer 3. University Scholarship, $75.00 Eleanor G. Dyer and Earland C. Hallonquist, by reversion to F. Abner Poole 4. Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship, $110.00 Annie Taylor 5. The Scott Memorial Scholarship, $110.00 Verna Z. Lucas (First in Biology.) 6. The Shaw Memorial Scholarship, $137.50.. .George F. Davidson, by reversion to Earland G. Hallonquist (First in English, Latin and Greek.) First Year 1. Royal Institutional Scholarship, $75.00 Howard G. Nicholson (General Proficiency.) 2. Royal Institutional Scholarship, $75.00 Joshua J. M. Jacob (General Proficiency.) 3. Royal Institutional Scholarship, $75.00 H. Muriel Daniels (General Proficiency.) 4. The Vancouver Women's Conservative Association Prize, $25.00— Equal, Alan James Macdonald, David William Macdonald (First in Mathematics.) 5. P. E. O. Sisterhood Scholarship, $75.00 Alice M. G. White (First in English.) Faculty of Applied Science For Post Graduate Studies The Dean Brock Scholarship, $100.00 .George W. H Norman Fourth Year 1. The Convocation Scholarship, $50.00 '. .Robert H. Baylis (General Proficiency.) 294 The University op British Columbia 2. The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize, Book, $25. .Francis G. A. Tarr (Engineering Thesis.) Third Year The Dunsmuir Scholarship, $165.00 Jack D. Shannon (Highest in Mining Engineering.) Second Year University Scholarship, $75.00 James Sinclair (General Proficiency.) First Year Roya.1 Institution Scholarship, $75.00 Alois H. Rudnicki (General Proficiency.) Nursing Fourth Year f^^k' Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship.. .Frances Emily Lyne Public Health Nursing .Provincial Board of Health Prize, $36.00 Margaret E. Kerr Provincial Board of Health Prize, $34.00 Florence Innes Provincial Board of Health Prize, $30.00 Louisa Drysdale Faculty of Agriculture For Post Graduate Studies W. C. Macdonald Scholarship, $500.00 Charles T. Townsend Third Year The B. C. Fruit Growers' Association Scholarship, $100.00— (Horticulture.) Lester D. Mallory First Year University Scholarship, $75.00 Lindsay M. Black (General Proficiency.) General—(Open) For Post Graduate Studies 1. University Scholarship, $200.00 William Chalmers (Special Aptitude.) 2. The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship, $100.00 Sadie M. Boyles 3. University Book Prize, $25.00 A. Earle Birney (Literary—Essay.) 4. The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship, $110.00— (Canadian History.) Gwendolen M. Musgrave 5. The Historical Society Prize, $25.00 Gwendolen M. Musgrave (Essay on an assigned subject.) 6. The Captain LeRoy Memorial Scholarship, $250.00— (Returned Soldier.) George W. Waddlngton L_ Medals, Scholarships, and Prizes 295 7. The Players' Club Prize, $50.00 . .No award (Original Play.) 8. University Scholarship for Returned Soldiers, $75.00— Thomas B. Lott 9. University Scholarship for Returned Soldiers, $75.00— William H. Christie 10. The Letters Club Prize, $25.00 No award 11. The Nichol Scholarship Dorothy Dallas The Nichol Scholarship (Continuing) Jack Huggett 12. The Native Sons of Canada Scholarship (Thesis in Canadian History.) First Prize, $350.00 Marion Mitchell Second Prize, $150.00 Fnanklin Levirs THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY SUMMER SESSION, 1927 Six Weeks—July 4th to August 13th The University Summer Session began in 1920 as a Summer School for teachers. Its original purpose was to provide instruction in the subjects of the First Year of the University course for teachers in service who desired to qualify for First Class certificates. In 1921 the name was changed and work was enlarged to include a number of Second Year subjects and provision was made whereby those attending might complete the work of the first two years. Since 1921 a number of Summer Session students have succeeded in obtaining the thirty units of credit prescribed for the First and Second Years and a definite demand for more advanced courses has arisen. In addition to the regular academic courses the Summer Session has conducted classes in Commercial Subjects designed to assist candidates for the Commercial Certificate. It has also given special courses designed to acquaint teachers with the newer aspects of educational practice, such as mental measurements, vocational guidance and the psychology of special subjects of the elementary and high school curriculum. These special courses will be continued in the Summer Session of 1927. The Summer Session Announcement, giving details of courses and particulars as to fees, etc., is issued early in the spring of each year and may be obtained free by application to the Registrar. Bequests for special information should be addressed to The Director of the Summer Session, The University of British Columbia, Vancouver, B. C. 298 The University op British Columbia STUDENT ORGANIZATION In order that the activities of the student body may be effectively carried on, the Alma Mater Society has been organized, with a governing executive called the Students' Council. It is the duty of the Students' Council to control all the activities of the societies subsidiary to the Alma Mater Society. Each student on admittance to the University automatically becomes a member of the Alma Mater Society. All student activities are regulated and questions of student discipline are controlled by the Students' Council. It consists of ten members, chosen from the Third and Fourth Years. With the exception of the Editor-in-chief of the "Ubyssey," the members are elected by ballot at the close of the session preceding their term of office. In order that the work may be carried on to the best advantage, considerable funds are necessary, and the Alma Mater fee of $7.00, compulsory for all students, is designed to cover the expenses incurred. Students upon entering the University have an opportunity to take part in practically all lines of sport, as well as to participate in debating and public speaking, and various other activities which are more clearly indicated below. Publications Board The Publications Board is best known from the Handbook, the "Ubyssey" and the "Annual." In the first of these an attempt is made to compile information valuable to the undergraduate. The "Ubyssey," the College paper, is published twice a week. The members of the Staff are Students selected as a result of voluntary competition. The "Annual," which is published at the end of the spring term, summarizes the activities of the various classes and societies. Literary and Scientific Department The Literary and Scientific Department co-ordinates the workings of its constituent Societies, which are indicated below. In the Players' Club, those whose talents lie in the direction of the drama may find medium of expression. Student Organization 299 The Musical Society, membership in which is granted as a result of competitive try-outs, consists of an orchestra and mixed chorus comprising over a hundred students under professional leadership. For those interested in public speaking and debating there are the Men's Literary Society, the Women's Literary Society and the Agriculture Discussion Club. The Chemistry Society, the Engineering Discussion Club, the Social Science Club, the Live-stock Club and the G. M. Dawson Discussion Club offer a field for discussion of Scientific and Social problems. ^^ Women's Athletics The Women's Athletic Association comprises all the women's athletic clubs of the University, the chief of which are herewith briefly described: The Women's Basketball Club enters two teams in the City League. The Women's Swimming Club competes with the V.A.S.C., and also against Victoria during the annual trip. This year a course in life-saving has been given. The women may join the Badminton and Tennis clubs, which are under the Men's Athletic Association. The Grass Hockey Club, though not entered in a league, plays challenge games against the High Schools, New Westminster and Victoria. The Women's Gymnasium Club meets once a week, under a physical instructor. The Track Club holds, with the Men's Track Club, a joint meet which takes place annually at Brockton Point, one of the women's events being the relay for the Arts '25 Cup. A Training Club for all women playing on any University team. This club meets twice a week, under the supervision of the University trainer. Inter-class matches are arranged in basketball, badminton, swimming, track, etc., for which points are awarded, the winning 300 The University of British Columbia class being the holders of the Chris. Spencer Cup for the ensuing year. Men's Athletics The Men's Athletic Association endeavors to foster all branches of clean and manly sport. The Rugby season opens at the beginning of the Fall Term. Practices are held once a week, and teams are entered by the Rugby Club as follows: Two teams play in the Miller Cup League for the city championship, and from these a First Team is chosen to play in the McKechnie Cup League for the provincial championship. The Second and Freshmen teams, the latter comprised entirely of Freshmen, play in the Intermediate League of the city for the Province Cup. Basketball season follows that of Rugby. Four teams, two senior and two intermediate, are chosen and entered in the City League. The Soccer Club enters three teams in the City leagues. The first team plays in the Pacific Coast League and in the provincial championship series. The second team plays in the Second Division, while the third team is entered in the Junior League. t ™ The Track Club takes charge of all field events, its big features being the Western Canada Inter-collegiate Amateur Athletic Union track meet, the Arts '20 relay race, and the annual inter-class track meet. The Men's Grass Hockey Club, recently formed, enters a team in the City League. The Rowing Club is affiliated with the Vancouver Rowing Club, and retains its identity as a University Club. The Ice Hockey Club enters a team each year in the city series. The Outdoors Club takes charge of all picnics, hikes, mountain climbing, excursions, and outdoor parties. The Tennis Tournament takes place after the opening of the Fall Term, and the championship games are played in men's and women's singles and doubles, and also mixed doubles. Student Organization 301 The Badminton Club holds practices and games in the evenings throughout the winter. The Boxing and the Swimming Clubs meet once a week during the winter, under capable instructors. Alumni Association This organization was formed in May, 1917. It is composed of Honorary, Active, and Associate members. Honorary membership includes all members of the Faculty. Active membership includes all Associate members who have paid their annual fee of $2.00 for town members, $1.00 for out-of-town members. All graduates of the University automatically become Associate members on graduating. The purpose of the Association is to further the interests of the University and the Alumni. To accomplish this purpose the Association aims to keep its members interested in the University and the Alma Mater, so that they may know their college not only as it was, but as it is, and can be. To carry out these aims general meetings are held every two months during the University term. In addition, a directory of our graduates is sent to all Active members, while news bulletins are sent to both Active and Associate members. There are four standing committees in the Association, which seek to foster interest in athletics, music, dramatics and publications among members of the Association, and throughout the Province in other organizations. VICTORIA COLLEGE (IN AFFILIATION WITH THE UNIVERSITY OF B.C.) STAFF Edward B. Pawl, M.A. LL.D. (Aberdeen), Principal, Associate Professor of Classics. H. H. Smith, B.A. (Toronto), Registrar, Demonstrator in Physical and Chemical Laboratories. Pntcr H. Elliott, M.Sc. (McGill), Associate Professor of Science. Miss Jeanette A. Caxw, B.L. (Dalhousie), Assistant Professor of English and Philosophy. Mme. E. Sandemon-Monoin, Assistant Professor of French. B. S. Hartley, M.A. (Cambridge), Assistant Professor of Mathematics. E. S. Fabb, B.A., LL.B. (Toronto), Instructor in History and Economics. J. A. Cunningham, B.A. (Queen's), Instructor in Biology. The College at Victoria, B. C, gives instruction in the first two years of the course in Arts and Science. The courses offered are: First and Second Years The work of the first two years consists of 30 uni
- Library Home /
- Search Collections /
- Open Collections /
- Browse Collections /
- UBC Publications /
- The University of British Columbia Calendar
Open Collections
UBC Publications
Featured Collection
UBC Publications
The University of British Columbia Calendar 1927
jpg
Page Metadata
Item Metadata
Title | The University of British Columbia Calendar |
Publisher | Vancouver : [University of British Columbia] |
Date Issued | 1927 |
Subject |
University of British Columbia |
Geographic Location |
Vancouver (B.C.) |
Genre |
Periodicals |
Type |
Text |
FileFormat | application/pdf |
Language | English |
Notes | Titles in chronological order: Annual Calendar of the McGill University College of British Columbia (1909 - 1914) ; Calendar of the University of British Columbia (1915 - 1919) ; Calendar University of British Columbia (1920 - 1922) ; The University of British Columbia Calendar (1923 - 1964) ; UBC Calendar (1963 - 1968) ; The University of British Columbia 69/70 Fifty-Fifth Session ; The University of British Columbia 70/71 Fifty-Sixth Session ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Seventh Session Calendar 1971/72 ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Eighth Session Calendar 1972/73 ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Ninth Session Calendar 1973-4 ; The University of British Columbia Vancouver, Canada Sixtieth Session Calendar 1974/5 ; The University of British Columbia Vancouver/Canada Sixty-First Session Calendar 1975-76 ; 1976-1977 The University of British Columbia Sixty-Second Session Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1977/78 Sixty-Third Session Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 64th Session 1978/1979 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 65th Session 1979/1980 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 66th Session 1980-1981 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 66th Session 1981-82 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 68th Session 1982-83 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 69th Session 1983-84 Calendar ; UBC 1984/85 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 71st Session 1985-86 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 72nd Session 1986-87 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 73rd Session 1987-88 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 74th Session 1988-89 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 75th Session 1989-90 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 76th Session 1990-91 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 77th Session 1991-92 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 78th Session 1992-93 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 79th Session 1993-94 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1994/95 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1995/96 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1997/98 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1998/99 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1999/2000 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 2000/2001 Calendar ; 2001/2002 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2003/04 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2004/2005 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2005/2006 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2006/07 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2007/08 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2008/09. |
Identifier | LE3 .B8 LE3_B8_1927-28 |
Collection |
University Publications |
Source | Original Format: University of British Columbia. Archives |
Date Available | 2016-06-22 |
Provider | Vancouver : University of British Columbia Library |
Rights | Images provided for research and reference use only. Permission to publish, copy, or otherwise use these images must be obtained from The University of British Columbia Enrolment Services: direct inquiries to www.students.ubc.ca/calendar |
CatalogueRecord | http://resolve.library.ubc.ca/cgi-bin/catsearch?bid=1209095 |
DOI | 10.14288/1.0169756 |
AggregatedSourceRepository | CONTENTdm |
Download
- Media
- calendars-1.0169756.pdf
- Metadata
- JSON: calendars-1.0169756.json
- JSON-LD: calendars-1.0169756-ld.json
- RDF/XML (Pretty): calendars-1.0169756-rdf.xml
- RDF/JSON: calendars-1.0169756-rdf.json
- Turtle: calendars-1.0169756-turtle.txt
- N-Triples: calendars-1.0169756-rdf-ntriples.txt
- Original Record: calendars-1.0169756-source.json
- Full Text
- calendars-1.0169756-fulltext.txt
- Citation
- calendars-1.0169756.ris